Category: Potter

firealarmresources.com

Fireray 50/100RU Optical Beam Detector Fireray 50/100RU system is a reflective beam smoke detector, comprises of a single unit incorporating an infra-red transmitter receiver. The signal generated in the transmitter element and by the prism back to the receiver element is analyzed for the of smoke. The internal microprocessor determines an alarm when a predetermined level is reached. product is designed to be mounted so the beam will project 19″ (0.5 m) and 24″ (0.6m) below and parallel to the ceiling. detection may be up to 30ft. (9.144m) on either side of the providing a maximum total coverage area of up to 19,800 feet (60ft. x 330ft. or 18.29m x 100m). For installations with UL268/NFPA72, the maximum distance of Detector and ceiling. Specification projected beam type smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 12/24 device to be used with a separately supplied 4-wire control The OBSD shall be listed to U.L. 268 and shall consist of an transmitter and receiver. The detector shall operate a range of 16.5 ft. to 330 ft. (5m to 100m). The range of the beam shall be -4 to 131 (-20 to The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control will compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt on the lenses. The unit shall be capable of mounting to the wall or to a surface back box. Testing shall be carried by using a calibrated obscuration test filter. The Reflective beam smoke detector shall be a FFE Ltd. or 100RU (160ft-300ft / 50m-100m). (16.5ft-60ft / Models based on coverage: 16.5 ft. to 160 ft. (5m to 50m) 50RU 160 ft. to 330 ft. (50m to 100m) 100RU set up and alignment compact housing obscuration test filter included controlled latching or auto reset gain control VDC or 24 VDC operation alarm and trouble contacts Test Station available 50RU/100RU Reflector from the ceiling must be 10% of the distance between selectable alarm thresholds: 25%, 35% or 50% Detection 50/100RU Specification Retardant ABS Rating: lbs (0.68 kg) H x 4.5 D x 4.75 W H x 114.3mm D x 120mm W) Specification Input Power: to 30 VDC Current: @ 24VDC Current: Contacts: Time: mA @ 24 VDC at 30 VDC Resistive Seconds maximum Up Time: Seconds Wavelength: Threshold: 35%, 50% Rating: to 131 (-20 to +55 UL Listed Installations, to 100 (0 to 38 Humidity: to 93% RH non-condensing 16.5-160 ft. (5m-50m) 160-330 ft. (50m-100m) – S3417 – 70-02-E – S3417 – 7260-1508-102 – 70-02-E – 2243 Ltd Jamike Ave Ste 200 41018-3147 USA 957 1570 534 1526 known as Fire Fighting Enterprises Ltd (120mm) (126mm) (100mm) (70mm) Information beam smoke detector 16.5ft-160ft. (50m) (0206-02) beam smoke detector 160ft-330ft. (100m) (0206-03) Test Station (0400) Mount Back Box for 50RU/100RU Beam Detectors Mount Wall Bracket for 50RU/100RU Beam Detectors Test Filter Prism Alignment Bracket Base for 5000-007 and 5000-008 Prism Wall Bracket 4 Prism Alignment Bracket 1 Prism Alignment Bracket Ceiling Pendant Mount Bracket Wire Protective Cage and wiring information are provided for only and are believed to be accu

Features piezo Sounder for Fire alarm Indoor applications Low current and High Sound Output Wide range operating temperature 32 to 120 (0 to 50 Ideal for Residential or Commercial application 6 3/4 wire leads for Easy field wiring available in red or white Jumper selectable temporal 3 or continuous tone product includes a 5 year warranty Multitone feature allows selection of Temporal 3 evacuation as requred by NFpa 72 or steady tone MT-Mini Horn is an inexpensive alternative for a low current volt aC piezo Remote Signaling Device that is ideally suited hotels, motels, apartments, institutional and residential fire alarm where a dependable alarm signal is required. The MT-Mini is comprised of a single gang size plate and a 120 VaC piezo The horn emits a high dB output selectable as either temporal 3 continuous with a very small current draw. The MT-Mini Horn is in red and white and mounts on a single gang box. Leads are for quick connection to the wiring circuit. MT Mini Horn series is intended for use in fire protective signaling and shall be installed in accordance with all applicable local and standards and the authority having jurisdiction. The device be installed in a standard single gang electric enclosure. all shall be in accordance with the National electrical Code, 70, and the National Fire alarm and Signaling Code, NFpa CSa C22.1, Canadian electrical Code, part I, Safety Standard for Installations, Section 32, and CaN/ULC-S524. The MT mini horn is intended for indoor use only and is not listed for use. When mounted on a wall, the top of the device shall not less than 90 aFF and not less than 6 below the ceiling. National Fire alarm code, NFpa 72, the National Building of Canada, CaN/ULC S524 and CaN/ULC S525 require that notification appliances used to notify occupants of the need evacuate or relocate shall produce a temporal 3 pattern. dBa at 10 per aNSI/UL464 VaC ma Specifications Voltage Current Mode: Horn Mode 3 Horn Mode anechoic at 10 Horn Mode 3 Horn Mode Temperature Range to +150 (0 to 50 (polyethylene terephthelate) selection: red/white (do not paint) No. 18 aWg stranded wires 6.75 long or ceiling mount x 4.48 x 0.5 Termination Type Sound Level in the indoor installation may vary depending on space. Installation must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with all national and local codes and injury or death could result. or death could result. Shock hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Risk of explosion. Not for use in hazardous locations. Serious page 1 OF 2 1 PAS PEINTURER in mm in mm in mm in mm PLCS in mm View Wiring 2 Characteristics 3 SIGNAL DEVICE SMALL SCREWDRIVER TO SWITCH TO THE LEFT FOR OR TO THE RIGHT FOR 3. FACTORY SETTING IS 30 75 90 110 POWER SOURCE OR MINI HORN POWER SOURCE OR MINI HORN (IN) NEXT MINI HORN OR EACH OUT SEPERATELY (OUT) (OUT) NEXT MINI HORN OR EACH OUT SEPERATELY (IN) (IN) (IN) Information ReD 120 VaC MINIHORN WHITe 120 VaC MINIHORN No. (OUT) (OUT) page 2 OF 2

Fireray 50/100RU Optical Beam Detector Fireray 50/100RU system is a reflective beam smoke detector, comprises of a single unit incorporating an infra-red transmitter receiver. The signal generated in the transmitter element and by the prism back to the receiver element is analyzed for the of smoke. The internal microprocessor determines an alarm when a predetermined level is reached. product is designed to be mounted so the beam will project 19″ (0.5 m) and 24″ (0.6m) below and parallel to the ceiling. detection may be up to 30ft. (9.144m) on either side of the providing a maximum total coverage area of up to 19,800 feet (60ft. x 330ft. or 18.29m x 100m). For installations with UL268/NFPA72, the maximum distance of Detector and ceiling. Specification projected beam type smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 12/24 device to be used with a separately supplied 4-wire control The OBSD shall be listed to U.L. 268 and shall consist of an transmitter and receiver. The detector shall operate a range of 16.5 ft. to 330 ft. (5m to 100m). The range of the beam shall be -4 to 131 (-20 to The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control will compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt on the lenses. The unit shall be capable of mounting to the wall or to a surface back box. Testing shall be carried by using a calibrated obscuration test filter. The Reflective beam smoke detector shall be a FFE Ltd. or 100RU (160ft-300ft / 50m-100m). (16.5ft-60ft / Models based on coverage: 16.5 ft. to 160 ft. (5m to 50m) 50RU 160 ft. to 330 ft. (50m to 100m) 100RU set up and alignment compact housing obscuration test filter included controlled latching or auto reset gain control VDC or 24 VDC operation alarm and trouble contacts Test Station available 50RU/100RU Reflector from the ceiling must be 10% of the distance between selectable alarm thresholds: 25%, 35% or 50% Detection 50/100RU Specification Retardant ABS Rating: lbs (0.68 kg) H x 4.5 D x 4.75 W H x 114.3mm D x 120mm W) Specification Input Power: to 30 VDC Current: @ 24VDC Current: Contacts: Time: mA @ 24 VDC at 30 VDC Resistive Seconds maximum Up Time: Seconds Wavelength: Threshold: 35%, 50% Rating: to 131 (-20 to +55 UL Listed Installations, to 100 (0 to 38 Humidity: to 93% RH non-condensing 16.5-160 ft. (5m-50m) 160-330 ft. (50m-100m) – S3417 – 70-02-E – S3417 – 7260-1508-102 – 70-02-E – 2243 Ltd Jamike Ave Ste 200 41018-3147 USA 957 1570 534 1526 known as Fire Fighting Enterprises Ltd (120mm) (126mm) (100mm) (70mm) Information beam smoke detector 16.5ft-160ft. (50m) (0206-02) beam smoke detector 160ft-330ft. (100m) (0206-03) Test Station (0400) Mount Back Box for 50RU/100RU Beam Detectors Mount Wall Bracket for 50RU/100RU Beam Detectors Test Filter Prism Alignment Bracket Base for 5000-007 and 5000-008 Prism Wall Bracket 4 Prism Alignment Bracket 1 Prism Alignment Bracket Ceiling Pendant Mount Bracket Wire Protective Cage and wiring information are provided for only and are believed to be accu

550-0622-000 Bases: & PAD100-4DB PAD100-PHD, PAD200-PD, PAD200-PHD, PAD200-PCHD, PAD100-HD and PAD100-CD Description document provides instructions for mounting and wiring the Detector PAD100-6DB and PAD100-4DB. The following detectors are compatible Detector Base PAD100-6DB and PAD100-4DB. PAD200-PD & PAD100-PD: PAD200-PHD & PAD100-PHD: Photoelectric Smoke / Heat Detector Smoke / CO Detector PAD200-PCD: Smoke / CO Detector/ Heat Detector PAD200-PCHD: Detector PAD100-HD: PAD100-CD: Monoxide Detector Smoke Detector Field Wiring Diagrams field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 1). SLC supports NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. THE DETECTORS AND THE PAD100 MODULES MUST HAVE ADDRESS(ES). To install the detector head onto the base, match the detector heads the base using the alignment feature and twist clockwise until the heads snap into place (FIGURE 2). Features FACP (SLC) Detector Base Detector Base 1: Wiring (Style B) PAD100-6DB or PAD100-4DB of NFPA Style B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using either the PAD100-6DB or base (FIGURE 1). In Style A arrangement two separate would return from the last detector base to a listed compatible Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In Style X, it is required to use PAD100-IB Isolator Bases) and typical field diagram is in the PAD100-IB Manual. be dressed properly at the time of installation NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD 72. OF ARTICLE 300.3(B) OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL NFPA 70, AS WELL AS ARTICLE 210. Wiring Instruction To ensure proper installation of the detector head to the base, wires Using PAD100 Bases, observe the correct polarity of SLC wiring. WIRING TO BE USED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Break wire runs to provide supervision for connections made to wire pair. Base Mounting / PAD100-4DB should be mounted directly on the electrical box. PAD100-6DB mounting holes are configured for a single gang, double octagon or 4 square box. The PAD100-4DB mounting holes are for a 3-1/2 octagon box. Use a box for each base and run the circuit to all base locations. 12 to 22 AWG conductors to connect to terminals of bases. It is that the SLC conductors be color-coded to avoid wiring errors assist in system troubleshooting. Improper SLC connections may the system from operating normally. Disconnect power to the SLC the detectors are installed. Wire the detector bases according to Field Wiring Diagrams. Use the dip switches (SECTION 11) to set address(es) (1 – 127) for each head. 2: Assembly of Detector apply power to the FACP. After all detector heads, addressable bases and modules have been Test the detectors as described in the Testing Section of this manual. DO NOT INSTALL DETECTOR HEADS UNTIL AREA HAS BEEN CLEANED TO REMOVE CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, DUST, AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 72. Spacing Limitations REFER TO NFPA 72 FOR SPECIFIC INFORMATION REGARDING SPACING, MOUNTING LOCATION AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS. PAD200-PD, PAD200-PCD, PAD200-PCHD, PAD100-PHD and Photoelectric Smoke Detector PAD200-PD, PAD200-PCD, PAD200-PCHD, PAD100-PHD and PAD200- are ANSI/UL listed on maximum 30ft spacing limitation with alarm set point 135O-174O F on smooth ceiling. Refer to NFPA 72 for specific information detector spacing, placement and special applications. Heat Detector ANSI/UL listed spacing limitations of PAD100-HD smooth ceiling are Set-Point to 174O F to 79O C) to 185O F to 85O C) to 160O F to 71O C) of Rise Spacing Temperature Spacing 60 ft. 60 ft. 15 ft. 15 ft. 70 ft. 70 ft. on alarm set point. Testing shall be performed periodically to determine if each detector properly. Detectors will offer maximum performance when tested compliance with NFPA 72. REFER TO FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) MANUAL FOR OF DIRTY VALUE READ / PRINT, ALARM A

550-0671-000 Bases: PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB PAD100-PHD, PAD200-PD, PAD200-PHD, PAD200-PCHD, PAD100-HD and PAD100-CD Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-RB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 4). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. FACP (SLC) NO Base SLC – + C NO Base SLC – + + – + – 4: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-RB NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-RB base (FIGURE 4). Class A arrangement two separate conductors return from the last detector base a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In Class X, it is required to PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases). The typical field diagram is in Field Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB section of this manual. Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-SB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 5). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. PWR + Base SLC – + PWR + Base SLC – + FACP (SLC) + – + – 5: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-SB ensure proper installation of the detector head to the base, wires shall be properly at the time of installation NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-SB base (FIGURE 5). In Class A arrangement two separate conductors would return from the last base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In Class X, it is to use PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases). The typical field diagram is Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB section of this manual. Wiring Instruction When using PAD100 Bases, observe the correct polarity of SLC wiring. THE WIRING TO BE USED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE Break wire runs to provide supervision for connections made to each pair. Base Mounting PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB should be mounted directly on the box. The PAD100-IB, PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB mounting holes are for a single gang, 4 octagon or 4 square box. Use a box for each base run the power circuit to all base locations. OF ARTICLE 300.3(B) OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, 70, AS WELL AS ARTICLE 210. EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD 72. Number: 550-0671 Description document provides instructions for mounting and wiring the Detector Bases PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB. The following detectors are compatible Detector Bases PAD100-IB, PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB. PAD200-PD & PAD100-PD: PAD200-PHD & PAD100-PHD: Photoelectric Smoke / Heat Detector PAD200-PCD: Smoke / CO Detector Smoke / CO Detector/ Heat Detector PAD200-PCHD: Detector PAD100-HD: PAD100-CD: Monoxide Detector Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 1). SLC supports NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. Smoke Detector SLC2 + Base SLC2 + SLC2 + Base FACP (SLC) BASE BASE / MODULE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 1: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-IB NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-IB base (FIGURE 1). In A (FIGURE 2) arrangement two separate conducts would return from the last base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In X, it is required to use PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases (FIGURE 3). BASE BASE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IB NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 2: Wiring (Class A) Using PAD100-IB AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IB NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 3: Wiring (Class X) Using PAD100-IB 12 to 22 AWG conductors to connect to t

550-0706-000 Bases: PAD100-SPKB PAD100-PHD, PAD200-PD, PAD200-PHD, PAD200-PCHD, PAD100-HD and PAD100-CD Smoke Detector Description document provides instructions for mounting and wiring the detector bases and PAD100-SPKB. The following detectors are compatible with detec- bases PAD100-LFSB and PAD100-SPKB. PAD200-PD & PAD100-PD: PAD200-PHD & PAD100-PHD: Photoelectric Smoke / Heat Detector Smoke / CO Detector PAD200-PCD: Smoke / CO Detector/ Heat Detector PAD200-PCHD: Detector PAD100-HD: PAD100-CD: Monoxide Detector Field Wiring Diagram for PAD100-LFSB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 1). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. (FIGURE 1) Typical of NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) using the PAD100-LFSB base. In Class A arrangement two separate conduc- would return from the last detector base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Panel (FACP). 4: PAD100-SPKB Wiring Diagram power taps using nose pliers. PWR + Base SLC – + PWR + Base SLC – + FACP (SLC) + – + – 5: PAD100-SPKB Wiring and Power Tap 1: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-LFSB X Wiring (FIGURE 2), requires use of PAD100-IM (Addressable Isolator Module). typical field diagram is in Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IM. The PAD100-IM can be obtained at www.pottersignal.com MODULE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IM NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 2: Wiring (Class X) Using PAD100-LFSB and PAD100-IM 3: PAD100-LFSB Wiring Field Wiring Diagram for PAD100-SPKB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 4). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. The PAD100-SPKB offer a choice of field power taps: 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watts (FIGURE 5) for use with either 25 or 70.7 VRMs audio amplifiers. The frequency range of the PAD100-SPKB is Hz. The PAD100-SPKB is suitable for line supervision. The PAD100-SPKB in- DC blocking capacitor which allows for supervision voltage of either polarity. wiring. SUPERVISION OF CONNECTION. ensure proper installation of the detector head to the base, wires shall be properly at the time of installation ARTICLE 300.3(B) OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70, AS WELL ARTICLE 210. EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD 72. Wiring Instruction When using PAD100-SPKB / PAD100-LFSB base, observe the correct polarity of THE WIRING TO BE USED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS DO NOT USE LOOPED WIRE UNDER TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE RUN TO Break wire runs to provide supervision for connections made to each wire pair. When installing, route field wiring away from sharp projections, corners and components. Base Mounting / PAD100-SPKB should be mounted directly on the electrical box (FIG- 6a) or to the LFSBBB-W back box (FIGURE 6b). The PAD100-LFSB / PAD100-SPKB holes are configured for a 4 x 2-1/8 deep square box. Use a box for each and run the power circuit to all base locations. 12 to 18 AWG conductors to connect to terminals of bases. It is that the SLC conductors be color-coded to avoid wiring errors and in system troubleshooting. Improper SLC connections may prevent the system operating normally. Disconnect power to the SLC until the detectors are Wire the detector bases according to Field Wiring Diagrams. Use the dip switches (SECTION 11) to set address(es) (1 – 127) for each detector THE PAD100-LFSB /PAD100-SPKB OBTAINS THE ADDRESS FROM THE THE DETECTORS AND THE PAD100 MODULES MUST HAVE INDIVIDUAL To install the detector head onto the base, match the detector heads to the using the alignment feature and twist clockwise until the detector heads into place (FIGURE 6a). HEAD. Number: 550-0706 the /

No text preview available.

Features Extends output voltage to 70VRMS on dual channel amplifiers Mounts in the DCA-5025 and DCA-10025 enclosure Equipped with a stacker bracket for secure mounting 70V-1000 module extends the output voltage to 70V on the DCA- and DCA-10025. The 70V-1000 is equipped with a stacker for secure mounting. mA Specifications Current (32 mA @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 70V-1000 is connected to the DCA-5025 and DCA-10025 using eight (8) pin ribbon cable. The connection is supervised, and power The 70V-1000 must be mounted in the DCA enclosure. The is equipped with a bracket for secure and accessible mounting. Information 70V EXTENDER FOR AMPLIFIERS W/STACKER No. PAGE 2 OF 2

AB-4 SenSor BASe Sheet Intuitive Terminal Marking to assist with Installation Will mount to Single, Double Gang, Octagon or 4 Square Terminals will accept 14 to 22 AWG wire 7165-0328:0194 includes a 5 year warranty 4 base is used to mount the smoke or heat sensor to the electrical back box. The AB-4 terminals are intuitively marked for installation and quick connection. The base will accept 14 to 22 AWG wire. The AB-4 will mount on a single gang, double octagon or 4 square box. Wiring Diagrams 1: Analog Detector Wiring Example FACP or the previous device on the SLC loop the next addressable device specifications are subject to change without notice. For further information, contact Potter Electric Signal Company Support. Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-956-1211 Tech Support: 866-240-1870 Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8830014 – REV A-1 1 OF 1

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PSA and PSHA photoelectric type smoke detectors. Model PSHA employs a heat sensor. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product and operational considerations. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, electrical rating and UL label. as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units when used in conjunction with listee’s Models AB-4, AB-6, ASB, AIB and ARB with supplemental heat sensor are not approved for use in lieu of the required detectors. bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features Terminals Marked with Polarity to assist with installation Duplicate terminals for in and out SLC wiring Terminals accept 22 to 14 AWG wire sizes Installs on single gang, double gang, octagon or 4 square box Locking tab prevents unauthorized detector removal Product includes 5 year warranty Number: 1430806 Potter AB-6 detector base is used to install Potter addressable and heat detectors. The AB-6 will mount on a single gang, gang, octagon or 4 square electrical box. AB-6 is a low-profile, surface mount base used with Potter detectors. The base uses screw-clamp terminals that wire ranging from 22 to 14 AWG. When installed on recessed boxes the AB-6 is wide enough to completely cover the back and the immediate surrounding area. The base is equipped with locking tab to deter unauthorized removal of the attached detector. Specifications Options Single gang, double gang, octagon, and 4 Guage Weight box Type to 14 AWG diameter, 0.89 height without detector lb. Plastic PAGE 1 OF 2 Feature AB-6 includes a locking feature that prevents removal of the detector without using a tool. To eliminate this feature, break off the locking tab, and then install the detector. the plastic tab by twisting it toward the center of the base Diagram To remove the detector from the base when the locking feature has been enabled, insert a small screw driver into the slot on the base to push the tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise the small bladed screwdriver to push the locking tab FACP or the previous device on the SLC loop the next addressable device PAGE 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

A Brand BELL BOX 18 gauge cold rolled steel UL Listed motor driven low current bell (100mA at 12V DC) Dual-wired, UL Listed reed tamper switches Salt spray and rust resistance 12V DC operating voltage Durable, weather-resistant powder coat paint Suitable for use with most control panels Evenly spaced louvers for a higher sound output Overall size 14 x 14 x 4 More space for your company logo Exterior color is beige ABB-1012 is a rugged indoor/outdoor slim-line bell box, designed to withstand harsh environment conditions. The box is constructed of a heavy welded 18 gauge steel with a durable beige powder coat finish to prevent corrosion. It operates on 12V DC and draws a low 100mA. ABB-1012 implements an exclusive UL Listed, low current, patented motor driven bell mounted to a removable inner baffle plate and generates sound ouput of 100 plus decibles. Two UL approved reed tamper switches are designed into the bell box to provide complete tamper protection. Motor Driven Bell Voltage Rated Current Sound Output Gong Weight 1/2 inches (mm) 4 (101.6) (355.6) baffle plate Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850057 – REV B 1/10 1 OF 1

A Brand SLIMLINE BELL BOX 18 gauge cold rolled steel UL Listed motor driven low current bell (100mA at 12V DC) Dual-wired, UL Listed reed tamper switches Salt spray and rust resistance 12V DC operating voltage Durable, weather-resistant powder coat paint Suitable for use with most control panels Evenly spaced louvers for a higher sound output Overall size 14 x 14 x 4 Exterior color is almond number – 4010003 ABB-1014 is a rugged outdoor slim-line bell box, designed to withstand harsh environment conditions. The box is constructed of a heavy welded 18 gauge steel with a durable almond powder coat finish to prevent corrosion. It operates on 12V DC and draws a low The ABB-1014 implements an exclusive UL Listed, low current, patented motor driven bell mounted to a removable inner baffle plate generates a sound ouput of 100 plus decibles. Two UL approved reed tamper switches are designed into the bell box to provide complete protection. inches (mm) Gong DC mA dBA 8 V DC Switch Cur- Weight 1/2 (355.6) 4 (101.6) baffle plate Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850058 – REV B 1/10 1 OF 1

ABB-1033 MOTOR BELL AND BOX Low current motor driven bell (60mA at 12V DC) 2 reed tamper switches (PSW-1) for outer covers, inner baffle plate, and back of box 12V DC operating voltage Durable, weather resistant powder coating paint Suitable for use with most control panels Evenly spaced louvers for a higher sound output Exterior color: Beige number – 4010009 Brand View ABB-1033 box is constructed of steel with a durable beige powder coating finish to prevent corrosion. It operates on 12V DC and draws low 60mA. The ABB-1033 implements an exclusive low current patented motor driven bell mounted to a removable inner baffle plate and a sound output of 85 dB at 10 ft. in the open field. Two reed plunder switches (PSW-1) are designed into the bell box to provide tamper protection. Dimensions: inches (mm) Box Inside view Voltage Current at 12V DC Output dBA at 10 ft. Voltage Switch Current Gong Size DC DC in. Box Dimensions: inches (mm) (275) (95) (192) Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850059 – REV B 1 OF 1

UL and cUL Listed, FM Approved W x 4-1/2″ H x 2″ D (Approximate) Rating: N.O. momentary contact rated. Amps @ 24 VDC (5 mA minimum) Specifications: use only number: 3001000 – RED BUTTON 3001004 – BLUE BUTTON Potter Abort Switch is designed to be wired to the abort terminals of the Potter PFC-4410-RC, PFC-4410A-RC and PFC-4410RC (9th releasing panels. The device consists of a stainless steel faceplate and a modular switch assembly. It is designed to mount on a standard gang electrical enclosure. FROM PANEL # 1136-1 Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com PAGE 1 OF 1

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] RCDS-1 and Abort Switch. Both devices are accessories for releasing panels. VDC, 2.5 Amps. accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Depending on applications, authority having jurisdiction should be consulted prior to insulation. name, model designation, electrical rating and UL label. as miscellaneous control accesssories fire alarm control units. Authority having jurisdiction should be consulted prior to separately use with fm listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

A Brand SERIES OR 4 CONDUCTOR TRANSFER CORD of Length Rating Rating of Length Rating Rating Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880111 – REV B 1 OF 1

Features Independent set and reset points Adjustable range of 25-300 PSIG Corrosion resistant For control of pumps, compressors, etc. when used with a motor Model ADPS is an Adjustable Deadband Pressure Switch with set and reset points that are adjustable throughout entire operating range of the switch. The minimum deadband span between set and reset points) may be obtained at any in the operating range of the switch. A change in pressure greater the high setting will reposition the switch mechanism to open or a single snap-action electrical switch. control device is designed for use as an operating control in sensing air, water, or any fluid not harmful to the pressure diaphragm or nitrile pressure-sealing o-ring. This device is not intended for applications in explosive or use with hazardous fluids. instances where an operating control would result in personal and/or loss of property, it is the responsibility of the installer add devices (safety, limit controls) that protect against, or systems supervisory systems) that warn of control failure. control of motors with HP ratings greater than those shown could the ADPS switch, resulting in sprinkler system damage and water flow. The installation of a pressure relief valve set or below the systems maximum operating pressure is recommended. Specifications PSIG Operating Range Deadband PSIG* PSIG Pressure Setting PSIG Temperature Contact to 180 (-20 to 82 NEMA Type 4Xm (IP66) enclosure indoor or outdoor use. (To maintain 4X rating, use Type 4 conduit hub.) Forged brass Pressure Connections Aluminum Diecast Base with Enclosure Beryllium Copper Diaphragm Nitrile Pressure Sealing O-ring Snap-action SPDT (Form C) 15 Amps at 125 VAC* 8 Amps at 250 VAC* 1/8 HP at 125 VAC 1/4 HP at 250 VAC Non-inductive loads only PSI is at the mid-range of the device. The differential may be as as 20 PSI when the ADPS is adjusted closer to the extremes of adjustable range. PAGE 1 OF 3 and Installation Model ADPS is typically mounted in an upright position on a flat surface by two screws through the mounting flanges on the base or by two – 20 screws into the back of the base. (See Fig. 1 for mounting dimensions.) Locate the switch where vibration, shock, and ambient temperature are minimal. avoid damage to the switch, always hold a wrench on the pressure connection hex when tightening pressure connections. Never tighten the connection by turning the switch housing into the fitting. 1 1 HOLE CONDUIT 1 1 HOLE HOLE CONDUIT CONDUIT #1080-1 #1080-1 #1080-1 x .50 DEEP 1 HOLES FOR MOUNTING OPTION 1 1 HOLES FOR HOLES FOR MOUNTING OPTION MOUNTING OPTION x .50 DEEP x .50 DEEP MOUNTING HOLES SCREWS MOUNTING MOUNTING HOLES HOLES SCREWS SCREWS 1 1 1 properly rated temperature supply wire for the anticipated service temperature. Make all electrical connections in accordance with the National Code and local regulations. A wiring check may be performed by manually actuating the switch actuator on the side of the snap-action switch the enclosure. (See Fig. 3) not loosen or remove the two (2) screws that secure the switch to the switch mounting bracket. 2 ACTION ON PRESSURE POINT) 1060-2 ACTION LOW PRESSURE POINT) PAGE 2 OF 3 two thumb adjustment dials, accessible through the enclosure cover, are used to adjust the set point and reset point of the switch. The d

June 16, 2017 / PCS Adjustment Procedure needed: air pressure source or Continuity tester quality pressure gauge with scale in small enough increments to accurately read pressure, suggest 1-2 psi / Differential The pressure difference between the high and low settings out – When the switch activates on the HIGH setting, this is the pressure at which the motor or pump will stop. in – When the switch restores on the LOW setting, this is the pressure at which the motor or pump will start. The minimum deadband is 12 psi, meaning there must be at least 12 psi between the low and high settings. 12 psi only be obtainable at the mid range of the ADPS, in the 125 175 psi area. As the adjustments get nearer to either end of the scale, the minimum deadband may be as high as 20 psi. Use the scale on the ADPS to preset the cut in and cut out points to the desired settings Set the air supply to 0 psi and connect the air supply to the ADPS Use the ohmmeter/continuity tester to confirm that there is continuity between the COM and NC terminals and there is no continuity between the COM and NO terminals. Place the ohmmeter/continuity tester on the COM and NO switch terminals, there should be no continuity Slowly increase the air pressure until the gauge reads either the desired cut out pressure or until the switch continuity, whichever comes first. Stop increasing the pressure If the pressure gauge indicates the desired cut out pressure before the switch shows continuity, slowly the high pressure adjustment wheel to the right one click at a time until the switch activates and continuity. Cycle the pressure up and down a few times to ensure consistent operation and make as necessary to obtain the correct cut out pressure setting. If the switch shows continuity before the pressure gauge indicates the desired cut out point, decrease pressure until the switch clears and there is no continuity. Slowly turn the high pressure adjustment one or two clicks to the left to increase the cut out point. Cycle the pressure up and down a few times ensure consistent operation and make adjustments as necessary to obtain the correct cut out pressure Repeat steps 5 a and b until the switch indicates continuity when the pressure gauge indicates the desired cut pressure. The exact cut out pressure may not be able to be reached as each click of the adjustment wheel may the setting by a few psi. After confirming the correct setting of the cut out point, slowly decrease the pressure until the pressure gauge the desired cut in point or the switch clears and does not show continuity, whichever happens first. Stop pressure If the switch clears and does not show continuity before the pressure gauge indicates the desired cut point, increase the pressure until the switch activates again and there is continuity. Slowly turn the low adjustment wheel one or two clicks to the right to decrease the cut in point. Cycle the pressure and down a few times to ensure consistent operation and make adjustments as necessary to obtain the cut in pressure setting. Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com PAGE 1 OF 2 If the pressure gauge indicates the desired cut in point and the switch still indicates continuity, slowly turn low pressure adjustment wheel to the left one click at a time to increase the cut in until the switch clears does not show continuity. Cycle the pressure up and down a few times to confirm consistent operation make adjustments as necessary to obtain the correct cut in pressure. Repeat steps 7 a and b until the switch indicates no continuity when the pressure gauge indicates the desired in pressure. The exact cut in pressure may not be able to be reached as each click of the adjustment wheel may the setting by a few psi. Because adjusting the cut in point may affect the cut out setting and vice versa, it is now necessary to increase the to check the cut out point and make adjustments if necessary. If the high pressure adjustment wheel needs to adjusted to change the cut out setting, remember to only turn the adjustment wheel one click at a time and cycle the a few times to confirm consistent operation. Then check the cut in setting as the low pressure adjustment wheel need to be adjusted. There is a fine balancing act to achieve the closest possible cut in and cut out points. to only turn the adjustment wheel one or two clicks a

No text preview available.

Features UUKL Listed for Smoke Control product includes a 5 year warranty Specifications expansion Card (WxHxD) x 27 3/8 x 4 5/8 ae-14 expansion enclosure accommodates up to 14 size SLCe-127, RLY-5, or other stacker bracket sized The enclosure size is (WxHxD) 19 x 27 3/8 x 4 5/8 the ae-14 enclosure to a suitable surface using #8 located in four of the five mounting holes provided. Expansion devices can be installed using in the upper shown using the #6 sized screw that is 32 threads per and 1/2 of an inch long. an additional four expanders can stacked on top of the upper four. Two additional expanders be installed using the lower locations. an additional four can then be stacked on top of these. page 1 OF 2 Information Enclosure No. page 2 OF 2

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] P100, P200, P300, PFC-6030, PFC-6075, PFC-6075R and PFC-6200 fire alarm units. Automatic, Manual, waterflow and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, releasing, remote station (PPU), proprietary (PPU) and central station (PPU) Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. System components: Class A Expander DACT 3006456, 3006467: Main Boards RA-6075R, RA-6500: Remote Annuciators 3005012: EOL Resistors PSN-1000(E): Fire Power Expander AE-8, AE-14; Power expander enclosures Loop Expander VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. meet the requirements of UL Standard 864, 9th edition. No. 05-01-13 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features 18 gage Steel enclosure accommodates up to 2 standard size stacker bracket expansion UUKL Listed for Smoke Control ae-2 expansion enclosure accommodates up to 2 standard size RLY-5, or other stacker bracket sized cards. The size is (WxHxD) 9 3/4 x 8 x 2 1/2 installed in the location shown using the #6-32 sized hex nuts. an additional expander can be stacked on top of the one that is directly attached to back box. 1 Specifications expansion Card Capacity (WxHxD) 9 3/4 x 8 x 2 1/2 3/4″ HOLES MOUNTING #6-32 HEX NUTS WITH EXPANDER HOLES Information enclosure No. page 1 OF 1

LISTING No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PAD100-DIM Dual Input Module PAD100-LED Addressable LED Module PAD100-OROI One Relay-One Input Module PAD100-RM Relay Module PAD100-SIM Single Input Module PAD100-TRTI Two Relay-Two Input Module PAD100-ZM Zone Module PAD100-IM Isolator Module PAD100-NAC Notification Appliance Circuit Module PAD100-SM Speaker Module PAD100-MIM Micro Input Module PAD1—LEDK Key Switch Module PAD100-DRTS Duct Remote Test Switch SLCE127 Point SLC Expander MC-1000 Multi Connect PAD100-DUCTR AE-2 Enclosure to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control unit accessories for use with listee’s separately listed fire alarm panels. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features UUKL Listed for Smoke Control product includes a 5 year warranty Specifications expansion Card (WxHxD) x 17 x 3 7/8 ae-8 expansion enclosure accommodates up to 8 standard SLCe-127, RLY-5, or other stacker bracket sized card. enclosure size is (WxHxD) 16 x 17 x 3 7/8 the ae-8 enclosure to a suitable surface using #8 sized located in four of the five mounting holes provided. expansion devices can be installed in the location shown the #6 sized screw that is 32 threads per inch and 1/2 an inch long. an additional four expanders can be stacked top of the four that are directly attached to the mounting page 1 OF 2 HOLES MOUNTING #6-32×3/8 SCREWS WITH EXPANDER MOUNTING #6-32×3/8 SCREWS WITH EXPANDER MOUNTING #6-32×3/8 SCREWS WITH EXPANDER MOUNTING #6-32×3/8 SCREWS WITH EXPANDER HOLES Information Enclosure No. page 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features addresses available on this analog addressable system system capacity achieved via multi-point SLC modules software zones 72 Compliant Smoke Sensitivity Test Built-In Operates as Class A or Class B for SLC, P-Link and NACs Amp Power Supply, Expandable to 310 amps NACS, Regulated, Rated at 3 Amps each, expandable to 188 Input/Output (I/O) Circuits for system flexibility rated at 1 Amp Synchronization and System Wide Sync for Gentex Cooper Wheelock and System Sensor strobes Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Relays Event History Buffer two line DACT with UD-2000 that can report General, or Point Information in IP Communicator Port for Programming and Network Connectivity System Status, Reports and Event Information includes 5 year warranty AFC-100 is an analog/addressable fire alarm system with a total capacity of 100 addresses. Additional capacity on the system is using multi-point SLC modules. The control panel utilizes the Potter protocol that includes a complete line of sensors and Each SLC may be comprised of any combination of smoke heat detectors or modules and allows for a total of 50 ohms of and may use any wire compliant with the National Electrical (NEC). AFC-100 has a 5 Amp power supply with two Notification Circuits (NACs) and two Input/Output (I/O) circuits. The are rated at 3 Amps each and the I/Os are rated at 1 Amp each. output is regulated and power limited. In addition, each output is programmable and may be configured for steady signal, strobe constant power, door holder power, or releasing. The synchronization includes Gentex, AMSECO, System Sensor and and with the exclusive Quadrasync each output may a unique brand and all strobes will flash together. NACs may be expanded using the PSN-1000 series intelligent power Each PSN-1000 adds another 10 Amps of power, 2 additional circuits and the AFC-100 will support up to 31 power supplies. The will synchronize the strobes system wide. In addition, the PSN- has space to allow the installation of up to six loop expansion cards. cards mount on a stacker bracket that allows access to all SLC circuit Fire Dept. of Approval Specifications Mains and Range x 17 x 3 7/8 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable door with Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-200 mA 5 Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link 3 Amps per NAC, regulated 1 Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC P-Link maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum of 93% non-condensing. NFPA, 13, 15, 16, 17, 17A, 70, 72, and 750 ANSI/UL 864 – Local (L), Remote Station Central Station (CS), Propriety Auxiliary (AUX). Type of Service: (A), Manual (M),Water flow Sprinkler Supervisory (SS) Type of Digital Alarm Communicator March Time (March), Non Coded Reverse Polarity (Rev Pol), Other (OT) (International Building Code) PAGE 1 OF 5 Loop Accessories control panel may be connected with up to 100 addressable devices or modules in any combination. The SLC is not restricted by any special wire and may be wired with any wire that complies with the NEC. Loop Devices Photoelectric Smoke Detector is a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.7%/foot. UL 268 7th Edition. Analog Photoelectric Smoke/Heat Detector a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.5%/foot and a fixed temperature range of 135 to 185 F heat detector. Smoke detection compliant with UL 268 7th Edition. Photoelectric Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Detector. Smoke detection co

AFC-100 Alarm Installation Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5403648-Rev. F Installation Wiring Documents 50Hz~60Hz 50Hz~60Hz to separate AC circuit VAC Position relays are limited connection (non-power limited). two(2) 12V batteries connected in series. 1 2 PAD100 SLC DEVICES P-LINK DEVICES #640-1 1. AFC-100 Addressable Fire Panel Wiring Diagram of Circuit Connection Connection Relay Relay Relay Circuits Device Circuits (NACs) RS-485 Connections Line Circuit Line DACT Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited AC terminals are located in the upper left hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main power and provides indication that the AC power is absent. Supply Circuit 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz to separate AC circuit G 2. Main Supply Circuit POWER #593-6 terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: of 5A at the nominal 120 VAC rating. of 3A at the nominal 240 VAC rating. Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided on the main panel in the lower left portion of the board. Terminal are provided to connect wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed lead acid battery or equivalent. battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The will operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 5 minutes of alarm. In order to determine the minimum size for standby and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet in order to the minimum battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is as Appendix A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes provided. V V #593-5 3. Battery Circuit Connections of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The phone line connections to the are high-voltage power limited. Battery conductors, and the alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays are non- limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must maintained by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. The main AC power connection should be made on left side or top left of the cabinet. The DACT wiring connections should be made along the top right side of the Appliance Circuits (NACs) panel is equipped with two NAC circuits and each are rated for a continuous 3 amps at 24 VDC. The outputs supervised and regulated. The NACs reverse polarity upon activation and the board and illustrations are marked panel can be programmable to allow for addition of a CA-6075 Class-A Expander. This expander allows for A operation of the NACs

AFC Series / Fire Alarm Systems Management / you like to know what happening on your Potter fire control panels from a single location? Potter Facility software is compatible with all Potter IP-enabled alarm systems and displays real-time events that occur one or more panels connected via a LAN or WAN network offers great flexibility in how event information may be to efficiently organize, manage and analyze panel The Facility Management software allows the to see alarm events, trouble conditions, and much more. can even be filtered to create custom data files which be exported to Word or Excel a limited time, receive Potter Facility software absolutely free! To more and to download, scan the QR or visit: Connectivity / today ever-expanding means of communication, it to be able to incorporate the same technology into fire control system. We took this technology into account we designed IP connectivity within our new panels. eliminating the cost of phone lines, save big when using building existing network infrastructure. Additionally, speed of IP communication allows for event information to sent to the central station within seconds. Every Potter IP- fire alarm system has an on board IP communicator is listed to communicate with the SurGard III IP receiver. & Reminders / IP-enabled fire alarm systems are email ready. History Detector Status reports can be sent on demand as either text or Excel file for a professional look. The status events the panel can be immediately emailed allowing users to be in servicing customers. and the configuration file can be requested from panel at any time by sending an email directly to the Additionally, enhance your business by creating email for your customers to schedule system tests or to purchase new batteries. Programming / IP-enabled fire alarm systems have the ability to to a Local or Wide Area Network (LAN or WAN) and an IP address. Once connected, the panel configuration allows custom programming and configuration for all using the network or a stand-alone computer. have designed our programming software to be simple robust. At the click of a mouse, you can fine-tune device characteristics or create mapping zones for a more fire protection system. All this is bundled in an drag and drop interface. EOLs / and I/Os have programmable EOLs between 2.0k and This can be achieved manually by installing the resistor using the panel LEARN function, or automatically the programming software. Programming / Protocol devices are now programmed through easy-to- dip-switches. This makes it easier than ever to address SLC on-site and requires no external hardware. / MC-1000 Multi-Connect Module allows up to 62 client panels to communicate with a remote/central station a single control panel designated as the host. can eliminate the need for multiple phone lines and accounts. Each MC-1000 module includes terminal for two client panels. & Assembled in the USA / prides itself on offering a full line of fire alarm assembled in St. Louis, Missouri and Branford, With engineering teams located in Maple Grove, Moline, Illinois; and Louisville, Kentucky; Potter to provide the latest innovations direct from heartland. / AFC Series / Addressable Fire Alarm Systems MBLE S THE U SA MBLE S THE U SA 800-325-3936 / [email protected] / www.pottersignal.com Fire Alarm Control Panels / Circuit / up to 1,270 Addresses Power Supply I/O Circuits Addresses Power Supply I/O Circuits Addresses Power Supply I/O Circuits Addresses Power Supply I/O Circuits Programmable NACs Programmable NACs Programmable NACs Programmable NACs for Sprinkler Pre-action for Sprinkler Pre-action for Sprinkler Pre-action Deluge Systems Deluge Systems Deluge Systems for Clean Agent

LISTING No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 2 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] AFC-50, AFC-100 and AFC-1000 fire alarm control units. Automatic, Manual, and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, auxiliary, remote station (PPU), (PPU) and central station (PPU) services. ARC-100 fire alarm control unit. Automatic, Manual, waterflow and sprinkler type device and local, auxiliary, releasing, remote station (PPU), proprietary and central station (PPU) services. components: Dual Input Module Addressable LED Module 100-OROI One Relay-One Input Module 100-RM Relay Module 100-SIM Single Input Module 100 TRTI Two Relay-Two Input Module 100-ZM Zone Module 100-IM Iolator Module 100- NAC Notification Appliance Circuit Module 100-SM Speaker Module 100-MIM Micro Input Module 100-LEDK LED Key Switch Module 100-DRTS Duct Remote Test Switch 100-SLCE127 Point SLC Expander Multi-Connect 100-DUCTR Enclosure to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 12-04-17 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. No. 2 of 2 12-04-17 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

LISTING No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 2 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] AFC-50, AFC-100 and AFC-1000 fire alarm control units. Automatic, Manual, and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, auxiliary, remote station (PPU), (PPU) and central station (PPU) services. ARC-100 fire alarm control unit. Automatic, Manual, waterflow and sprinkler type device and local, auxiliary, releasing, remote station (PPU), proprietary and central station (PPU) services. components: Dual Input Module Addressable LED Module 100-OROI One Relay-One Input Module 100-RM Relay Module 100-SIM Single Input Module 100 TRTI Two Relay-Two Input Module 100-ZM Zone Module 100-IM Iolator Module 100- NAC Notification Appliance Circuit Module 100-SM Speaker Module 100-MIM Micro Input Module 100-LEDK LED Key Switch Module 100-DRTS Duct Remote Test Switch 100-SLCE127 Point SLC Expander Multi-Connect 100-DUCTR Enclosure to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 12-04-17 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. No. 2 of 2 12-04-17 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features addresses available on this analog addressable system system capacity achieved via multi-point SLC modules software zones 72 Compliant Smoke Sensitivity Test Built-In Operates as Class A or Class B for SLC, P-Link and NACs Amp Power Supply, Expandable to 315 amps NACS, Regulated, Rated at 3 Amps each, expandable to 192 Input/Output (I/O) Circuits for system flexibility rated at 1 Amp each Synchronization and System Wide Sync for Gentex Cooper Wheelock and System Sensor strobes Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Relays Event History Buffer two line DACT with UD-2000 that can report General, Zone or Information in IP communicator Port for Programming and Network Connectivity System Status, Reports and Event Information includes 5 year warranty AFC-1000 is an expandable analog/addressable releasing fire alarm with a total system capacity of 1270 addresses. Additional capacity the system is achieved using multi-point SLC modules The control utilizes the exclusive Potter protocol that includes a complete line of and modules. Each SLC may be comprised of any combination of sensor, heat detectors or modules and allows for a total of 50 ohms impedance and may use any wire compliant with the National Electrical (NEC). AFC-1000 has a 10 Amp power supply with six Notification Circuits (NACs) and four Input/Output (I/O) circuits. The are rated at 3 Amps each and the I/Os are rated at 1 Amp each. output is regulated and power limited. In addition, each output is programmable and may be configured for steady signal, strobe constant power, door holder power, or releasing. The synchronization includes Gentex, AMSECO, System Sensor and and with the exclusive Quadrasync each output may a unique brand and all strobes will flash together. NACs may be expanded using the PSN-1000 series intelligent power Each PSN-1000 adds another 10 Amps of power, 2 additional circuits and the AFC-1000 will support up to 31 power supplies. The will synchronize the strobes system wide. In addition, the PSN- has space to allow the installation of up to six PAD100-SLCE SLC expansion cards. The cards mount on a stacker bracket that allows to all SLC circuit connections. Fire Dept. of Approval Specifications Mains and Range 15/16 x 27 5/16 x 4 7/16 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable door with Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-220 mA 10 Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link 3 Amps per NAC, regulated 1 Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC P-Link maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum of 93% non-condensing. NFPA, 13,15, 16, 17, 17A, 70, 72, and 750 ANSI/UL 864 – Local (L), Remote Station Central Station (CS), Propriety Auxiliary (AUX). Type of Service: (A), Manual (M),Water flow Sprinkler Supervisory (SS) Type of Digital Alarm Communicator March Time (March), Non Coded Reverse Polarity (Rev Pol), Other (OT) (International Building Code) PAGE 1 OF 5 Loop Accessories control panel may be connected with up to 1,270 addressable devices or modules in any combination. The SLC is not restricted by any special requirements and may be wired with any wire that complies with the NEC. Loop Devices Photoelectric Smoke Detector is a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.7%/foot. UL 268 7th Edition. Analog Photoelectric Smoke/Heat Detector a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.5%/foot and a fixed temperature range of 135 to 185 F heat detector. Smoke detection compliant with UL 268 7th Edition. Photoelectric Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Dete

Features addresses available on this analog addressable system system capacity achieved via multi-point SLC modules software zones 72 Compliant Smoke Sensitivity Test Built-In Operates as Class A or Class B for SLC, P-Link and NACs Amp Power Supply, Expandable to 315 amps NACS, Regulated, Rated at 3 Amps each, expandable to 192 Input/Output (I/O) Circuits for system flexibility rated at 1 Amp each Synchronization and System Wide Sync for Gentex Cooper Wheelock and System Sensor strobes Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Relays Event History Buffer two line DACT with UD-2000 that can report General, Zone or Information in IP communicator Port for Programming and Network Connectivity System Status, Reports and Event Information includes 5 year warranty of Chicago Class 1 Addressable Approved AFC-1000 is an expandable analog/addressable releasing fire alarm with a total system capacity of 1270 addresses. Additional capacity the system is achieved using multi-point SLC modules The control utilizes the exclusive Potter protocol that includes a complete line of and modules. Each SLC may be comprised of any combination of sensor, heat detectors or modules and allows for a total of 50 ohms impedance and may use any wire compliant with the National Electrical (NEC). AFC-1000 has a 10 Amp power supply with six Notification Circuits (NACs) and four Input/Output (I/O) circuits. The are rated at 3 Amps each and the I/Os are rated at 1 Amp each. output is regulated and power limited. In addition, each output is programmable and may be configured for steady signal, strobe constant power, door holder power, or releasing. The synchronization includes Gentex, AMSECO, System Sensor and and with the exclusive Quadrasync each output may a unique brand and all strobes will flash together. NACs may be expanded using the PSN-1000 series intelligent power Each PSN-1000 adds another 10 Amps of power, 2 additional circuits and the AFC-1000 will support up to 31 power supplies. The will synchronize the strobes system wide. In addition, the PSN- has space to allow the installation of up to six PAD100-SLCE SLC expansion cards. The cards mount on a stacker bracket that allows to all SLC circuit connections. of Chicago 1 Approved Fire Dept. of Approval Specifications Mains and Range 15/16 x 27 5/16 x 4 7/16 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable door with Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-220 mA 10 Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link 3 Amps per NAC, regulated 1 Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC P-Link maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum of 93% non-condensing. page 1 OF 6 Loop Accessories control panel may be connected with up to 1,270 addressable devices or modules in any combination. The SLC is not restricted by any special requirements and may be wired with any wire that complies with the NEC. Loop Devices Photo Electric Smoke Detector is a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.02 to 3.83 percent per foot. Analog Photo Electric Smoke/Heat Detector a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.02 to 3.83 percent and a fixed temperature 135 Fahrenheit heat detector. Fixed (135d-185dF) or Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector (software selectable) Addressable Duct Smoke Detector with Form C Relay. Addressable Duct Smoke Detector with Form C relay rated at 10a @ or 8amps at 30VDC. Duct Smoke Detector. round base that is mounted to an electrical box and wired for connection of one of the above sensors. round base that may be mounted to an electrical box and wired for connection to the above sensors. base

No text preview available.

Features single and dual channel applications programming to 2 hours of message storage to 255 customizable audio patterns message library of predefined messages and tones to record and import message files from a laptop up to 104 programmable push buttons for speaker and ECS push buttons for All Call, supervised auxiliary input to interface with low-level audio sources Music up to 10 SCA (single channel) or DCA (dual channel) amplifiers with LOC-1000 (Local Operator Console) to control the system remote areas. Fire Fighters Telephone system features of the AFC-1000 included AFC-1000V is an enhanced version of the AFC-1000 addressable alarm system, now with voice integration. The panel features all pre- fire highlights and shares new innovative voice functionalities provide reliability and safety with the panel. The panel introduces VM-1000 voice module and digital message repeater to deliver to designated remote amplifiers. The VM-1000 contains two channels (audio riser outputs) to support single and dual channel The voice module also includes a supervised low level auxiliary to interface with external audio sources and supports applications background music. The AFC-1000V is equipped with an ECS interface providing 8 programmable push buttons for speaker and zone assignment, LED indicators to display activity and trouble and common user function buttons for All Call and CTRL. optional SB-24 (Switch Board w/24 Programmable Switches) will 24 additional programmable push buttons. A maximum of four (4) can be installed, offering up to 96 programmable push buttons. AFC-1000V can link up to ten (10) SCA (single channel amplifier) DCA (dual channel amplifier) amplifiers, thirty (30) LOC-1000 (local console) and one (1) FFT-1000 (Firefighter Telephone System). Potter Panel Programmer introduces Audio Patterns which allows to select and create audio files easily and effectively from the user The programmer offers an internal library of predefined message tones for common emergency conditions. Audio Patterns provides the to conveniently record and import audio files directly from a laptop. Mains Specifications 3/8 x 29 1/8 x 4 7/8 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable locked door Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-220 mA Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link Amps per NAC, regulated Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum humidity of non-condensing. and Range PAGE 1 OF 3 Connection IPA-4000 is shipped standard with an Ethernet connection. This is the programming port and may be connected to a building Area Network (WAN) or Local Area Network(LAN). Once to the Internet, the panel may be selectively programmed e-mail alarm conditions, trouble conditions, supervisory conditions, Event History and detector status. An e-mail may be sent to the and the panel will e-mail the event history, detector status, file or server status to an authorized E-mail account. In reminders may be set to send an e-mail for service, testing other conditions. addition, the Ethernet connection is UL listed as an IP communicator. IP communicator is listed to report to the UL listed Sur-Gard III receiver. The IP communicator replaces the traditional less reliable communicator transmitter that utilized telephone lines. The IP is an active method of connection and communication the monitoring station. Accessory Switch bank with 24 programmable push buttons. Maximum of 4 SB-24s. Interface AFC-1000V panel incorporates a SB-8 user interface to display ECS system status. The panel is shipped with the LEDs:

AFC-1000/AFC-1000V Alarm Installation Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5403649 G Installation Wiring Documents mentions of the AFC-1000 apply to both the AFC-1000 and the AFC-1000 other than supervisory. Supervisory is Fire Only. 50Hz~60Hz 50Hz~60Hz to separate AC circuit VAC Position PAD SLC DEVICES P-LINK DEVICES #641-1 1 2 4 5 6 1 2 relays are limited connection (non-power limited). two(2) 12V batteries connected in series. 1. AFC-1000 Addressable Fire Panel Wiring Diagram of Circuit Connection Connection Relay Relay Relay Circuits Device Circuits (NACs) RS-485 Connections Line Circuit Line DACT Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage AC terminals are located in the upper left hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main power and provides indication that the AC power is absent. Supply Circuit 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz to separate AC circuit G 2. Main Supply Circuit POWER #593-6 terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: of 5A at the nominal 120 VAC rating. of 3A at the nominal 240 VAC rating. Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided on the main panel in the lower left portion of the board. Terminal are provided to connect wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed lead acid battery or equivalent. battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The will operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 5 minutes of alarm. In order to determine the minimum size for standby and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet in order to the minimum battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is as Appendix A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes provided. V V 3. Battery Circuit Connections #593-5 of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The phone line connections to the are high-voltage power limited. Battery conductors, and the alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays are non- limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must maintained by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. The main AC power connection should be made on left side or top left of the cabinet. The DACT wiring connections should be made along the top right si

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Features addresses available on this analog addressable system system capacity achieved via multi-point SLC modules software zones 72 Compliant Smoke Sensitivity Test Built-In Operates as Class A or Class B for SLC, P-Link and NACs Amp Power Supply, Expandable to 310 amps NACS, Regulated, Rated at 3 Amps each, expandable to 188 Input/Output (I/O) Circuits for system flexibility rated at 1 Amp Synchronization and System Wide Sync for Gentex Cooper Wheelock and System Sensor strobes Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Relays Event History Buffer two line DACT with UD-2000 that can report General, Zone Point Information in IP Communicator Port for Programming and Network Connectivity System Status, Reports and Event Information includes 5 year warranty. AFC-50 is an analog/addressable fire alarm system with a total system of 50 addresses. Additional capacity on the system is achieved multi-point SLC modules. The control panel utilizes the exclusive protocol that includes a complete line of sensors and modules. SLC may be comprised of any combination of smoke sensor, heat or modules and allows for a total of 50 ohms of impedance and use any wire compliant with the National Electrical Code (NEC). AFC-50 has a 5 Amp power supply with two Notification Appliance (NACs) and two Input/Output (I/O) circuits. The NACs are rated at Amps each and the I/Os are rated at 1 Amp each. Each output is regulated power limited. In addition, each output is uniquely programmable and be configured for steady signal, strobe synchronization, constant door holder power, or releasing. The strobe synchronization Gentex, AMSECO, System Sensor and Cooper/Wheelock and the exclusive Quadrasync each output may have a unique brand and strobes will flash together. NACs may be expanded using the PSN-1000 series intelligent power Each PSN-1000 adds another 10 Amps of power, 2 additional circuits and the AFC-50 will support up to 31 power supplies. The will synchronize the strobes system wide. In addition, the PSN- has space to allow the installation of up to six expansion cards. cards mount on a stacker bracket that allows access to all circuit Fire Dept. of Approval Specifications Mains and Range x 17 x 3 7/8 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable locked with Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-200 mA 5 Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link 3 Amps per NAC, regulated 1 Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC P-Link maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum of 93% non-condensing. NFPA, 13, 15, 16, 17, 17A, 70, 72, and 750 ANSI/UL 864 – Local (L), Remote Station Central Station (CS), Propriety Auxiliary (AUX), Type of Service: (A), Manual (M), Water flow Sprinkler Supervisory (SS), Type of Digital Alarm Communicator March Time (March), Non Coded Reverse Polarity (Rev Pol), Other (OT) (International Building Code) PAGE 1 OF 5 Loop Accessories control panel may be connected with up to 50 addressable devices or modules in any combination. The SLC is not restricted by any special wire and may be wired with any wire that complies with the NEC. Loop Devices Photoelectric Smoke Detector is a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.7%/foot. UL 268 7th Edition. Analog Photoelectric Smoke/Heat Detector a smoke detector with a listed obscuration of 1.0 to 3.5%/foot and a fixed temperature range of 135 to 185 F heat detector. Smoke detection compliant with UL 268 7th Edition. Photoelectric Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Detector. Smoke detection compliant with UL 268 7th Edit

AFC-50 Alarm Installation Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5403647-Rev. F Installation Wiring Documents 50Hz~60Hz 50Hz~60Hz to separate AC circuit VAC Position relays are limited connection (non-power limited). two(2) 12V batteries connected in series. 1 2 PAD100 SLC DEVICES P-LINK DEVICES #640-1 1. AFC-50 Addressable Fire Panel Wiring Diagram of Circuit Connection Connection Relay Relay Relay Circuits Device Circuits (NACs) RS-485 Connections Line Circuit Line DACT Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited AC terminals are located in the upper left hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main power and provides indication that the AC power is absent. Supply Circuit 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz to separate AC circuit G 2. Main Supply Circuit POWER #593-6 terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: of 5A at the nominal 120 VAC rating. of 3A at the nominal 240 VAC rating. Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided on the main panel in the lower left portion of the board. Terminal are provided to connect wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed lead acid battery or equivalent. battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The will operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 5 minutes of alarm. In order to determine the minimum size for standby and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet in order to the minimum battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is as Appendix A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes provided. V V #593-5 3. Battery Circuit Connections of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The phone line connections to the are high-voltage power limited. Battery conductors, and the alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays are non- limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must maintained by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. The main AC power connection should be made on left side or top left of the cabinet. The DACT wiring connections should be made along the top right side of the Appliance Circuits (NACs) panel is equipped with two NAC circuits and each are rated for a continuous 3 amps at 24 VDC. The outputs supervised and regulated. The NACs reverse polarity upon activation and the board and illustrations are marked panel can be programmable to allow for addition of a CA-6075 Class-A Expander. This expander allows for A operation of the NACs.

No text preview available.

A Brand Number: 4440003 CABLE DETECTOR SYSTEM action alarm sensor (Form C) for open or closed loop resistance cable mounting bracket cost solution AFS-101B: Hardwired Fence Sensor is a fully encapsulated magnetic contact (Form C) S.P.D.T. with enough durability, gap, and vibration designed for outdoor perimeter protection. The biased technology incorporated onto the design provides a high degree of additional resistance. This is due to the balanced condition that exists within. The fence sensor creates an alarm condition when tension is added by on the wire, or by simply cutting the wire. 1 2 (10) (33) (10) Zone lb. lb. 133-1 (126) (75) (24) (16) 133-2 0 ~ 1 5/16 N.O/N.C 2.2 ~ 7.7 lbs A A DC ~ 140 ~ 60 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880133 – REV B 1 OF 1

Features integrated into base restoring Amber LED indication of short circuit Maximum standby current, 325 Maximum alarm current, 1.85 mA includes a 5 year warranty 7165-0328:0194 Addressable Isolator Base 6 (AIB) comes with an integrated isolator module included. The base has a locking feature for the that may be used or removed in the field. Once the head is removed, the isolator is accessible in the bottom of the unit. isolator will open the Signaling Line Circuit down stream when a short circuit is detected. This will provide devices between control panel and the isolator to continue to operate. The short is indicated by a steady amber LED and once the short is the unit will return to normal operation. Base Mounting should be mounted directly on the electrical box. The mounting holes are configured for a single gang, double gang, octagon 4 square box. Feature include a locking feature that prevents removal of the detector and removal of the base cover without using a tool. To eliminate this feature, break off the locking tab (refer to Figure 1), and then install the detector. 1. Eliminate the Locking Feature the plastic tab by twisting it toward a center the plastic tab by twisting it toward a center the base of the base To remove the detector from the base once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into the slot on the to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to Figure 2). 2. Removing of detector head from base a small bladed screwdriver to the locking tab Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com 1 OF 2 To remove the base cover from the lower enclosure once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into slot on the on the base to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to 3). 3. Removing of base cover from the lower enclosure tab Working voltage range for SLC current for SLC 1 current (Include indicator) indicator SLC wiring style of wiring after an AIB in Style 4 of wiring between an AIB and the next AIB in Style 6 or 7 Maximum number of AIB per SLC Loop 4 6 and 7 Maximum number of addressable devices connected to an AIB Operating relative humidity range Color temperature range 2 Dimensions (without detector) to 24.0 V mA D.C. (max.) LED (yellow) Style 4,6 and 7 (max.) (max.) of points of panel divided by 8 of points of control panel units to 120 (0 to 49 ) to 93% (Non-condensing) White inches (54.4mm) inches (150mm) The standby current is the current that the device consumes when the device is in a non-activated condition and where no current is transmitted to the fire alarm control panel. FHA with AIB should be installed under 120 (Installation temperature range of AIB is 32 to 120 specifications are subject to change without notice. For further information, contact Potter Electric Signal Company Support. 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

ALE-127 LOOP EXPANDER Current Current Operating Tem Panel mA mA (32 Dial in accordance with installation manual # 5403556. 7165-0328:0196 includes a 5 year warranty ALE-127 is microprocessor based circuit assembly that provides additional signaling line circuit (SLC) to the Potter PFC-8500. The is power limited and supervised. The PFC-8500 will supoort a of three ALE-127 loop expanders. The ALE-127 is mounted the main board assembly inside the cabinet. A wire harness the first ALE-127 to the main board and subsequent ALE- are connected to the first. ALE-127 is configurable for Class A, Styles 6 & 7 or Class B, 4. ALE-127 only operates with the PFC-8500 and utilizes the Potter/ ine of sensors and modules. Wiring Example Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8830027 – REV A 1 OF 1

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PFC- 8060, PFC-8060/230, PFC-8500 and PFC-8500/230 fire alarm control units. Manual, waterflow and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, auxiliary, remote station (PPU), proprietary (PPU) and central station (PPU) services. Refer listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. System components: Power Supply Loop Expander Board 3005012: EOL Resistors LED-AN: Remote Annunciators Smoke Detector Module Loop Powered Short Circuit Isolator Contact Module DCM-4: Loop Powered Contact Modules Twin Relay Module Monitor Output Module VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. meet the requirements of UL Standard 864, 9th edition. bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

A Brand CLIP Form C circuit Immediate alarm signal AMC-2 Money Clip is designed for installation in cash registers, cash boxes, and at teller windows. The AMC-2 employs a quiet yet developed reliable switch mechanism that insures an immediate alarm signal when triggered and connected to a central station. Black: Common White: N.C. Loop Red: N.O. Loop Hold-up Circuit : Common : N.C. Loop : N.O. Loop Hold-up Circuit Rating Max. N.O Amps @ 125VAC Amps @ 125VDC Amps @ 30VDC to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880101 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES SURFACE MOUNT CONTACT AMS-10 Series Mini Surface Mount Contact is a UL Listed contact designed for tight spaces to accommodate hard to locations. The AMS-10 Series is available with side mount center mount leads, or with terminals only. This provides for fitting multiple applications. These devices can be used protect openings such as: man doors, sliding doors, windows, or other opening that requires a small contact. UL and ULC Listed Slim design for tight spaces operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory Screw or 3M adhesive (33.4) ( (25.4) (33.4) ( (25.4) Side A Amp Amp in self- to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880116 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES MINI RECESSED CONTACT UL Listed 5/16 operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Optional AD-17 adapter available Available in white, brown, or ivory AMS-17 Series Mini Recessed Contact is a UL listed contact designed to provide a clean and easy installation for standard openings. The Series is ideal for areas where small size is important. These contacts may be used to secure a variety of openings such as: man doors, doors, windows, and other openings where a small concealed contact is necessary. (15.9) (16.1) (305) Carry Lead 3/8 switch to be placed in a 3/4 hole. A Amp Amp fit to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880119 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand RECESSED CONTACT UL and ULC Listed 5/8 operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory AMS-20 Recessed Contact is a UL listed contact designed to provide a clean and easy installation for standard openings with limited The AMS-20 may be used to secure a variety of openings such as: man doors, sliding doors, windows, and other various openings where thin, concealed contact is necessary. Carry Leads A Amp Amp fit to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880120 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES RECESSED CONTACT UL Listed 5/8 operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory AMS-21 Series Recessed Contact is a UL listed contact designed to provide a clean and easy installation for standard openings. The AMS-21 Series be used to secure a variety of openings such as: man doors, sliding doors, windows, and other openings where a concealed contact is necessary. AWG lead A Amp Amp to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880121 – REV C 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES PRESS FIT MAGNETIC CONTACT UL Listed operating gap (AMS-25 Series) 1 operating gap (AMS-26 Series) Self-locking Available in brown, gray, or ivory AMS-25/26 Series is a UL listed contact designed to provide a clean and easy installation for standard openings. The AMS-25 provides a operating gap and the AMS-26 provides a wide 1 operating gap. These contacts are perfect for commercial applications where doors are common. Magnet Switch (30) (30) (609) (6) (39) (305) Magnet Switch Carry Lead Lead A C A C Amp Amp Amp Amp Amp Amp fit to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880114 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES PRESS FIT MAGNETIC CONTACT UL Listed operating gap (AMS-25 Series) 1 operating gap (AMS-26 Series) Self-locking Available in brown, gray, or ivory AMS-25/26 Series is a UL listed contact designed to provide a clean and easy installation for standard openings. The AMS-25 provides a operating gap and the AMS-26 provides a wide 1 operating gap. These contacts are perfect for commercial applications where doors are common. Magnet Switch (30) (30) (609) (6) (39) (305) Magnet Switch Carry Lead Lead A C A C Amp Amp Amp Amp Amp Amp fit to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880114 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES MAGNETIC CONTACT UL and ULC Listed Rugged design for industrial use 2 operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in gray or brown AMS-37 Series Industrial Magnetic Contact is a UL Listed magnetic contact built for rugged environments and practically any opening. It is to provide clean and quick installations. The AMS-37 Series can be used to protect openings such as: man doors, overhead doors, roof or hinged skylights. AMS-37L (88) (99) (13) leads leads A C A min. to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8910231 – REV C 1 OF 1

AMS-38 SURFACE CONTACT UL and ULC Listed AC rated 5/8 operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory Brand AMS-38 Mechanical Surface Mount Contact is a UL listed and AC rated contact designed to endure higher voltages than other standard contact switches. The AMS-38 can be used to protect openings or to activate other applications such as lighting, sounders, or any other function. SCREW (43) (54) (63.5) HOLES o 4mm (5) (12.7) (16.3) Max. Amp Max. C Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880117 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES SURFACE CONTACT UL and ULC Listed operating gap Spacers and covers included Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory* AMS-39 Series Standard Surface Mount Contact us a UL listed contact designed to protect a wide variety of openings such as: man doors, doors, windows, cabinets, hatches, and many others. SCREW HOLES o 4mm (43) (54) (63.5) (12.7) (16.3) SCREW HOLES o 4mm (5) (5) (43) (54) (63.5) (12.7) (16.3) AMS-39B not available in gray screws, and spacers) sets per pack Carry A Amp Amp Amp Amp C to 120 to 49 A Amp Amp Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880118 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand DISPLACEMENT SURFACE MOUNT CONTACT UL Listed 1 operating gap Simple installation Alnico 5 magnet Available in white, brown, gray, or ivory AMS-51CV Surface Mount contact is a UL listed magnetic contact designed for quick installation using the patented insulation method. Simply insert the unstripped wire and tighten the screw terminal. The AMS-51CV contact can be used to protect openings as man doors, sliding doors, and windows. fasten Lead Wire 7/20 (8.8) 1/25 (1.0) ( 40 ) ( 48.4 ) Holes (Lead) 5-Point Contact 7/20 (8.8) Screw (40) (48.4) or Wire Adhesive 29/64 (11.5) 29/64 (11.5) Amp Amp A in self- to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880115 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand TYPE SURFACE CONTACT UL and ULC listed operating gap Unique design to conceal leads Available in white, brown, or gray AMS-59 is a UL listed surface mount contact designed to provide fast, easy, and clean installations. The specially designed housing is also as the contact cover to conceal the wiring and deter tampering. The AMS-59 contact can be used to protect openings such as: man doors, doors, windows, cabinets, and hatches. HOLES (4) (43.2) (53.3) (63.5) Carry Amp Amp VDC A Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880100 – REV C 1 OF 1

A Brand SERIES SURFACE/PRESS FIT CONTACT UL Listed operating gap Surface mount or press fit Alnico 5 magnet AMS-7 available in white or brown, AMS-7D available in white or black AMS-7 Series Mini Surface/Press Fit Magnetic Contact is designed for installations where space is severely limited. The unique break-off allows for field selection of surface mount or press-fit, recessed mount installations. The size and flexibility of the AMS-7 make it a must on every technicians vehicle. (28) (304) (18.9) (3.5) 5.0 tape (6) (304) Carry Lead Amp Amp mount Press fit to 120 to 49 A B Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880122 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SURFACE MOUNT CONTACT UL and ULC listed ROHS compliant operating gap Alnico 5 magnet Available in ivory, gray, and brown AMS-9 Micro-Mini Surface Door Contact is a UL listed, ROHS compliant, magnetic contact designed to provide reliability in the tightest The AMS-9 is perfect for any application where space is limited. Carry Lead A Amp Amp to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880112 – REV B 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

APS-SA/DA Pull Station Action Single or Dual Action versions Durable die-cast construction Reset key matches the fi re alarm control panels Compatible with all PFC-6000, PFC-8000, and P Series panels Product includes a 5 year warranty Numbers APS-SA Addressable Pull Station, Single Action 1430810 APS-DA Addressable Pull Station, Dual Action 1430811 APS-SA/DA is compatible with Potter PFC-6000 series and addressable fi re alarm control panels. It is a non-coded pull station available in either a single or dual action and installs on a single box or surface mounts using the P32-BB P32-DBB (deep) back box. APS-SA (Single Action) is activated by simply pulling the white bar handle down. The APS-DA (Dual Action) is activated by the front cover and then pulling the white bar handle down. activated, the bar cannot be reset without opening the front Opening the front cover will also activate the pull station. To the APS Series, use the Potter WS-93 key to unlock and open the cover. Once the cover is open, push the bar back into the position and re-secure the front cover. Speci cations Voltage SLC Standby Current SLC Alarm Current 24.0 VDC Limitations Humidity Range Options Weight – 120 (0 – 49 Only H x 3.25 W x 1.75 D – 93% (non-condensing) gang box or P32-BB/DBB – 1.22 lbs. – 1.46 lbs. Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Tech Support: 866-956-1211 / Customer Service: 866-572-3005 www.pottersignal.com – REV B 10/14 PAGE 1 OF 2 the Address APS Series uses one SLC address which must be assigned prior to installation of the device. The address is set using either the handheld device or the device addressing feature built into each Potter fire alarm control panel. Station Front View Station Back View and Wiring FACP OR PREVIOUS DEVICE NEXT DEVICE WIRED PAGE 2 OF 2

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — FIRE ALARM PULL BOXES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] APS-SA, *PAD100-PSSA single action and APS-DA, *PAD100-PSDA dual action pull boxes. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description operational considerations. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation, applicable codes & ordinances and in a acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. addressable pull boxes for use with separately listed and compatible fire alarm control For indoor use only. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. No. manual pull boxes meet the requirements of UL Standard 38, 1999 Edition with amendments. 02-10-2017 dcc listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Potter AquaN2 Kit Operation, & Service Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 #5401540 A of Contents ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4 Overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5 Going to the Job Site…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….6 of AquaN2 Kit ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….9 Procedure …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10 and Testing of an Inerted Wet System ……………………………………………………………………………..12 Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………13 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15 Safety Guidelines manual contains safety information that is important to know and understand. This information is provided for the safety of operators, and users of the Potter AquaN2 Kit as well as equipment. To help recognize this information, observe the symbols. indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury. indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, COULD result in death or serious injury. indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, MAY result in minor or moderate injury. indicates important information, that if not followed may cause damage to equipment or property. Notice to Users Installation and Owner Manual supplied with each unit must be read thoroughly and completely understood before and operation of the Potter AquaN2 Kit. All appropriate safety standards for handling of gases as determined by local national laws and regulations should be followed at all times. unpacking unit, carefully inspect all parts and equipment for any damage that may have occurred during transit. Make sure tighten fittings, bolts, etc. before putting unit into service. not operate if damage occurred during shipping, handling, or Contact Potter immediately. Safety Information Read all of the safety information in this manual before operating this equipment. Use of the equipment in a manner specified within this manual may impair the protection provided by the generator and could result in an unplanned release of which may cause serious injury or damage. Only competent personnel, who have been trained, qualified, and approved Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC should perform commissioning, servicing, and repair procedures. handling, installing, or operating this equipment, personnel must employ safe engineering practices and observe all related regulations, health and safety procedures, and legal requirements for safety. that the equipment is depressurized and electrically isolated before carrying out any of the scheduled maintenance specified in this manual. warnings in this manual cover the most known potential hazards, but by definition cannot be all-inclusive. If the user employs operating procedure, item of equipment, or a method of working that is not specifically recommended by Potter Electric Signal the user must ensure that the equipment will not be damaged or become hazardous to persons or property. System Overview Potter AquaN2 Kit is designed to quickly and effectively exhaust oxygenated air from a wet fire protection system and replace it with high nitrogen gas. Reducing the oxygen levels in wet fire protection systems is essential in protecting the system from the effects of oxygen corrosion often found at the air water interface in the fire sprinkler piping. the AquaN2 Kit, which includes the Nitrogen Injection Manifold (NIM) and the Quick X-Haust Manifold (QXM), in com

No text preview available.

Features Quickly removes oxygen from wet pipe systems, significantly corrosion. Ensures that all trapped gas pockets are 98%+ Nitrogen Gas. Easy installation and maintenance. Designed for fast Nitrogen fill, eliminating any necessary downtime fire sprinkler system. for use with plastic systems. Potter AquaN2 Kit is designed to quickly and effectively exhaust air from a wet fire protection system and replace it with purity nitrogen gas. Reducing the oxygen levels in wet fire systems is essential in protecting the system from the effects oxygen related corrosion often found at the air water interface in the sprinkler piping. the AquaN2 Kit, which includes the Nitrogen Injection Manifold and the Quick X-Haust Manifold (QXM), in combination with Potter Automatic Air Release (PAAR-B) or Potter Air Vent (PAV) a nitrogen source, can easily remove up to 99.9% of oxygen from wet system. Also, by removing as much air as possible, the fire system will have increased performance, eliminating delayed or cyclic activation of vane type waterflow detectors. Nitrogen Injection Manifold must be installed just above the riser, the Quick X-Haust Manifold must be installed on the remote test valve. An Air Vent (PAAR-B or PAV) must be installed on the point from the riser. in accordance with AquaN2 Installation Manual #5401540 Specifications Nitrogen Fill Temperature to 40 PSIG – 120 PAGE 1 OF 2 Injection Manifold Dimensions 1 System Diagram 3 BALL VALVE LISTED/FM APPROVED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS RELIEF VALVE SET AT 50 PSI VSR-AT INDUSTRIAL-SHAPE PLUG MALE NPT INJECTION X-HAUST VALVE TEST/DRAIN VALVE Information Kit Injection Manifold and X-Haust Manifold Air Vent Automatic Air Release secondary shut off valve No. X-Haust Manifold Dimensions 2 – 1/2 NPT TO PIPE TO VENTILATED AREA) BALL VALVE LISTED/FM APPROVED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS GAUGE LISTED/FM APPROVED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MALE NPT PAGE 2 OF 2

WET PIPE System Inerting Potter AquaN2 Kit is designed to quickly and effectively purge oxygenated from a wet fire protection system and replace it with high purity nitrogen gas. the oxygen levels in wet fire protection systems is essential in protecting system from the effects of oxygen related corrosion often found at the air interface in the fire sprinkler piping. It Works the AquaN2 Kit, which includes the Nitrogen Injection Manifold (NIM) and the X-Haust Manifold (QXM), in combination with a Potter Automatic Air Release or Potter Air Vent (PAV) and a nitrogen source, can easily remove up to of oxygen from a wet system. removing as much air as possible, the fire sprinkler system will have increased eliminating delayed activation or cyclic activation of vane type detectors. AquaN2 Installation Vent Vent with Pan Flow / VALVE (SHOWN) PAV TEST / VALVE X-Haust Injection E A T U R E S systems by 2.8X Quickly removes oxygen from wet Extends life expectancy of sprinkler Lowers sprinkler maintenance UL listed and FM approved Air for fire sprinkler systems Information # Kit Injection and Quick Manifold Vent Vent w/ Drip Pan Cylinder Regulator Hose Analyzer Test Switch Electric Signal Company, LLC [email protected] 866-956-1211 www.pottersignal.com PIPE IntelliGen Nitrogen Generators IntelliGen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically designed to on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire protection sprinkler systems. used as a supervisory gas in fire sprinkler systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, the life of a system, and lowers maintenance costs. All IntelliGen Generators use nitrogen membrane technology for gas separation. membranes are a highly effective and cost conscious way of producing nitrogen. systems include an integrated air compressor, nitrogen membrane, all filtration equipment, tanks, and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter Controller ensures contractors the easiest setup and operation of nitrogen generator system in the industry. Each unit is designed to be able to on and walk away. The built-in monitoring capabilities will make corrections alert the user of any necessary changes. Watch the Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator overview video. pttr.us/INS-overview IntelliGen Installation Nitrogen Purge Valve Valve Air Device Nitrogen Type Valve / VALVE VALVE TEST / VALVE Units Units E A T U R E S Pending) Fully automates the air and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity and send email alerts Potter IntelliGen Controller FM Approved per Approval Bypass alarm 1035 Information Series Generator N2 Valve Purge Valve Analyzer Valve Filters # # Information Device Electric Signal Company, LLC

Features Two form C relays as part of the base assembly Works independent of the sensors attached May be mapped to any device connected to the Control LED to indicate that the unit is active included in the base for high and low voltage power limited/non-power limited connections Maximum standby current, 325 Maximum alarm current, 50 mA (aux power) includes a 5 year warranty 7165-0328:0194 Addressable Relay Base 6 (ARB) is combination sensor base with a relay module included. The base has a locking feature the sensor that may be used or removed in the field. Once the head is removed, the relay is accessible in the bottom of the unit. relay module is a uniquely addressed module that provides two form C contacts. The first relay is rated at 8 amps at 30 VDC 240VAC. The second relay is rated at 2 amps at 30 VDC or 240 VAC. The ARB has a divider providing means for separation of voltage and non-power limited connections from the power limited, regulated Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). ARB is designed that once activated, both relays change position. The activation of the unit is identified by a LED on the unit red. The unit is reset when the panel is reset. The panel will support any combination of sensors or modules on the SLC. ARB occupies one address on the loop. Base Mounting should be mounted directly on the electrical box. The mounting holes are configured for a single gang, double gang, octagon 4 square box. the Address addressable module, smoke sensor, heat detector and combination sensor/detector must have the address set before the device to the SLC loop. The address is set using the hand held device programmer or the addressing feature on the panel. connecting a device to the SLC loop, take the following precautions to prevent potential damage to SLC or device. Verify following: to the device is removed wiring is correctly installed. wiring has no open or short circuits. discrepancies and notify appropriate personnel. Feature include a locking feature that prevents removal of the detector and removal of the base cover without using a tool. To eliminate this feature, break off the locking tab (refer to Figure 1), and then install the detector. 1. Eliminate the Locking Feature the plastic tab by twisting it toward a center the plastic tab by twisting it toward a center the base of the base Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com 1 OF 2 To remove the detector from the base once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into the slot on the to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to Figure 2). 2. Removing of detector head from base a small bladed screwdriver to the locking tab To remove the base cover from the lower enclosure once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into slot on the on the base to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to 3). 3. Removing of base cover from the lower enclosure tab current for SLC 1 Working voltage range for SLC Working voltage range for 24V (device requires Aux Power) current for 24V (Include indicator) indicator output style rating temperature range relative humidity range Maximum number of addresses per zone Maximum number of lighted indicators in alarm per zone. Color Dimensions (without detector) to 24.0 V to 28.0 V mA D.C. LED form C ( N.C / COM / N.O ) / 240VAC, 8A / 30VDC / 240VAC, 2A / 30VDC to 120 ( 0 to 49 ) to 93% (Non-condensing) White inches (54.4mm) inches (150mm) The standby current is the current that the device consumes when the device is in a non-activated condition and where communication current is transmitted to the fire alarm control panel. FHA with ARB should be installed under 120 (Installation temperature range of ARB is 32 to 120 specificatio

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Features addresses available on this analog addressable system system capacity achieved via multi-point SLC modules software zones 72 Compliant Smoke Sensitivity Test Built-In Operates as Class A or Class B for SLC, P-Link and NACs Amp Power Supply, Expandable to 310 amps NACS, Regulated, Rated at 3 Amps each, expandable to 188 Input/Output (I/O) Circuits for system flexibility rated at 1 Amp each, for manual release and abort Synchronization and System Wide Sync for Gentex Cooper Wheelock and System Sensor strobes Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Relays Event History Buffer two line DACT with UD-2000 that can report General, Zone or Information in IP Communicator Port for Programming and Network Connectivity System Status, Reports and Event Information includes 5 year warranty ARC-100 is an analog/addressable releasing fire alarm system with a system capacity of 100 addresses. Additional capacity on the system achieved using multi-point SLC modules. The control panel utilizes exclusive Potter protocol that includes a complete line of sensors and Each SLC may be comprised of any combination of smoke heat detectors or modules and allows for a total of 50 ohms of and may use any wire compliant with the National Electrical (NEC). ARC-100 has a 5 Amp power supply with two Notification Appliance (NACs) and two Input/Output (I/O) circuits. The NACs are rated at Amps each and the I/Os are rated at 1 Amp each. Each output is regulated power limited. In addition, each output is uniquely programmable and be configured for steady signal, strobe synchronization, constant door holder power, or releasing. The strobe synchronization Gentex, AMSECO, System Sensor and Cooper/Wheelock and the exclusive Quadrasync each output may have a unique brand and strobes will flash together. The I/Os are designed for inputs such as release stations and abort switches that will not require polling and nearly instantaneously. ARC-100 is listed for releasing of fire suppression systems. The allows cross zones, counting zones, and timers for suppression. system is capable of multiple release outputs across multiple hazards. addition, the PSN-1000 may be used to extend releasing capability. NACs may be expanded using the PSN-1000 series intelligent power Each PSN-1000 adds another 10 Amps of power, 2 additional circuits and the ARC-100 will support up to 31 power supplies. The will synchronize the strobes system wide. In addition, the PSN- has space to allow the installation of up to six loop expansion cards. cards mount on a stacker bracket that allows access to all SLC circuit Specifications Fire Dept. of Approval x 17 x 3 7/8 Amps @ 120 VAC 50/60 HZ Amps @ 240 VAC 50/60 HZ gauge cold rolled steel with removable door with Lexan viewing window Current-130 mA Current-200 mA 5 Amps power for NACs, I/O, and P-Link 3 Amps per NAC, regulated 1 Amp per I/O circuit, regulated Battery Charger range 8-55 Ah Battery Charger voltage 27.3 VDC P-Link maximum current of 1 Amp to 120 (0 to 49 with a maximum of 93% non-condensing. NFPA, 12, 12A, 13, 15, 16, 17, 17A, 70, 72, 720 ,750, and 2001 ANSI/UL 864 – Local (L), Remote Station Central Station (CS), Propriety Auxiliary (AUX). Type of Service: (A), Manual (M), Water flow Sprinkler Supervisory (SS), Type of Digital Alarm Communicator March Time (March), Non Coded Reverse Polarity (Rev Pol), Other (OT) (International Building Code) Mains and Range PAGE 1 OF 5 Loop Accessories control panel may be connected with up to 100 addressable devices or modules in any combination. The SLC is not restricted by any special wire and may be wired with any wire that complies with the NEC. Loop Devices

ARC-100 Alarm Installation Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5403650-Rev. E Installation Wiring Documents 50Hz~60Hz 50Hz~60Hz to separate AC circuit VAC Position relays are limited connection (non-power limited). two(2) 12V batteries connected in series. 1 2 PAD100 SLC DEVICES P-LINK DEVICES #640-1 1. ARC-100 Addressable Fire Panel Wiring Diagram of Circuit Connection Connection Relay Relay Relay Circuits Device Circuits (NACs) RS-485 Connections Line Circuit Line DACT Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited AC terminals are located in the upper left hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main power and provides indication that the AC power is absent. Supply Circuit 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz to separate AC circuit G 2. Main Supply Circuit POWER #593-6 terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: of 5A at the nominal 120 VAC rating. of 3A at the nominal 240 VAC rating. Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided on the main panel in the lower left portion of the board. Terminal are provided to connect wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed lead acid battery or equivalent. battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The will operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 5 minutes of alarm. In order to determine the minimum size for standby and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet in order to the minimum battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is as Appendix A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes provided. V V #593-5 3. Battery Circuit Connections of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The phone line connections to the are high-voltage power limited. Battery conductors, and the alarm, supervisory, and trouble relays are non- limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must maintained by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. The main AC power connection should be made on left side or top left of the cabinet. The DACT wiring connections should be made along the top right side of the Appliance Circuits (NACs) panel is equipped with two NAC circuits and each are rated for a continuous 3 amps at 24 VDC. The outputs supervised and regulated. The NACs reverse polarity upon activation and the board and illustrations are marked panel can be programmable to allow for addition of a CA-6075 Class-A Expander. This expander allows for A operation of the NACs

No text preview available.

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PFC-5004, PFC-5004E and *PFC-5008 fire alarm control units. Non-coded; automatic, local, remote station, central station, waterflow and sprinkler supervisory service. components: -5004, -5004E, -5008: Main Fire Alarm Assembly Polariry reversal & City Tie DACT BB-816: Enclosure Auxiliary Module Zone Adder Module Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances, in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units for use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. control unit does not generate a temporal pattern signal. If the distinctive three-pulse Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with 72, 2002 Edition is required, the control unit must be used with appliances that can the temporal pattern signal. Refer to listee’s Installation instructions Manual for Fire Alarm Verification Feature, the maximum Retard/Reset/Restart period shall not 30.0 seconds. 02-21-12 bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

ARM-4/8 RelAy Module 4 or 8 Relay Card All relays are form C Individual/Configurable relays can be grouped to operate Directly powered from fire alarm control panel Simplistic configuration with jumpers – 4 Stock #3002120 – 8 Stock #3002125 ARM -4/8 Auxiliary Relay Module provides either 4 or 8 relays any of the PFC-5000 series panels. The relays are configured to the zones of the panel as either a common alarm or common In addition, the relay can be configured to a respective zone 1 to Relay 1, Zone 2 to Relay 2, etc.). Blocks of relays can also configured to one initiating zone as well. Each relay is a low voltage rated at 2.0 amps and 30 VDC. Specifications contractor shall furnish and install the ARM-4 or ARM-8 into the PFC-5000 series fire alarm control panel when indicated on the for auxiliary relays. The relays shall be capable of 2.0 amps at 30 and shall be configurable using jumpers. The ARM shall directly to the fire alarm control panel through a ribbon cable and the board must directly connect to the interior of the fire alarm control cabinet. Schematic or 8 Form C Relays (4 relay shown) FIRE ALARM 1 2 3 4 MODULE X 4) TERMINAL REMOVEABLE PLUGS 200-2 200-1 Directly connects to main board of fire alarm control panel via cable. The JW3 jumper is removed from the main board and a reset is performed for the panel to recognize the ARM card. The on the ARM card control how the relays operate. Inserting JW# on ARM card will configure each relay to the respected Initiating Zones. jumper JW#A configures the relay to either alarm or supervisory. JW #.# will configure the relays adjacent to each other to operate The JW# jumper is removed and installed on the JW #.# to the relays operate together as a block. Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8910200 – REV A 1 OF 1

ARM-1 RELAY MODULE Listed: For use with the pFC-4410RC Series 3 1/4″ X 3 1/4″ X 4″ .315 lb. Socketed relay in plastic mounting track Requirements: 40ma at 24VDC Ratings: relay has 4pDT contacts, at 10 amps resistive, 0-30VDC number: 3004726 the aRm-1 is used the additional power required for this relay must be subtracted from the total circuit current available. aRm-1 auxiliary Relay module is a non-supervised 4pDT Relay to be activated by 24VDC Indicating and/or Releasing, reversing circuits. The module can be used for fan shutdown, release, elevator recall, etc. WIRE LEADS FOR COIL NUMBERS REFER TO TERMINALS RELAY PINS. SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED In PFC-4410RC Series Control Unit PC BOARD MODULE 1134-1 RELAYS Installation Hook-Up Diagram relays shown in non-activated condition ARM-1 TO CIRCUIT OUTPUT TERMINALS 1134-2 * Numbers refer to socket terminals not relay pins. auxiliary relay operation is determined by programming of the pFC-4410RC panel. Consult the appropriate manual for further information. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, mO, 63146-4161 phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USa mFG. #5401134 – REV E 1 OF 1

ARM-2 RELAY MODULE Listed: For use with the PFC-4410RC Series 2 1/4″ x 3 1/2″ x 3″ .315 lb. Socketed relay in plastic mounting track Requirements: 40mA at 24VDC Ratings: relay has DPDT contacts, at 10 amps resistive, 0-30VDC number: 3004725 ARm-2 Auxiliary Relay module is a UL listed option when factory in the Potter PFC-4410RC Series. the ARm-2 is used the additional power required for this relay must be subtracted from the total circuit current available. PFC-4410RC manual #5403550. The ARm-2 Auxiliary Relay is a non-supervised DPDT Relay designed to be activated 24VDC Indicating and/or Releasing, polarity reversing circuits. module can be used for fan shutdown, door release, elevator etc. One to four ARM-2 modules in the PFC-4410RC series may utilized to provide multiple auxiliary functions. In PFC-4410RC Series Control Unit WIRE LEADS FOR COIL NUMBERS REFER TO TERMINALS RELAY PINS. SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED PC BOARD MODULE RELAY FOR PFC-4410 977-1 RELAYS Installation Hook-Up Diagram relays shown in non-activated condition ARM-2 TO CIRCUIT OUTPUT TERMINALS 977-2 * numbers refer to socket terminals not relay pins. Auxiliary relay operation is determined by programming of the PFC-4410RC Series panel. Consult the appropriate manual for further information. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, mO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com In USA #5400977 – REV n 1 OF 1

Ordering Information Number Number Surface Mount Black Box) ARM-44 is an auxiliary relay module designed to operate with PFC-4410RC series release panels to provide an additional 8 form C relay outputs in 3 different operating modes. The communicates with the ARM-44 via the RS-485 and 24 VDC power connections on the PFC-4410RC. Modes relay board can either be installed inside the PFC-4410RC or remotely in a separate backbox. The relays can be to either latch or follow the relay activation signal. There also a disable switch to prevent the relays from operating when the is being tested or serviced. silkscreen under the relay terminals corresponds with the selected mode: Mode 1/Mode 2/Mode 3 1/Zone 1/Sup: indicates that relay operates with Zone 1 for 1 & 2 and operates as a Supervisory relay in Mode 3. Out 1/Sup/Out 1: indicates that relay operates with Output 1 in 1, as a Supervisory relay in Mode 2 and with Output 1 in 3 1 2 3 1-4 follow the activation of zones 1-4, respectively 5-8 follow outputs 1-4 respectively 1-4 follow the activation of zones 1-4, respectively 5 operates on any supervisory condition 6 operates on any trouble condition 7 & 8 operate on any alarm condition 1 operates on any supervisory condition 2 operates on any trouble condition 3 & 4 operate on any alarm condition 5-8 follow outputs 1-4 respectively Relays programmed as a Trouble cannot be made to Relays programmed as supervisory will follow Main board Relay without regards to the Latch Switch position. Main Ratings mA Standby mA Max alarm current* Maximum current with all relays operating simultaneously. Rating amps at 30 VDC max. resistive load AWG connected to power-limited source Supervisory Relay can be programmed LATCHING/NON- in the custom program. disable all relays, move Disable switch to ON. make all relays latch, move Latch switch to ON. Mode 1 operation, move Mode 2 and Mode 3 switch to OFF. Mode 2 operation, move Mode 2 switch to ON. Mode 3 operation, move Mode 3 switch to ON. install the ARM-44, remove the main board of the PFC-4410RC removing battery strain relief and two chassis screws. Lift out board and set in safe place. The ARM-44 mounts on 4 standoffs the back of the cabinet with screws provided. cabinet board of mounts directly back of cabinet behind board. PAGE 1 OF 2 Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-1211/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com installer can install up to 4 annunciators or a relay module and 3 annunciators. The installer must set the rotary switch for the number it is in line. For example, relay board address 1, annunciator address 2, if wired from panel to relay board then annunciator. SWITCH 8 RS-485 ZONE1/ZONE1/SUP | ZONE 2/ ZONE2/TBL ZONE3/ZONE3/ALM | ZONE4/ZONE4/ALM OUT1/SUP/OUT1 | OUT2/TBL/OUT2 OUT3/ALM/OUT3 | OUT4/ALM/OUT4 1202-3

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PFC-4410RC and PFC-4410ARC fire alarm control units. Automatic, manual, local, remote station, central station, releasing device, waterflow and sprinkler service. Refer to listee data sheet for additional detailed product description operational considerations. Minimum system components: Unit Unit with LED annunciator for use with the following modules: RA-4410RC, CA2Z, CAM, ARM-1, ARM-2, and SG-32. accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Suitable for high-rise applications when used separately listed voice evacuation systems. Refer to listee Installation Instruction for details. control units do not generate a Temporal Pattern Signal. If the distinctive three-pulse Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition required, the control unit must be used with appliances that can generate the temporal signal. PFC-4410RC control unit meets the requirements of UL Standard 864, 9th edition. PFC-4410ARC control unit meets the requirements of UL Standard 864, 8th edition. with 7170-0328:171 06-18-10 fm listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Sounder in base dB (UL 464 Listed) sounder output dBA (ULC Listed) sounder output independent of sensor, allows for a single station, grouped all-call May be mapped to any device connected to the control panel Maximum standby, 325 Maximum alarm current, 100 mA (aux power) 7165-0328:0194 includes a 5 year warranty Addressable Sounder Base 6 (ASB) is a sounder base that may be utilized in a variety of applications. The base has a feature for the sensor that may be used or removed in the field. Once the head is removed, the sounder is accessible in the of the unit. base has an independent sounder module that may be programmed as a single station, zone or all call sounder. The sounder a minimum of 75 dB at 10 feet. The ASB passes through the sound pattern sent to the sounder, therefore it may in any pattern the power supply provides. panel will support any combination of sensors or modules on the SLC. The ASB occupies one address on the loop and is fully to operate with any input. Once activated the sounder will also follow the input from the power source and de- accordingly. Base Mounting should be mounted directly on the electrical box. The mounting holes are configured for a single gang, double gang, octagon 4 square box. Pressure Level sound pressure complies and is listed to UL 464 with a minimum of 75 dBA at 10 feet. The sound pressure level is minimum at anywhere of 3 meter away from the sounder base. This complies with the CAN/ULC-S525 Clauses7.5 (refer to Figure 2). the Address addressable module, smoke sensor, heat detector and combination sensor/detector must have the address set before the device to the SLC loop. The address is set using the hand held device programmer or the addressing feature on the panel. connecting a device to the SLC loop, take the following precautions to prevent potential damage to SLC or device. Verify following: to the device is removed wiring is correctly installed. wiring has no open or short circuits. discrepancies and notify appropriate personnel. Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com 1 OF 2 Feature include a locking feature that prevents removal of the detector and removal of the base cover without using a tool. To eliminate this feature, break off the locking tab (refer to Figure 1), and then install the detector. 1. Eliminate the Locking Feature the plastic tab by twisting it toward a center of the base To remove the detector from the base once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into the slot on the to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to Figure 2). 2. Removing of detector head from base a small bladed screwdriver to the locking tab To remove the base cover from the lower enclosure once the locking feature has been activated, insert a small screwdriver into slot on the on the base to push the plastic tab while simultaneously turning the detector head counter-clockwise (refer to 3). 3. Removing of base cover from the lower enclosure tab Working voltage range for SLC Working voltage range for 24V current for SLC 1 current for 24V pressure level temperature range relative humidity range time Maximum number of addresses per zone Color Dimensions (without detector) to 24.0 V to 28.0 V mA D.C. (min.) as per CAN/ULC-S525 (min.) as per UL464 to 120 (0 to 49 ) to 93% (Non-condensing) 1 sec. White inches (54.4mm) inches (150mm) The standby current is the current that the device consumes when the device is in a non-activated condition and where no current is transmitted to the fire alarm control panel. FHA with ASB should be installed under 120 (Installation temperature range of ASB is 32 to 120 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features Multiple tone capability Wide selection of tones (single tone applications) U-TC Voice capable with pTCK audio interface card Die-cast aluminum circuitry housing Internal gain control NeMa 3 rated enclosure Indoor and outdoor mounting Signals Model PowerTone Speaker designed for use in hazardous locations. The unit produces a clear high decibel tone. The tone may be generated by a or tone generating system by a compact, solid-state, plug- circuitry and tone card are contained in dust and moisture sealed housing of die-cast aluminum. an internal gain hazardous areas with high ambient noise levels and where a National electrical Code (NFpa 70; Class I, groups a, B, C tone applications the universal tone card may be used. The is NeMa 3 rated. Specifications Number Voltage Draw page 1 OF 3 dB(a) Hz Card Sound (Model UTC) siren high and low horn intermittent horn high to low, repeated ascending, low to high – repeated Whoop Whoop NFPA card model Specifications circuitry designed for use in hazardous locations. die-cast, dust and moisture proof aluminum housing which aluminum, mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. be capable of clearly reproducing any number of tones. tones shall be selectable by connection to a voice or tone single or multiple tones) or a plug-in tone card (for single The amplified speakers shall be suitable for use National Electrical Code (NFPA 70): Class I, Groups C and Division II, Groups F, G, Division of a UL sound pressure level at 10 feet o

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 PRODUCTS GROUP (CPG)1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63031 Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6731 Fax (309) 762-8215 [email protected] ASHP, SPHH, SPHX, ASHH and ASHX audible devices. Suitable for outdoor use. include the following optional devices: Models PTCK25, PTCK70 connector cards and UTC tone card. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and considerations. Additional information may also be located in UL Hazardous Equipment Directory and UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory. accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, product designation, electrical rating and UL label. as audible devices for use with separately listed compatible control units. May be with separately listed compatible visual signal devices. ASHH and SPHH are suitable for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Group A, B, C D, Division 2; Class II, Group F and G, Division 2; and Class III. Model ASHX and SPHX suitable for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Group B, C and D; Class II, Group E, F G; and Class III. the distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition is required, the appliance must be with a fire alarm control unit that can generate the temporal pattern signal. Refer to Installation Instructions Manual for details. 7135-1517:0101 No. fm listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Multiple tone capability Wide selection of tones (single tone applications) U-TC Voice capable with pTCK audio interface card Die-cast aluminum circuitry housing Internal gain control NeMa 3 rated enclosure Indoor and outdoor mounting Signals Model PowerTone Speakers a crisp clear high decibel tone. The tone may be by a voice or tone generating system by a compact, aluminum. The circuitry and tone card are contained in and moisture proof sealed housing of die-cast aluminum. are polarized for connection to system supervised alarm Specifications Number Voltage Draw page 1 OF 3 PowerTone Speaker is well suited for areas high ambient noise levels and where a unique audible signal required. When used with a voice or tone generating system for various signal requirements. single tone applications the universal tone card may be used. 3 rated. moisture proof aluminum housing which is NeMa 3 rated. capable of clearly reproducing any number of HSI tones. tones shall be selectable by connection to a voice or tone single or multiple tones) or a plug-in universal tone card a select tone. amplified speaker shall be compatible with any 25 or of indoor or outdoor mounting. The speakers shall shall be Cpg Signals Model aSHp powertone dB(a) Hz Card Sound (Model UTC) siren high and low horn intermittent horn high to low, repeated ascending, low to high – repeated Whoop Whoop NFPA card model in accordance with all national and local codes and Read starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in Information

Features Wide selection of tones (U-TC) Multiple tone capability Voice capable with pTCK audio connector card Dust and moisture proof sealed die-cast aluminum housing 4 speaker cluster for 360 coverage Indoor and outdoor mounting Signals Model ASHP PowerTone Amplified Speaker produce a crisp clear high decibel tone and/or voice a tone can be generated by using the U-TC card, or a can be generated by any 25 or 70Vrms audio system with pTCK card. The speaker cone and projector are made of aluminum. speaker cluster may be mounted to an I-beam. a cluster with four aSHp powerTone speakers for 360 The aSHp is suited for areas with high ambient noise and where a unique audible signal is required. circuitry and connector card are contained in a dust and proof sealed die-cast red aluminum housing. an gain control allows for volume adjustment. Specifications Number Voltage Current Speaker Cluster Range VDC polarized alarm, 0.18a standby to 151 page 1 OF 3 levels and where unique audible signal is required. When with a tone generator or voice evac system and a pTCK25 pTCK70 connector card the speaker can reproduce and the audio signal. with the U-TC universal tone connector card can be used a reverse polarity NaC circuit. appliances shall be CPG Signals, Model Series. Amplified speakers shall be mounted in a of 4 ASHP-24MR PowerTone amplified speakers allow connecting of a 24vdc reverse polarity NaC circuit, a plug-in universal tone connector card (U-TC). The a die-cast, dust and moisture proof aluminum housing which NeMa 3 rated. speaker cone and projector shall be of spun aluminum. number of Cpg tones and voice evacuation signals. The system using the pTCK25 or pTCK70 connector card. of indoor or outdoor mounting. THIS CLUSTeR IS THe LaST DeVICe ON THe pLaCe eND OF LINe DeVICe aCROSS THe TeRMINaLS, aCCORDINg TO CONTROL UNIT INSTRUCTIONS. SIgNaL WIRINg IS FOR pTCK MODeLS ONLY page 2 OF 3 dB(a) and 760 Hz Card Sound (Model UTC) siren siren high and low struck repeatedly horn intermittent horn intermittent horn high to low, repeated and 550 ascending, low to high – repeated Whoop Whoop NFPA and 1160 and 1160 card model voltage VRMS VRMS in accordance with all national and local codes and hazard. Disconnect power source before Serious injury or death could result. Read all instructions carefully and understand them starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in injury o

Features Multiple tone capability Wide selection of tones (single tone applications) U-TC Voice capable with pTCK audio interface card Internal gain control NeMa 3 rated enclosure Indoor and outdoor mounting Rugged explosion-proof circuitry housing Signals Model aSHX powerTone explosion-proof produces a crisp clear high decibel tone. The tone may be by a voice or tone generating system by a compact, plug-in card. The speaker cone and projector are contained in an explosion-proof housing. an internal gain Specifications Number Voltage Range page 1 OF 3 dB(a) Card Sound (Model UTC) siren siren high and low horn intermittent horn intermittent horn ascending, low to high – repeated Whoop Whoop NFPA card model voltage Specifications notification appliances shall be explosion-proof hazardous/explosion proof locations. The speakers shall of tones. The tones shall be selectable by connection card (for single or multiple tones) or a plug-in card (for single tone). The amplified speaker shall be with any 25 or 70Vrms audio system using the amplified speakers shall have an internal gain control shall be Model ASHX Powertone Amplified in accordance with all national and local codes and Read all instructions carefully and understand them starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in Powertone Explosion-Proof Speaker is well for signaling in hazardous ar

ATTE-B ALARM & TROUBLE TRANSMITTER AC or DC Listed and FM Approved 12-5/16″ H x 8-5/16″ W x 3-5/8″ D H x 21.1cm W x 9.2cm D 8 lbs. (3.6 kg.) 18GA CRS; Finish – Red enamel ferrous metal parts painted, plated or equivalent to resist corrosion. Ratings: Contacts Limited Energy at 150VDC Switch One set of SPDT contacts 10.0 Amps at 250VAC Power: 12-24V; 2 Watt Max. DC or 60 Hz. AC Distance: ATTE-B must be within 3 of local control unit and wiring in conduit. Use: Fire Alarm Code Central Station* Proprietary* Remote Station* Premise Unit Requirements: position position position transmitting mA mA mA mA No. 1020118 model ATTE-B is an electric motor McCulloh type transmitter which may connected to a local NON-CODED type unit to transmit CODED alarm and signals. This alarm and trouble is suitable for Central Station, and Remote Station protected services. shunt switch is provided so the unit may be in a Non-Interfering model ATTE-B is designed for 12 to 24 AC or DC operation. Applying power to terminals 5 6 will cause the unit to transmit 1 round the Coded Signal, illuminating the Yellow (TROUBLE INDICATION). After the condition in the Non-Coded Local has been RESTORED, manually the Reset switch on the ATTE-B to the transmitter from the trouble power to terminals 3 and 4 will the unit to transmit 4 rounds of the Signal if the unit is in the normal and 3 rounds if the unit is in the position, illuminating the Red LED INDICATION). the power from terminals 3 and 4 cause the ATTE-B to transmit 1 round Signal automatically. adjustment on the circuit board provides motor speed adjustment from to 3.5 code pulses per second. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5400699 – REV G MKT. #8860001 – 9/01 1 OF 4 ALARM & TROUBLE TRANSMITTER AC or DC Pull tamper switch plunger to deactivate Operate reset switch. Transmitter run 4 rounds to the NORMAL (yellow and red LED OFF). Connect alarm and trouble inputs, central line, earth ground and shunt per Fig. Trip non-coded control to the ALARM The ATTE-B will transmit a 4 alarm signal and the red LED will on. Restore non-coded control to NORMAL condition. The ATTE-B will a 1 round restore signal and to the NORMAL condition (yellow red LED OFF). Trip non-coded control to the TROUBLE The ATTE-B will transmit a 1 trouble signal and the yellow LED come on. non-coded control to the condition. The ATTE-B will 4 rounds and restore to the condition (yellow and red LED Verify that the central office receives clear intelligible signals. (See Figs. 3 and 4): Mount ATTE-B. Wiring between non-coded and ATTE-B is unsupervised. must be located within 3 feet of control with interconnect wiring conduit. WARNING: Code wheel must be code cut and code wheel and reinstalled before any power is to the transmitter. (See Fig. 1) Remove code wheel and metal under code wheel. Cut code wheel to desired code. Place hole in bracket over emblem underside of code wheel (recessed – see Fig. 3). Reinstall code and bracket. The bracket tab be centered in the slot in black device (U8) on the circuit board Fig. 2). Hold code wheel and bracket in this and tighten mounting nut. Apply power to terminals 7 and 8 (see 3, Fig. 4). Transmitter will run to condition (yellow LED ON). 1 WHEEL REMOVAL AND CODING IN USA #5400699 – REV G MKT. #8860001 – 9/01 2 OF 4 ALARM & TROUBLE TRANSMITTER AC or DC 2 12 – 24V INSTALLATION Apply voltage from non-coded control for 4 round alarm signal or 3 round signal if unit is in condition. Apply voltage from non-coded control for 1 round trouble signal.

Features Operates with S-24, HS-24, CS, and CHS series. horn and strobe with the use of only two wires. No limit to the number of modules that can be synchronized Module is rated for 3 amps continuous current and 5 amps surge inrush current. to 1Hz flash rate. Operates 1 class circuit or 2 class circuits at 3 amps per Dual synchronization module ONLY when using 2 class A green LED status indicator to signal operation of module. Option to silence the horn while strobes continue to flash when temporal 3 mode. AVSM WILL NOT operate the ST/HS Series. Module Dimensions: 3.85″ (9.78 cm) H x 3.82″ (9.70 cm) W x (3.35 cm) D Dimensions: 5.57″ (14.15 cm) H x 4.55″ (11.56 cm) W x (6.07 cm) D the control module as shown in the following the control module will control the power to the signaling to produce synchronized operation. AVSM module is shipped with a back box and cover A green LED status indicator will flash once every four seconds zone 1 is operational. The LED will flash twice every four seconds if 1 and 2 are operational. Strobes should not be used on coded or signaling circuits. 1 OF 4 includes a 5 year warranty Series Product Draw VDC VDC VDC UL Max1 VDC UL Max1 mA mA mA mA current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33 VDC for VDC units) (8-17 VDC for 12 VDC units). For strobes the UL max current usually at the minimum listed voltage (16 VDC for 24 VDC units) (8 VDC 12 VDC units). For audibles, the max current is usually at the amximum voltage. For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. Potter AVSM synchronization control module is designed provide an easy way to synchronize multiple horns, strobes, and using only two wires in isntances where a synchronized is required. When synchronizing multiple horns and horn/strobes is the ability to silence the horn while allowing the strobes to to flash. for Multiple CLASS B Circuit and Use of a Slave Module HORN SILENCE IS REMOVE JUMPER) #1 #2 #3 #4 OF LINE FOR ONLY B JUMPER ONLY IF HORN CIRCUIT IS USED JUMPER IN PLACE TO NEED FOR HORN ON AVSM SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- #2 OF LINE FOR B ONLY SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 #1 JUMPER IN PLACE ON UNITS UNLESS HORN SILENCE IS NEEDED SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- OF LINE FOR B ONLY SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- OF LINE FOR B ONLY OF LINE FOR B ONLY #3 #4 CROSSING LINES DO NOT INDICATE CONNECTIONS incoming positive power lead must be broken and each lead to be inserted into each of the top two terminals. If two power are made to the signal, one for the strobe and one for the only one of the runs must have its positive lead broken and under the two separate top terminals. A barrier is provided prevent both leads from being placed under the same terminal. AVSM module is listed per ANSI/UL 1971 with a voltage of 8-33VDC/FWR. The AVSM module was tested to the voltage range(s); do not apply 80% and 110% of this range system operation. It is for indoor use only, with a temperature of 0 – 49 (32 – 120 and a maximum humidity of humidity.

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] S24-177 and *S-24 strobe lights followed by suffix -W (wall mount), followed by -W or (white or red). Intended for indoor use and wall mount only. Model AVSM Sync Module for indoor use with Potter Electric Signal Company synchronizable strobe lights. to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational 15cd & 75cd at 00 angle axis 60cd, 75cd, 110cd, 177cd. S-24: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd and 110cd. VDC AVSM: 8-33 VDC/VFWR Rate: 60 flashes per minute accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical and candela ratings and UL label. as strobe lights suitable for the hearing impaired for use with separately listed fire alarm control units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details. 05-01-20 VWW listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

AVSM SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGE 4 INTRODUCTION Potter Electric Signal Company Model AVSM control module is designed to provide an easy way to synchronize multiple strobes and horn/strobes using only two wires. The AVSM is with the MHT-1224 Series, SPKSTR Series, CSPKSTR Series, CS-24/CHS-24 Series, CCS-24/CCHS-24 Series Colored Lens Series, EH-24/S24/HS24 Series, S-24-WP/ Series, CS-24-WP/CHS-24-WP/CSLP-24-WP/CHSLP-24-WP Series, S-24/HS-24 Series and CS-24/ CHS-24 Colored Lens Series. The control module the capability to synchronize multiple horn signals with a code 3 temporal pattern, along with the ability to silence the horn while allowing the strobes to continue to flash. By the control module as shown in the following drawing, the module will control the power to the units to produce the synchronized operation. WHEN USING TWO WIRE OPERATION, SWITCHES 1 AND 2 MUST BE IN THE ON POSITION. SWITCHES ON THE SIGNALS ARE IN THESE POSITIONS WHEN SHIPPED THE FACTORY. FEATURES OF THE GANGABLE AVSM CONTROL MODULE Slave control modules sync input is wired to the master control module output as an ordinary signal. This allows the user to determine which module will act as the master and which will act as the slave(s). Electrically isolated control module sync input allows slave control modules to be connected across separate power supplies and panels. Wiring between sync modules to maintain synchronized operation (sync + and – terminals) is supervised. Sync input terminals and horn input terminals present a load of 7mA at 24VDC to the power supply. Slave control module sync terminals are connected to the output terminals of the Loss of sync signal on slave module failsafe mode. If a control module set up as a slave loses the sync signal from the master, the slave module will revert to independent operation. The horns on zones controlled by a slave module may be independently muted via the horn input on the slave module. If the master control module receives a mute signal, then all slave sync control module in the same manner as an ordinary signal. must be reset to the module to reestablish slave mode operation. and their corresponding zones are placed into mute mode. Staggered zone power up with synchronization is possible. If any slave module receives power after the master sync module, all units will re-sync with the master module within four A green LED status indicator will flash once every four seconds if zone 1 is operational. The LED will flash twice every four seconds if zones 1 and 2 are operational. FOR MULTIPLE CLASS A CIRCUITS AND USE OF A SLAVE MODULE OF LINE FOR A ONLY HORN SILENCE IS REMOVE JUMPER) #1 OF LINE FOR A ONLY #2 OF LINE FOR A ONLY JUMPER IF HORN SILENCE IS USED JUMPER IN PLACE ELIMINATE NEED FOR INPUT ON AVSM SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- #1 SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 JUMPER IN ON SLAVE UNITS SEPARATE HORN CIRCUIT NEEDED SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- #2 CROSSING DO NOT 1 HORN SILENCE IS REMOVE JUMPER) #1 #2 #3 #4 FOR MULTIPLE CLASS B CIRCUITS AND USE OF A SLAVE MODULE OF LINE FOR ONLY B JUMPER IF HORN SILENCE IS USED JUMPER IN PLACE ELIMINATE NEED FOR INPUT ON AVSM. SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SYNC + OUT1+ NEG1 OUT2+ NEG2 SIGNAL S+ H- SIGNAL S+ H- #2 OF LINE FOR B ONLY SYNC +

BAC-PAK TEST KIT Microbiology In uenced Corrosion Water Testing Kit #BAC-PAK kit includes: 1 ea. “Bac-Pak” foil pack with three microbiological test vials labeled APB, SRB, and IRB. Vial holder 120cc bottle for obtaining sample number: 1119172 Test: Run water source to be tested for approximately 15 seconds. Remove cap on 120cc bottle and ll bottle. Replace cap. Shut off water. Note: If the water is extremely black or dirty it can be ltered through a coffee lter before pouring into the test vials. This will allow the color changes to be noticed. Fill in all pertinent information on the test vial holder. Remove cap on vial for APB test. Fill vial to line on side of vial with water from sample bottle. Cap vial and invert for approximately 2 seconds, then turn upright and place in the cutout holder with the corresponding cap color. Repeat steps 4-6 with SRB & IRB vials. Place test vials in in a location which does not have direct sunlight or extreme temperature changes. Observe and note color changes of vials over a period of up to 9 days. or main drain. Precautions should be taken to prevent unwanted water ow alarm. Water sample can be obtained through the inspectors test BAC-PAK is a test kit designed to allow eld testing of wet pipe systems and/or water supplies for MIC causing bacterium. The allows eld testing for; Iron related bacterium (iron-pipe oxidizing reducing bacterium); Sulfate Reducing Bacterium (causes pit and Acid Producing Bacterium (causes pit corrosion). The takes just a few minutes. The results will appear over a period up to 9 days to allow for bacteria culture growth. more thorough test performed by a chemist and including a laboratory is available. The Potter water test model PWTK, stock #1119178. dry pipe systems use the Potter 5 Year Deposit Test Kit. Stock # 1119174. test is also performed by a chemist and includes a laboratory analysis. by Day Result chart Change to Yellow Change to Black Change to Reddish Brown *cfu/ml. *cfu/ml. Change to Yellow Change to Black Change to Reddish Brown corrosion possibility Change to Yellow Change to Black Change to Reddish Brown *cfu/ml. *cfu/ml. *cfu/ml. *cfu/ml. MIC corrosion is very high if bottle changes color. high if any bottle color. corrosion possibility moderate. SRB infection to high. Orange *cfu/ml. Orange *cfu/ml. Orange *cfu/ml. Diagnosis any vial indicates a presence of MIC within the rst 5 days, the of MIC corrosion is high to severe and the system should treated with Potter Pipe-Shield. only 1 vial indicates the presence of MIC after 5 days, the is moderate to high. Immediate treatment with Potter may not be necessary. The building owner or their has options: Iron Test, Potter stock #1119176 can be performed to determine level of dissolved iron in the system. Water Test, Potter stock #1119178 can be performed to provide a comprehensive test of the water. Bac-Pak test can be performed at a later date (within 12 to determine if the condition has worsened. system can be treated with Pipe-Shield. If any of the bacterium show up in a sample, this indicates bacterium population at the point where the sample was taken in system. The nutrient level or oxygen concentration may not be to growth at that particular point. However, the conditions be right for extreme growth in another part of the system. presence of MIC in a re sprinkler system should always be a for concern. Potter suggests treating systems containing MIC bacterium with Potter Pipe-Shield. Electric Signal Company, LLC 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5400602 – REV B 1 OF 2 of Bacterium Tested (Acid Producing Bacterium) Producing Bacterium corrosion is a major player in the MIC

Features BACnet/IP Connect to 1000 Potter panels in a single building, local campus, multiple sites worldwide using LAN/WAN/Internet Native Ethernet networking connectivity with fire panels BACnet Link, eliminating need for additional hardware, gateways, or network interface cards BACnet Link is a software solution that will run as a service on customer provided Windows 10 computer End-to-end supervision of all panels Deliver supplementary life safety signals to many of the largest systems in the world – Tridium, Alerton, JCI Metasys more Automatically discover all points minimal configuration BACnet interface is unlisted and all signals are supplementary. Developed, manufactured and supported by Potter in the U.S.A. BACnet Link enables up to 1000 compatible Potter fire panels to to building management systems (BMS) using the BACnet over open protocol. The BACnet Link enables Potter to report panel point status information to BACnet networks in markets such K-12 Schools, Colleges & Universities, Hospitality, Commercial Data Centers, Government and Industrial Facilities. This interface allows many BMS systems (e.g. Tridium, JCI Metasys and more) to display and respond to fire activity while UL approved life safety functions are retained in Potter fire alarm control panels. Network Specifications Per & OS Fire Control (v. 6 and 10 Professional, 64-bit, English (USA) i5 (or equivalent) 2.6 GHz, 16GB RAM with static IPs version 4.7.2 Visual C++ 2017 Redistributable -4000, IPA -100, IPA -60 AFC-100, AFC-50, ARC-100 for supplementary signaling (PIC statement available in the manual) PAGE 1 OF 2 Link Architecture Information Software and Hardware Link enables a user to integrate up to 1000 compatible Potter fire panels into BACnet BMS systems. 1-year software services agreement (SSA) is included with BACNET- Link connection licenses. Each BACnet device connected to the BACnet Link a license. software services agreement (SSA) is included with BACNET-LINK-CONNECT Software Service Agreements (SSA) software services agreement for BACNET-LINK. BACNET-LINK must have an SSA in to get the software updates. software services agreement for BACNET-LINK-CONNECT. Each BACNET-LINK- must have an SSA in order to get the software updates. and BACnet are trademarks of ASHRAE, American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers. No. PAGE 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Smoke Detection Overview use with Fireray 50R/ 2000 EExd use with Fireray 50R/ 2000 EExd Universal Mounting Bracket. use with and accessories. pivots for accurate alignment of beam and prisms. Adjustment Bracket. Bracket for offering rotation plus 180 adjustment can also used with Prism Adaptor Plates. Adjustment Bracket. Bracket for rotation plus 140 adjustment. offering Flush Mount Plate. Mount Plate for 4 Prism Adaptor Plate. pre-drilled to mount 4 prisms. to mount on the Universal Mounting 5000-005. Prisms and Bracket (5000- are ordered separately. Flush Mount Plate. Mount Plate with 4″ square back-plate Single Prism Adaptor Plate. pre-drilled to mount 1 prism. Designed mount on the Universal Mounting Bracket Prism and Bracket (5000-005) are separately. Prism. Detectors. prisms for Reflective Beam Long Range Prism Kit. additional prisms for use with the prism installation is between 160 and ft from the detector head. Protective Controller Protective to mount to a flat surface. Includes 4 Philips screws and mounting hardware. Protective & 5000 Detector Protective Made to mount to either the 5000-011 or to a flat surface. Includes 4 Philips screws and hardware. Prism Wall Bracket. Wall Bracket comes pre-drilled to 1 (Up to 160 ft) or 4 (160 to 330 ft) Hole pattern on side mounting flange to Unistrut. Prisms ordered separately. Protective RU Detector Protective Made to mount to either the 0608 back or to a flat surface. Includes 4 Philips Head and hardware. use with Fireray 50R/ 2000 EExd (cid:2) (cid:2) Universal Ceiling Mount. use with 3000 and prism and Universal Bracket. 5000 Series Detector Uni-Box. box and hinged lid includes conduit knock- on all four sides. Universal back plate with one conduit knock-out. Captive lock on front plate. Mounting holes for 1000-018 wire cage and 3000-202 flush plate. Controller Back Box. use with 5000 Includes conduit on top and bottom. Surface or Flush Universal back plate mounting with one knock-out. Semi Flush Trim Plate. on the 5000-009 Controller Back Box semi-flush installations. Detector Cover Plate. to mount the Fireray 5000 Detector to a double gang electric box. Ltd Jamike Ave Ste 200 KY 41018-3147 USA 957 1570 534 1526 known as Fire Fighting Enterprises Ltd use with Fireray 50R/ 2000 EExd (cid:2) Controller Back Box. use with mount back box. Metal with on top and bottom. Has a universal plate mounting hole pattern Semi-Flush Trim Plate. use with Fireray 3000. for use with Controller Back Box (sold Use when 3000-209 back-box is in wall for clean finish look. Surface Mount Back Box. use with Two 1/2 conduit knock-outs on each side. Universal plate mounting with one conduit knock- Mounting holes for 0893 alignment bracket 1000-020 wire cage. Surface Mount Wall Bracket. Bracket for detectors or s

A Brand SECURITY BALANCED CONTACT 1 3/8 to 3 operating gap 24 armored cable Corrosion resistant Alnico 6 magnet Anodized aluminum housing BMC-33B Anti-Defeat Magnetic Contacts are uniquely designed and constructed to make defeating almost impossible. The switch housing specially arranged reed switches. These reed switches are pre-set in a biased format with ring magnets, producing a symmetrical field. The magnetic layout is designed with a combination of three polarized magnets. This switch and magnetic combination produces perfect symmetrical magnetic field in a balanced condition, as if no magnet field existed. Any attempt to bypass or defeat the BMC-33B with external magnet will cause the magnetic fields to be imbalanced, thus causing an alarm condition. 0.5 (13) 3.46 (88) 4 (104) Magnet Gap Min. in this range Not Install in this range ~ 3 Gap ~ 1-3/8 Dead Zone 0.7 (18) Dot Mark same direction) 3 (76) C-Bracket Switch 24 (609) Carry 4440004 Amp Amp 3/8 3 to 120 to 49 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880113 – REV B 1 OF 1

BPS SERIES PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR Low 2 Eggshell UL Highly Two Non-Directional Vandal Built-in Removable Automatic Information – 120 in U.S.A. #8840014 – REV F 1 OF 2 SERIES PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR Specifications Diagrams Wiring Diagram LISTED Wiring Diagram LISTED LISTED VDC LISTED

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] BPS-2, PS-24H and PS-24 photoelectric type smoke detectors. Unit with suffix -H a supplemental heat sensor. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed description and operational considerations. VDC and 24 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, electrical rating and UL label. as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units when used in conjunction with listee’s listed bases (CSFM Listing No. Models with supplemental heat sensor are not approved for use in lieu of the heat detectors. listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

A Brand CONTACTS AND MAGNET ASSEMBLY Type Dimensions (in.) Bracket for: 1/4 x 2 7/8 x 2 3.0 x 1/2 x 8 1/2 3.0 x 2 x 4 x 2 x 4 Series Contacts surface mount contacts; AMS-38, AMS-39, BMC-33 Series Contact ODC-59, and AMS-37 Series Contacts and AMS-37 Magnet Assembly Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850070 – REV C 8/15 1 OF 1

BSC SAFE CONTACTS Listed Assembly: 3.06″L x 2.19″W x 1.63″H L x 5,6cm W x 4,1cm H 4.13″L x 1.75″W x 1.19″H L x 4,4cm W x 3,0cm H 11 oz. (308 g) Base and Plunger Assembly: Acid treated alumi- Baked grey spatter enamel parts nickel plated to resist corrosion. Blade Contacts – Silver Contacts – Gold Treated Copper SPDT (Form C) Amp at 130VDC Amp at 30VDC/AC Mechanically activated when base is removed safe body. Limitations: Indoor use only 2 MOUNTING ADJUSTMENT No. 2020001 Model BSC Break Safe Contact is exterior mounted, proof and operates with open, closed or double Model BSC can be mounted in several positions, on the style of safe, by simply loosening the set in the plunger assembly (See Figures 1 and 2). set screws are tightly secured after repositioning assembly. base is mounted on the safe body and the plunger is on the door (See Figure 3). The wire entrance to base is threaded to accept a 1/2″ conduit fitting. EVD Bulletin for complete safe protection. 1 BSC TYPICAL SAFE INSTALLATION 3 INTERNAL CONTACT DRAWING DOOR SAFE DOOR SAFE ON DOUBLE DOOR SAFES, DOORS MUST HAVE FOR UL CERTIFICATED FOR SAFES WITH ROUND SEE SCV BULLETIN Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870003 – REV G #5400703 – 12/01 1 OF 2 SAFE CONTACTS installing the BSC in an EVD-C pickup loop: normally closed only! the BSC is installed in an EVD-C pickup loop, it must be wired in series, before the last EVD-P on the loop. wire from terminal #4 of the EVD-C goes to the common (center) contact of the BSC. normally closed (bottom) contact would go to terminal #2 of the EVD-P. shield from terminal #3 of the EVD would connect to the normally open (top) contact, then continue to terminal #1 the EVD-P. it is wired directly to the relay contacts on any EVD: a normally open circuit that shorts on alarm: EOL resistor from burglar panel across N.O. and N.C. (top and bottom) contacts. N.O. (top) contact to the N.O. relay contact of the EVD. common (center) to the N.C. relay contact of the EVD. zone of burglar panel to the common and N.O. relay contacts of the EVD. (See Fig. 4) 4 5 a normally closed circuit that opens on alarm: EOL resistor from burglar panel across N.O. and common (top and center) contacts. N.O. (top) contact to the N.O. relay contact of the EVD. N.C. (bottom) contact to the common relay contact of the EVD. zone of burglar panel to the N.O. and N.C. relay contacts of the EVD. (See Fig. 5) IN USA #8870003 – REV G #5400703 – 12/01 2 OF 2

ELK SERIES 24 Long Maintenance High Wide Ease No SERIES

No text preview available.

Features Backup amplification and booster for dual channel amplifiers Mounts in the DCA-5025 and DCA-10025 enclosure Equipped with stacker bracket for secure mounting BUA-1000 is a backup amplifier and booster which provides a solution to maintain audio output during a failure condition of dual channel amplifier. The BUA-1000 is equipped with a stacker for secure mounting. The BUA-1000 is compatible with the and DCA-10025. mA Specifications Current (32 mA @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 BUA-1000 is connected to the DCA-5025 and DCA-10025 using a (12) pin ribbon cable. The connection is supervised, and power The BUA-1000 must be mounted in the DCA enclosure. Each is equipped with a bracket for secure and accessible mounting. Information BUA-1000 BACKUP AMPLIFIER No. DCA AMPIIFIERS W/ BRACKET PAGE 2 OF 2

BVL TYPE BLEEDER VALVE Body: Bronze Zinc plated steel Pressure: 300 PSI (20.7BAR) 1/2″ NPT Ori ce: .125″ (3mm) number – 1000018 Information Model BVL, lever type bleeder valve, is for use as a test valve for operated devices on wet pipe sprinkler systems that have excess or dry pipe sprinkler systems. BVL should be installed in-line with the pressure device. It provides convenient means for removal or testing the pressure actuated device affecting the pressure in the system. Closing the valve (moving valve handle perpendicular to the 1/2″ pipeline) shuts off the water air from the supply and opens a small ori ce (pin-hole) to exhaust the between the valve and the pressure device. This should provide low pressure actuation of the pressure device, testing its operation. BVL should be installed in-line to the alarm or supervisory device the (Potter Device) stamp, or with the arrow pointing toward alarm or supervisory device that is to be tested. BVL should be installed so the exhaust ori ce is pointed in a direction. TO SPRINKLERS 799-1 Electric Signal Company, LLC 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5400799 – REV K 1 OF 1

BVS VALVE WITH SUPERVISORY SWITCH UL and CSFM Listed, CE Marked – 4.8″ L x 2.6″ W x 5.5″ H L x 6,6cm W x 14,0cm H – 4.8″ L x 2.6″ W x 6.0″ H L x 6,6cm W x 15,2cm H – 4.8″ L x 2.6″ W x 5.5″ H L x 6,6cm W x 15,9cm H BVS-1/2″ – 2.25 lbs. (1,0 kg.) – 2.75 lbs. (1,26 kg.) – 3.50 lbs. (1,6 kg.) Die-cast zinc, red enamel finish parts plated to resist corrosion) Entrance: One opening for non-threaded conduit provided Ratings: Two sets of SPDT (Form C) Amps at 125/250VAC Amps at 30VDC resistive Specifications: Indoor or outdoor use Temperature range: 40 (4,5 NEMA 4 rated enclosure – when used with proper fittings Not for use in hazardous locations Pressure: 175 PSI (12,1 BAR) Connection: 1/2″, 3/4″ and 1″ Female NPT Use: and BVS-3/4″ Sprinkler or two family dwelling occupancy up to four stories NFPA-13R Fire Alarm Code or two family dwelling Fire Alarm Code – Stock No. 1010150 – Stock No. 1010175 BVS-1″- Stock No. 1010200 BVS-1/2″ w/TSK – Stock No. 1010010 BVS-3/4″ w/TSK – Stock No. 1010011 BVS-1″ w/TSK – Stock No. 1010012 Tamper: Tamper resistant screws standard, on w/out TSK. Contacts: SPDT (Form C) Rating: 3 Amps at 250VAC 8″ No. 22 AWG Wire Leads No. 0090140 INFORMATION BVS utilizes a ball valve in conjunction with a switch The switch assembly is enclosed in a tamper NEMA 4 enclosure. The switch assembly the fully open position of the valve. Two sets of contacts are provided which will operate when the position is altered from an open state. models with out the Tamper Switch Kit installed the is held in place by two tamper resistant screws that a special tool to remove. The tool is furnished with device and should be left with the building owner or party. Replacement or additional cover and hex keys are available. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8820014 – REV K #5401021 – 12/01 PAGE 1 OF 2 VALVE WITH SUPERVISORY SWITCH BVS-1/2″ and 3/4″ are intended to be installed in the trim line of a wet or dry fire sprinkler system. (They as electrically supervised shut-off valves to allow for or service on alarm attachments, without clos- the sprinkler supply valve.) BVS-1″ is intended to be used as the main control valve NFPA 13D sprinkler systems, or in any other applications a 1/4 turn ball valve is acceptable. retrofit installations, it is necessary to remove the existing valve and replace it with the BVS. TERMINAL CONNECTIONS PLATE TERMINAL uninsulated section of a single should not be looped the terminal and serve as two connections. The wire must severed, thereby providing super- of the connection in the event the wire becomes dislodged from the terminal. SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS: BVS-1/2″ and BVS-3/4″ ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS BVS and its associated protective system should be inspected tested in accordance with the NFPA codes and standards the authority having jurisdiction recommends quarterly or frequently). IN USA #8820014 – REV K #5401021 – 12/01 PAGE 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features Provides Class A connection for NACs & P-Link Exclusive to the PFC-4064 FACP Product includes a 5 year warranty CA-4064 is a Class A Expander for the PFC-4064 fire control panel. The CA-4064 allows for Class wiring of the built in P-Link communication bus and the (4) built in NAC circuits. Class A configuration requires the use of the CA-4064. CA-4064 mounts to the provided framework in the fire control panel. Once the card is installed, the additional are provided for the return loop of the NACs and One (1) CA-4064 Class A expander may be installed per The CA-4064 provides the terminals for NACs and P-Link. Specifications Current Current Operating CA-4064 mA mA – 120 (0 – 49 10%-93% @ (86 non-condensing humidity (W x H x D) 4 x 6 x 1-5/8 Information A Expander No. PAGE 1 OF 1

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 2 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] Model PFC – 4064 fire alarm control panel, Model CA-4064 Expander, Model IDC Automatic, Manual, waterflow and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, remote station (PPU), proprietary (PPU) and central station (PPU) services. components: – 4064 Mainboard panel assembly – 4064 Class A expander card – 6500, RA – 6500R, RA – 6500F LCD remote annunciator – 1000 DACT – 1000 Power supply expander – 6 Initiating device expander card – 16/16F LED Annunciator – 50 LED driver – 5 Relay expander card – 1000Fiber interface bridge – 1000 Serial/Parallel printer card – 1000 Multi-connector module EOLR EOLR Diode to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. Operating Supply: VAC Operating Supply VDC A accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally dcc listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. No. 2 of 2 dcc listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features provides Class a connection for SLC, NaCs, & pLink Monts to framework inside panel enclosure allows for independent circuit selection of Class a operation product includes 5 year warranty UUKL Listed for Smoke Control Ca-6075 is a Class a expander. The Ca-6075 allows for Class wiring of the built in SLC circuit, p-Link communication bus and (2) built in NaC circuits. The Ca-6075 mounts to the provided in the fire alarm control panel. The Class A operation can independently selected for the p-Link and SLC circuits using the Fire panel programmer Software of the Ca-6075 Class a expander to the addressable panel: Remove two (2) #6-32×7/8 screws (item #1 shown below) from the panel and retain for use in step #3. Install 5050793 Bracket, inserting end tabs into slots on the control User Interface bracket. Secure 5050793 bracket to the control panel using the two (2) (item #1) that were removed in step #1. Slide the Ca-6075 Class a expander over the two (2) guide pins the 5050793 bracket. Seat the Ca-6075 on the 5050793 bracket so connector on the back of the Ca-6075 is fully engaged with the on the control panel. Secure the Ca-6075 to the 5050793 bracket using two (2) #6- screws provided (shown on page 2). Specifications Current Current Operating Ca-6075 ma 44 ma – 120 (0 – 49 10%-93% @ (86 non-condensing humidity panels Ipa-100 aFC-100, aRC-100 pFC-6075*, pFC-6200* p100*, p200*, p300* product for use with Ipa-4000, aFC-1000, pFC-6800 and p400(R) panels. in accordance with compatible Fire alarm Control panel manual. page 1 OF 2 Class A Installation Diagram 1 Class A Card 2 pins bracket x 7/8 screws A Expander x 1/4 screws Information A Expander No. Device page 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features Provides Class A connection for NACs, P-Link and SLC Mounts to framework inside panel enclosure Allows for independent circuit selection of Class A operation Product includes a 5 year warranty UUKL Listed for Smoke Control CA-6500 Class A expander allows six notification circuits, two circuits and the built-in SLC circuit to be wired for class A The Class A operation can be independently selected for PLINK and SLC circuits using the Potter Fire Panel Programmer CA-6500 is installed directly in the addressable control panel using the supplied cable assembly and hardware. Power the system down. Slide the Class A expander into the opening on the bottom of control chassis. The tabs on the back of the CA-6500 Class expander must slide into the slots located in the control panel Secure the CA-6500 Class A expander using two #6-32×3/8 Plug the 2 x 9 cable assembly (P/N 5210515) into the CA-6500 control panel. See page 2 for wiring instructions Specifications Current Current Operating CA-6500 (WxHxD) mA mA – 120 (0 – 49 10%-93% @ (86 non-condensing humidity x 1-1/8 x 5-1/8 Panels Product page 1 OF 2 of Installing and Wiring a Class A Card 1 Installation Showing the CA-6500 Connection 2 ribbon cAble ribbon cAble in guides under mAin boArd x 1/4 A expAnder of Wiring a Class A Expander Card 3 of P-Link Class A Wiring Requiring a 4 B 1 : 1 1 NAC 2 – 3 NAC 4 5 NAC 6 – 1 NAC 2 – 3 NAC 4 – 5 NAC 6 – 1 A B 2 A B 1 A B 2 A B to the control panel Installation and manual for wiring Class A circuits Class A Expander Installation Class A configuration requires the use of the CA-6500. Once the is installed, the additional terminals are provided for the return of the NAC. The CA-6500 provides the terminals for NACs, and P-Link. Refer to the figures below for examples of install- and wiring a Class A expander card. One (1) CA-6500 Class A expander may be installed per panel. The CA-6500 provides the terminals for NACs, P-Link, and SLCs. Information A Expander No. page 2 OF 2

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] PFC-6500, PFC-6500R, P400, *P400R and PFC-6800 fire alarm control panels Manual, waterflow and sprinkler supervisory type device and local, auxiliary, remote station (PPU), proprietary (PPU) and central station (PPU) services. Refer listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. System components: Class A Expander DACT : Main Boards RA-6075R, RA-6500: Remote Annuciators 3005012: EOL Resistors PSN-1000(E): Fire Power Expander AE-8, AE-14; Power expander enclosures Loop Expander VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally initiating and indicating devices. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual details. Fire Alarm Verification Feature (delay of fire alarm signal), the maximum period shall not exceed 30 seconds. No. 02-08-16 dc listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CA2Z A INITIATING MODULE Listed: Option for use with the PFC-4410RC Series Protected In 5.1k End Of Line Resistor Board Assembly: Mounts to PFC-4410RC Panel stand-offs No. 3006013 Model CA2Z Class A Module is designed to be used with the PFC- Fire Control Releasing Panel to convert from two (Class B) device circuits to two (Class A) circuits. module is to be mounted in the upper right hand corner of the panel. to the panel is made via the 8 pin header mounted on the side of the CA2Z. Typical Wiring 1 2 3 4 BOARD 1 2 3 4 2 USED) 1 3527-11 Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5401025 – REV F 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

CAM A INDICATING CIRCUIT MODULE Listed: Option for use with the PFC-4410RC Series Protected Requirements In Alarm: 25 mA at 24VDC from control panel indicating circuit. In, Polarized, 5.1k End Of Line Resistor number: 3005300 Model CAM Class A Module is designed to be used with the Fire Control Releasing Panel to convert a single (Class indicating appliance circuit to a (Class A) circuit (one module is for each indicating appliance circuit). After installing the the indicating circuit should be activated to ensure proper and connections. module is provided with double sided foam tape and should mounted in the area below the main circuit module so that the are accessible. Typical Wiring BAR NO. NO. (IF USED) 1/2 2 3 4 INDICATING CIRCUIT POLARITY IS FOR ALARM REMOVE RESISTOR 927-15 Electric Signal Company, llC 2081 Craig Road, St. louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5400927 – REV l PAGE 1 OF 1

Features Tamperproof field selectable candela settings of 15, 30,75, 95, and 115 Lens color available: amber, blue, green, and red. Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Switch selection for high or low dBA Switch selection for 2400Hz or mechanical tone Switch selection for continuous or temporal 3 tone Tamperproof re-entrant style grill Surface mount with the CLNGBB (Ceiling Surface Mount Back Box) Silence audible while visual appliance remains flashing (for use in accepted jurisdictions) Product includes a 5 year warranty Potter CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series are indoor ceiling mount or horn/strobe combinations that offer dependable audible and signals for warning and emergency notification. Applications emergency communication, severe weather, emergency and many more. CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series are 24VDC appliances available lens colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The Colored Lens series tamperproof field selectable options of 15, 30, 75, 95, and 115 They have a minimal operating current and a minimum flash of 1 Hz within the listed voltage range. The strobes can be synced a Gentex sync protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die-cast 4 plate which incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature allows the installer to easily test for supervision. The product also a locking mechanism that secures the product to the bracket showing any screws. The Colored Lens Series also features patented Checkmate Instant Voltage Verification Feature which the installer to check the voltage without removing the signal. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0205 (CCHS Series) 7135-0328:0211 (CCS Series) Specifications Voltage Limitations Connections Weight 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 120 (0 – 49 Only H x 2.6 W accept 18 – 12 AWG mount with CLNGBB lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Number Color Max Strobe Current Ratings (24VDC Regulated) Gree, and Lens Lens unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. mA Number Color dBA at 10 per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room dBA at 10 Series Colored Lens Horn Strobe, Selectable Candela Setting 3 2400Hz 3 Mechanical 2400Hz Decibel and Current Ratings at 10 UL 464 at 10 UL 464 24VDC Operating at High (mA) Mechanical the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting the ANSI/UL 464 reverberant sound level required for public mode fire service. These settings are acceptable only for private mode fire alarm Use the high dBA setting for public mode application. sound output for the temporal 3 tone is rated lower since the time the horn off is averaged into the sound output rating. While the horn is producing tone in the temporal 3 mode, its sound pressure is the same as continuous does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signal

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CCHS-24A (Amber Lens), CCHS-24B (Blue Lens), CCHS-24G (Green Lens) and (Red Lens) strobe lights. All models are selectable-candela types with ratings of 30cd, 75cd, 95cd and 115cd on-axis and are intended for indoor use only mounted on ceiling. Units may followed by P (plain) and/or C (ceiling) followed by -R or -W denoting color of the housing (red or white). Units are for private mode signaling use only. Refer to data sheet for additional product description and operational considerations VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. approved for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Tamperproof field selectable candela settings of 15, 30,75, 95, and 115 Lens color available: amber, blue, green, and red. Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Switch selection for high or low dBA Switch selection for 2400Hz or mechanical tone Switch selection for continuous or temporal 3 tone Tamperproof re-entrant style grill Surface mount with the CLNGBB (Ceiling Surface Mount Back Box) Silence audible while visual appliance remains flashing (for use in accepted jurisdictions) Product includes a 5 year warranty Potter CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series are indoor ceiling mount or horn/strobe combinations that offer dependable audible and signals for warning and emergency notification. Applications emergency communication, severe weather, emergency and many more. CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series are 24VDC appliances available lens colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The Colored Lens series tamperproof field selectable options of 15, 30, 75, 95, and 115 They have a minimal operating current and a minimum flash of 1 Hz within the listed voltage range. The strobes can be synced a Gentex sync protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. CCS/CCHS Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die-cast 4 plate which incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature allows the installer to easily test for supervision. The product also a locking mechanism that secures the product to the bracket showing any screws. The Colored Lens Series also features patented Checkmate Instant Voltage Verification Feature which the installer to check the voltage without removing the signal. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0205 (CCHS Series) 7135-0328:0211 (CCS Series) Specifications Voltage Limitations Connections Weight 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 120 (0 – 49 Only H x 2.6 W accept 18 – 12 AWG mount with CLNGBB lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Number Color Max Strobe Current Ratings (24VDC Regulated) Gree, and Lens Lens unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. mA Number Color dBA at 10 per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room dBA at 10 Series Colored Lens Horn Strobe, Selectable Candela Setting 3 2400Hz 3 Mechanical 2400Hz Decibel and Current Ratings at 10 UL 464 at 10 UL 464 24VDC Operating at High (mA) Mechanical the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting the ANSI/UL 464 reverberant sound level required for public mode fire service. These settings are acceptable only for private mode fire alarm Use the high dBA setting for public mode application. sound output for the temporal 3 tone is rated lower since the time the horn off is averaged into the sound output rating. While the horn is producing tone in the temporal 3 mode, its sound pressure is the same as continuous does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signal

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CCS-24A, CCS-24B, CCS-24G, and CCS-24R strobe lights. Units employ a strobe tube and electronic trigger circuit mounted on a printed wiring board with a color lenses. is intended for indoor use only mounted on the wall or on the ceiling. Unit is for private signaling use only. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional product description and considerations. – 33 VDC 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 95cd and 115cd Selectable accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Not for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CFG-5000 CONFIGURATION TOOL Rugged metal construction Con gures both DACT-5000 and UDACT-9000 Large LCD screen Simplistic operation Directly powered from DACT Required to program DACT number: 3002110 CFG-5000 DACT Con guration Tool is used to con gure the DACT-5000 and the UDACT-9000. The CFG-5000 is in a metal enclosure and utilizes a number pad with a large LCD A ribbon cable from the CFG-5000 plugs into the DACT for and communication, no external power is required. CFG-5000 has two levels of access for an operator and an The operator is level one and the installer is level two. installer level can con gure any of the options available. operator level (Level 1) cannot change any of the account or numbers. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8910206 – REV A 1 OF 1

Features Nominal voltage 24 VDC field selectable candela options 15, 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 Bracket – Ease of Supervision Testing – Instant Voltage Verification strobe and/or horn with Gentex AVSM Control entire system, install mounting bracket, then install Documented lower installation and operating costs Terminals 12 to 18 AWG Selection for High or Low dBA Selection for 2400Hz or mechanical Tone Selection for Continuous or Temporal 3 re-entrant grill mount with the CLNGBB (Ceiling Surface Mount Back audible while visual appliance will remain flashing (for in accepted jurisdictions) available in red or off-white Temperature: to 120 (0 to 49 The CS Series is not listed for use. Dimensions (15.24 cm) x 2.6″ (6.604 cm) Ceiling Mount Series comes standard with the 4″ mounting plate incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature that allows the to easily test for supervision. The product also features a mechanism which secures the product to the bracket without screws showing. CS/CHS also features the patented Checkmate – Instant Voltage feature which allows the installer to check the voltage drop without removing the signal. CS Series appliances are ANSI/UL 464 and ANSI/UL 1971 listed use with fire protective systems. 1 OF 4 includes a 5 year warranty Potter CS/CHS Series is a ceiling mount strobe or horn/strobe that offers dependable audible and visual alarms and the current consumption. CS/CHS offers tamperproof field selectable candela options of 15, 75, 95, 115 and 150 candela. CHS horn offers a continuous or synchable temporal three in and mechanical tone. All tones are easy for the professional to in the field by using switches. The models are shipped from the in the temporal three alarm mode. CS Series has a very minimal operating current and has a minimum rate of 1Hz regardless of input voltage. Super-Slide Snap Cover Over Assembly Insert Locking Screw Slide Onto Bracket Instant Voltage Verification Locations access holes are provided in the back of the terminal block to the voltage to be measured directly without removing the Typically this would be done at the end of the line to confirm criteria. Most measurements will be taken using the S+ and locations although access is provided to other locations. NOTICE: SHOULD BE TAKEN TO NOT SHORT THE TEST PROBES. positions 1 and 2 in the down position to select isolated horn strobe power inputs. Switch 3 selects between temporal or non- tone. Up is temporal. Switch 4 selects between mechanical or frequency tone. Up is mechanical. Switch 5 selects between high low dBA. Up is high dBA. 2 OF 4 Series 24 Volt Ceiling Mount Selectable Strobe VDC VDC VDC VDC 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 VDC VDC VDC VDC 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 Designations: = Ceiling Mount = Red Faceplate = Strobe = White Faceplate = Horn/Strobe units are available in plain (no lettering). units are non-returnable. Product Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Series 24 Volt Ceiling Mount Selectable Horn/Strobe dBA @ ft. per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room @ 10 ft. VDC Volts) VDC Max1 cd cd cd mA 101 mA 167 mA mA 120 mA 200 mA cd mA mA cd mA mA cd mA mA Product Horn Decibel and Current Ratings (mA) dBA @ 10 ft. dBA @ 10 ft. ANSI/UL 464

LISTING No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] EH-24 horn and Models HS24-177 and HS-24 horn strobes. May be followed by -W and -W or -R (white or red) or -P plain or *LP low profile. Models CHS-24 horn/strobe ceiling mounted followed by -R (red), -W (white) or -P (plain). Refer to listee’s data sheet additional product description and operational considerations. VDC 15/75cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 110cd, 177cd. 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, 95cd 115cd (selectable) Wall: 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 110cd (selectable) accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as horn and horn/strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control For indoor use only. The audible in Models EH-24, HS24-177 and HS-24 may produce tones including: mechanical, 2400Hz and chime tones in continuous and temporal settings as well as a whoop tone in either a high or low dBA setting. *May be used when used with Model GOE or GOELP (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0569-124). CHS-24 may produce distinctive tones including mechanical and 2400Hz. Both are capable of continuous and temporal 3 settings. 07-08-19 gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CHS-24A, CHS-24B, CHS-24G and CHS-24R horn/strobe lights. Units employ a flash tube and electronic trigger circuit mounted on a printed wiring board with color Unit is intended for indoor or outdoor use when mounted on the wall only. When used either Model WPBB weatherproof enclosure or Model WPLPBB low profile enclosure must be employed. Unit is for private mode signaling use only. Refer listee’s data sheet for additional product description and operational considerations. – 33 VDC 30cd, 60cd, 75cd and 110cd Selectable accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as horn/strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Not for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Tamperproof field selectable candela settings of 15, 30, 60, 75, and 110 Lens colors available in amber, blue, green, and red Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Silence audible while visual appliance remains flashing (for use in accepted jusridictions) Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, and 2400Hz tone Switch for continuous or temporal 3 tone (not available on whoop) Tamperproof re-entrant grill Product includes a 5 year warranty CS/CHS Series Colored Lens Signals are wall mount, low profile and horn/strobes that offer dependable audible and visual for warning and emergency notification. Applications include communication, severe weather, emergency response and more. CS/CHS Series Colored Lens Signals are 24VDC units available lens colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The Series offers field selectable options of 15, 30, 60, 75, and 110 candela. have a minimal operating current and a minimum flash rate of regardless of input voltage. The strobes can be synced using a sync protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die-cast universal 4 bracket which incorporates the popular Super-Slide that allows the installer to easily pre-wire the system and test supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism that the signal to the bracket without showing any screws. The Lens Series also features the Checkmate – Instant Voltage Feature which allows the installer to check the voltage current draw, and match against the blue print. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0210 (CHS Series) 7135-0328:0209 (CS Series) Specifications Voltage Limitations Connections Weight 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 120 (0 – 49 Only H x 4.5 W x 2.5 D accept 18 – 12 AWG gang, double gang, or 4 backbox mount with AVBB lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Number Color dBA at 10 per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room dBA at 10 Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Number Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Color Max Strobe Current Ratings (24VDC Regulated) Gree, and Lens Lens unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. Bezels Number CS/CHS Series devices are plain (no wording). bezels can be ordered separately. Decibel and Current Ratings at 10 UL 464 at 10 UL 464 24VDC Operating at High (mA) Setting 3 2400Hz 3 Mechanical 3 Chime 2400Hz Mechanical Chime the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting minimum ANSI/UL 464 reverberant sound level required for public fire protection service. These settings are acceptable only for mode fire alarm us

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CS-24WA, CS-24WB, CS-24WG, and CS-24WR strobe lights. Units employ a flash tube and electronic trigger circuit mounted on a printed wiring board with a color All models are intended for indoor or outdoor use wall mounted only. When used either Model WPBB Weatherproof Enclosure or Model WPLPBB Low Profile Enclosure must be employed. Unit is for private mode signaling use only. Refer listee’s data sheet for additional product description and operational considerations. – 33 VDC 30cd, 60cd, 75cd and 110cd Selectable accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Not for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CLNGBB BACK BOX, AVB BACK BOX, BACK BOX, WPBB AND OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Use with Potter Electrical Signal Company Signaling Products Includes: – High impact plastic BACK BOX: ceiling mount strobes horn/strobes BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE CLNGBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH CS-24 AND CCS-24 SERIES, CEILING MOUNT box – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ steel screws – Metal washers AND HORN/STROBES DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR INTENDED FOR INDOOR USE ONLY CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED USE REINFORCEMENT WASHERS WHEN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO SURFACE OR MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES BACK BOX: wall mount horns, and horn/strobes Includes: – High impact plastic box – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ steel screws – Metal washers BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE AVBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH WALL MOUNT HORNS, STROBES AND DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR INTENDED FOR INDOOR USE ONLY CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED USE REINFORCEMENT WASHERS WHEN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO SURFACE OR MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES BACK BOX: FASPKR/SPKSTR Series and speaker/strobes Includes: – High impact plastic surface box – Rubber gasket – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ stainless steel BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE THE SPKRBB PROVIDES AN INGRESS PROTECTION RATING OF 54 (IP54). WHEN IP54 IS INTENDED, – Wall mount tabs – Metal washers FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET: GASKET AND HARDWARE INCLUDED WITH THE SPKRBB MUST BE USED ALL CONDUIT FITTINGS MUST MEET OR EXCEED IP54 RATINGS. PENDANT MOUNT AND WIRE MOLD INSTALLATIONS CANNOT BE SEALED AND ARE EXCLUDED FROM IP54 RATING. SPKRBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH CSPKSTR SERIES UNIVERSAL MOUNT SPEAKERS AND WALL MOUNT SPEAKER/STROBES. THE SPKRBB MAY BE USED WITH SPEAKERS AND CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER/STROBES FOR INDOOR INSTALLATIONS DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES and WPLPBB WEATHER RESISTANT ENCLOSURE: for CS-24/CHS-24 strobes, horn/strobes or EH-24 horns OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, RED BACK BOX OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, WHITE BACK BOX LOW PROFILE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, RED BACK BOX LOW PROFILE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, WHITE BACK BOX THE WPBB ENCLOSURE PROVIDES AN INGRESS PROTECTION RATING OF 54 (IP54) (WPLPBB ENCLOSURE IS NOT LISTED TO IP54). WHEN IP54 IS and WPLPBB Includes: – Clear high impact plastic lens – High impact plastic surface box – 8-32 x 1 1/2″ stainless steel screws – Rubber gaskets (WPLPBB ONLY) – Rubber O ring/gasket (WPBB ONLY) – Metal washers (WPBB ONLY) – Tabs (WPBB ONLY) THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET: GASKET AND HARDWARE INCLUDED WITH THE WPBB ENCLOSURE MUST BE USED ALL CONDUIT FITTINGS MUST MEET OR EXCEED IP54 RATINGS. INSERT GASKET(S) IN BETWEEN THE BOX AND MOUNTING BRACKET. THE SIGNAL (NOT SHOWN) SHALL BE INSERTED IN THE MOUNTING BRACKET TIGHTEN SCREWS UNTIL THE ENCLOSURE COVER FITS SNUGLY AGAINST THE BACK BOX. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN OR DAMAGE TO THE ENCLOSURE TO ATTACHING THE COVER WILL OCCUR PRODUCT DOES NOT MEET ANSI/UL 1971 LIGHT DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS. TO ALLOW FOR DRAINAGE, THE SEAL ON THE BOTTOM EDGE IS NOT WATER-TIGHT WPLPBB ONLY: BOX INCLUDES WEATHER SEAL FOR MOUNTING TO WALL. ON EXCEPTIONALLY ROUGH SURFACES (SUCH AS MASONRY) CAULKING OF THE WALL IS RECOMMENDED PRIOR TO MOUNTING UNIT TO WALL. SEE EH-24/HS-24-WP/HSLP-24-WP/S-24-WP/SLP-24-WP SERIES MANUAL (550-0593, MANUAL ISSUE DATE 2-1-13) FOR CAN/ULC S525 REQUIREMENT(S): SOUND CHARACTERISTICS, HORN CURRENT RATINGS AND HORN DECIBEL LEVELS AND CAN/ULC S526 REQUIREMENT(S): LIGHT PERCENTAGES. THE MANUAL CAN BE OBTAINED BY CALLING POTTER ELECTRIC AT 1-800-325-3936. TO BE WITH A BOX INCLUDED). GASKET OPENING BE AT BOTTOM OF BOX TO ALLOW FOR GASKET OPENING BE AT BOTTOM OF BOX TO ALLOW FOR WARRANTY a period of 60 months from the date of manufacture (or as long as required by applicable law), Potter Electrical Signal Company, LLC warrants to you the original purchaser that your appliance will be free from defects in and materials under normal use and service.

Features Fixed 75cd strobe Available in surface-mount (standard) and Low Profile (LP) WPBB/LP made of clear Lexan – provides maximum visibility reliability, allowing full 75cd output Lens colors available in amber, blue, green, and red Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Switch selection for high/low dBA Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, and 2400Hz tone Input terminals accept 18 to 12 AWG Switch for continuous or temporal 3 tone (not available on whoop) Tamperproof re-entrant grill 5 year warranty CS/CHS-WP Series Outdoor Colored Lens Signals are wall low profile strobes and horn/strobes that offer dependable and visual alarms for warning and emergency notification in locations. Applications include emergency communication, weather, emergency response and many more. CS/CHS-WP Series Outdoor Colored Lens Signals are 24VDC available in lens colors of amber, blue, green and red. The Series a fixed 75 candela strobe. They have a minimal operating current a minimum flash rate of 1Hz regardless of input voltage. The enclosure is made of clear Lexan which provides visibility and reliability for effective visible signaling, full 75cd output. The strobes can be synced using a Gentex protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die cast universal 4 bracket which incorporates the popular Super-Slide that allows the installer to easily pre-wire the system and test supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism that the signal to the bracket without showing any screws. The Lens Series also features the Checkmate – Instant Voltage Feature which allows the installer to check the voltage current draw, and match against the blue print. Version CS/CHS-WP Series devices are available in two different versions. standard version comes with a surface-mount back box (WPBB) install directly on a wall. The Low Profile (LP) versions come with low profile back box (WPLPBB) designed to be installed on a flush- electrical box. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0212 (CHS-WP Series) 7135-0328:0213 (CS-WP Series) Specifications Voltage 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 150 (-35 – 66 Version – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 3.25 D – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 4.18 Connections accept 18 – 12 AWG Weight Version Single gang, double gang, or square back box Version – Surface mount back box lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Series Outdoor Colored Lens Strobe, 75 Candela Number Color Models with LP include the LP version enclosure. Number

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CHS-24A, CHS-24B, CHS-24G and CHS-24R horn/strobe lights. Units employ a flash tube and electronic trigger circuit mounted on a printed wiring board with color Unit is intended for indoor use, or outdoor use when mounted on the wall only. When outdoors either Model WPBB weatherproof enclosure or Model WPLPBB low profile enclosure must be employed. Unit is for private mode signaling use only. Refer listee’s data sheet for additional product description and operational considerations. – 33 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as horn/strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Not for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CS-24WA, CS-24WB,, CS-24WG,, and CS-24WR, strobe lights. Units employ a flash tube and electronic trigger circuit mounted on a printed wiring board with a color All models are rated 75cd on-axis and are intended for indoor or outdoor use. When outdoors, either Model WPBB Weatherproof Enclosure or Model WPLPBB Low Profile Enclosure must be employed. Unit is for private mode signaling use only. Refer listee’s data sheet for additional product description and operational considerations. – 33 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Not for hearing impaired applications. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24 & S-24 SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP & SLP-24-WP SERIES CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CHS-24R & CS-24WR SERIES CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP & CSLP-24WR-WP SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT AND/OR AUDIBLE APPLIANCES CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGES 5 AND 6 INTRODUCTION Potter Electric models HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24, S-24, HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CS-24WR, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP are high quality audible and/or visible signaling appliances. The high intensity strobe utilizes Xenon flash tube that generates a high-intensity flash visible from all angles. This appliance is intended to provide a visible, audible or audible/visible, depending on the model, notification for the purpose of life safety and property protection. The HS-24, S-24, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR are provided with a slider which allows for candela selection at the installation site; the candela intensities which can be selected are 15Cd, 30Cd, 60Cd, 75Cd, or 110Cd. The HS24-177 and S24-177 are fixed units; the candela intensity which can be ordered is 177Cd. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, are fixed candela units, available in a 75 candela intensity only. This appliance is ideal for any occupancy that requires notification appliances per the applicable building or fire or wherever dependable alarms are required. HS24-177, S24-177, HS-24, S-24 strobe is listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1971, Signaling Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP strobe is listed in with ANSI/UL 1638, Visual Signaling Appliances – Private Mode Emergency and General Signaling. Additionally, colored lens models CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR comply with the polar dispersion requirements of ANSI/UL 1971. LOCATION appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this manual, the recommendation of the local authorities having jurisdiction, and other NFPA that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24, S-24, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR are intended for indoor installations only; this appliance is not listed for outdoor or drip proof applications. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP are intended for indoor or outdoor installations; this appliance is rated for outdoor or drip proof applications used in conjunction with the WPBB or WPLPBB Enclosure. mounted strobe and horn/strobe appliances shall have their entire lens at heights above the finished floor of not less than 80 in. (2m) and not greater than 96 in. (2.4m)**. Spacing shall be accordance with Table A. If a room configuration is not square, the room size that will entirely encompass the room or subdivide the room into multiple squares shall be used. Wall mounted only appliances shall have their tops above the finished floors at heights of not less than 90 in. (2.30m) and below the finished ceilings at heights of not less than 6 in. (152mm). Different heights shall be permitted by the AHJ provided the sound pressure level requirements of NFPA 72 are met. MOUNTING, ROUGH-IN BOX AND RUN WIRING unit is designed for mounting to most single gang boxes, 4″ square outlet boxes, 2-gang masonry boxes or non-metallic 2-gang switch boxes. Conduit entrance to boxes should be to insure sufficient wiring clearance. Run a minimum 18 gauge insulated 2 or more conductor cable. Mount a box

HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24 & S-24 SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP & SLP-24-WP SERIES CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CHS-24R & CS-24WR SERIES CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP & CSLP-24WR-WP SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT AND/OR AUDIBLE APPLIANCES CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGES 5 AND 6 INTRODUCTION Potter Electric models HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24, S-24, HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CS-24WR, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP are high quality audible and/or visible signaling appliances. The high intensity strobe utilizes Xenon flash tube that generates a high-intensity flash visible from all angles. This appliance is intended to provide a visible, audible or audible/visible, depending on the model, notification for the purpose of life safety and property protection. The HS-24, S-24, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR are provided with a slider which allows for candela selection at the installation site; the candela intensities which can be selected are 15Cd, 30Cd, 60Cd, 75Cd, or 110Cd. The HS24-177 and S24-177 are fixed units; the candela intensity which can be ordered is 177Cd. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, are fixed candela units, available in a 75 candela intensity only. This appliance is ideal for any occupancy that requires notification appliances per the applicable building or fire or wherever dependable alarms are required. HS24-177, S24-177, HS-24, S-24 strobe is listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1971, Signaling Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, SLP-24-WP, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CHS-24G, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CSLP-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP strobe is listed in with ANSI/UL 1638, Visual Signaling Appliances – Private Mode Emergency and General Signaling. Additionally, colored lens models CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR comply with the polar dispersion requirements of ANSI/UL 1971. LOCATION appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this manual, the recommendation of the local authorities having jurisdiction, and other NFPA that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The HS24-177, S24-177, EH-24, HS-24, S-24, CHS-24A, CS-24WA, CHS-24B, CS-24WB, CS-24WG, CHS-24R, CS-24WR are intended for indoor installations only; this appliance is not listed for outdoor or drip proof applications. The HS-24-WP, HSLP-24-WP, S-24-WP, CHS-24A-WP, CHSLP-24A-WP, CS-24WA-WP, CSLP-24WA-WP, CHS-24B-WP, CHSLP-24B-WP, CS-24WB-WP, CSLP-24WB-WP, CHS-24G-WP, CHSLP-24G-WP, CS-24WG-WP, CHS-24R-WP, CHSLP-24R-WP, CS-24WR-WP, CSLP-24WR-WP are intended for indoor or outdoor installations; this appliance is rated for outdoor or drip proof applications used in conjunction with the WPBB or WPLPBB Enclosure. mounted strobe and horn/strobe appliances shall have their entire lens at heights above the finished floor of not less than 80 in. (2m) and not greater than 96 in. (2.4m)**. Spacing shall be accordance with Table A. If a room configuration is not square, the room size that will entirely encompass the room or subdivide the room into multiple squares shall be used. Wall mounted only appliances shall have their tops above the finished floors at heights of not less than 90 in. (2.30m) and below the finished ceilings at heights of not less than 6 in. (152mm). Different heights shall be permitted by the AHJ provided the sound pressure level requirements of NFPA 72 are met. MOUNTING, ROUGH-IN BOX AND RUN WIRING unit is designed for mounting to most single gang boxes, 4″ square outlet boxes, 2-gang masonry boxes or non-metallic 2-gang switch boxes. Conduit entrance to boxes should be to insure sufficient wiring clearance. Run a minimum 18 gauge insulated 2 or more conductor cable. Mount a box

Features Compatible with conventional 2-wire smoke detectors IDC can be wired Class A or Class B Monitors presence of 24VDC Aux Power SLC Class A (Style 6,7) & Class B (Style4) Mounts in a standard 4 or double gang box Wiring terminals accessible when mounted in box All wiring terminals accept 22 to 14 AWG Product includes a 5 year warranty Number: 1430823 CIZM-4 is compatible with Potter PFC-6000 series and PFC- addressable re alarm control panels. The CIZM-4 is used to a zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors on an Device Circuit (IDC). CIZM-4 module uses one (1) address on an SLC Loop and a zone of 2 wire conventional smoke detectors. The module and supervises a 24VDC auxiliary power connection. The may be wired Class B (Style B) or Class A (Style D) which is by an on board jumper. The CIZM-4 employs one red LED indicate the modules status. In normal condition, the LED ashes the device is being polled by the control panel. When a device activated, the LED will light continuously and in case of an open the LED will turn off. Initiating Zone Module Speci cations Voltage SLC Standby Current Power Required Voltage Range of IDC Detector Standby Current IDC at 24 VDC Module Alarm Current of at 24 VDC Wiring Resistance of IDC Wiring Cpacitance of IDC Resistor Tempurature Range Humidity Range no. of Module Per Loop – 22.6V Options Weight to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% (non-condensing) units (106mm)L 4.17 1.14 (29mm) 4 Square or Gang Box lbs Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Tech Support: 866-956-0988 / Customer Service: 866-572-3005 www.pottersignal.com – REV D 7/14 PAGE 1 OF 3 the Address SLC device must be assigned an address prior to installation. The address is set using either the hand held device programmer or the addressing feature thePFC-6800 / PFC-8500 series control panels. connecting a device to the SLC loop, take the following precautions to prevent potential damage to the panel or device verify the following: Power to the device is removed Field wiring is correctly installed. Field wiring has no open or short circuits. Diagrams Class B Wiring Diagram Class A Wiring Diagram FACP or Previous Module Loop Next Module FACP or Previous Module Next Module FACP or Previous Module Loop Next Module FACP or Previous Module Next Module The resistance of external wiring shall be less that 100 capacitance of external wiring shall be less than 1 micro farads. Detector Initiating Zone Module No. CIZM-4 1/2W EOLR The resistance of external wiring shall be less than 100 capacitance of external wiring shall be less than 1 micro farads. Style D Detector Initiating Zone Module No. CIZM-4 PAGE 2 OF 3 Using Compatible Electrical Box 2-Wire Smoke Detectors No. Approval No. No. Approval No. No. Sensor remote annunciator remote annunciator

No text preview available.

CLNGBB BACK BOX, AVB BACK BOX, BACK BOX, WPBB AND OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Use with Potter Electrical Signal Company Signaling Products Includes: – High impact plastic BACK BOX: ceiling mount strobes horn/strobes BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE CLNGBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH CS-24 AND CCS-24 SERIES, CEILING MOUNT box – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ steel screws – Metal washers AND HORN/STROBES DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR INTENDED FOR INDOOR USE ONLY CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED USE REINFORCEMENT WASHERS WHEN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO SURFACE OR MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES BACK BOX: wall mount horns, and horn/strobes Includes: – High impact plastic box – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ steel screws – Metal washers BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE AVBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH WALL MOUNT HORNS, STROBES AND DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR INTENDED FOR INDOOR USE ONLY CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED USE REINFORCEMENT WASHERS WHEN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO SURFACE OR MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES BACK BOX: FASPKR/SPKSTR Series and speaker/strobes Includes: – High impact plastic surface box – Rubber gasket – 8-16 x 1 1/2″ stainless steel BACK BOX, RED BACK BOX, WHITE THE SPKRBB PROVIDES AN INGRESS PROTECTION RATING OF 54 (IP54). WHEN IP54 IS INTENDED, – Wall mount tabs – Metal washers FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET: GASKET AND HARDWARE INCLUDED WITH THE SPKRBB MUST BE USED ALL CONDUIT FITTINGS MUST MEET OR EXCEED IP54 RATINGS. PENDANT MOUNT AND WIRE MOLD INSTALLATIONS CANNOT BE SEALED AND ARE EXCLUDED FROM IP54 RATING. SPKRBB BACK BOX IS FOR USE WITH CSPKSTR SERIES UNIVERSAL MOUNT SPEAKERS AND WALL MOUNT SPEAKER/STROBES. THE SPKRBB MAY BE USED WITH SPEAKERS AND CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER/STROBES FOR INDOOR INSTALLATIONS DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN SCREWS OR DAMAGE TO BACK BOX WILL OCCUR AVAILABLE IN RED AND OFF-WHITE COLOR CONDUIT AND SURFACE RACEWAY KNOCKOUTS INCLUDED UNIVERSAL MOUNTING TO MOST ELECTRICAL BOXES and WPLPBB WEATHER RESISTANT ENCLOSURE: for CS-24/CHS-24 strobes, horn/strobes or EH-24 horns OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, RED BACK BOX OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, WHITE BACK BOX LOW PROFILE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, RED BACK BOX LOW PROFILE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE, WHITE BACK BOX THE WPBB ENCLOSURE PROVIDES AN INGRESS PROTECTION RATING OF 54 (IP54) (WPLPBB ENCLOSURE IS NOT LISTED TO IP54). WHEN IP54 IS and WPLPBB Includes: – Clear high impact plastic lens – High impact plastic surface box – 8-32 x 1 1/2″ stainless steel screws – Rubber gaskets (WPLPBB ONLY) – Rubber O ring/gasket (WPBB ONLY) – Metal washers (WPBB ONLY) – Tabs (WPBB ONLY) THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET: GASKET AND HARDWARE INCLUDED WITH THE WPBB ENCLOSURE MUST BE USED ALL CONDUIT FITTINGS MUST MEET OR EXCEED IP54 RATINGS. INSERT GASKET(S) IN BETWEEN THE BOX AND MOUNTING BRACKET. THE SIGNAL (NOT SHOWN) SHALL BE INSERTED IN THE MOUNTING BRACKET TIGHTEN SCREWS UNTIL THE ENCLOSURE COVER FITS SNUGLY AGAINST THE BACK BOX. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN OR DAMAGE TO THE ENCLOSURE TO ATTACHING THE COVER WILL OCCUR PRODUCT DOES NOT MEET ANSI/UL 1971 LIGHT DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS. TO ALLOW FOR DRAINAGE, THE SEAL ON THE BOTTOM EDGE IS NOT WATER-TIGHT WPLPBB ONLY: BOX INCLUDES WEATHER SEAL FOR MOUNTING TO WALL. ON EXCEPTIONALLY ROUGH SURFACES (SUCH AS MASONRY) CAULKING OF THE WALL IS RECOMMENDED PRIOR TO MOUNTING UNIT TO WALL. SEE EH-24/HS-24-WP/HSLP-24-WP/S-24-WP/SLP-24-WP SERIES MANUAL (550-0593, MANUAL ISSUE DATE 2-1-13) FOR CAN/ULC S525 REQUIREMENT(S): SOUND CHARACTERISTICS, HORN CURRENT RATINGS AND HORN DECIBEL LEVELS AND CAN/ULC S526 REQUIREMENT(S): LIGHT PERCENTAGES. THE MANUAL CAN BE OBTAINED BY CALLING POTTER ELECTRIC AT 1-800-325-3936. TO BE WITH A BOX INCLUDED). GASKET OPENING BE AT BOTTOM OF BOX TO ALLOW FOR GASKET OPENING BE AT BOTTOM OF BOX TO ALLOW FOR WARRANTY a period of 60 months from the date of manufacture (or as long as required by applicable law), Potter Electrical Signal Company, LLC warrants to you the original purchaser that your appliance will be free from defects in and materials under normal use and service.

The CM-4/CM-4L is a high quality electronic low profile door chime that can be used as a stand-alone chime when activated with a push button. can also be integrated with our complete line of people counters such as EBP-407C and EWP-202C. CM-4 is a chime only and the CM-4L is a chime with LED light. The CM-4L is specially designed for the hearing impaired, and can be in noisy and restricted areas where only the light signal is effective. Both can be powered with 12V DC or 12V AC supply. inches (mm) SERIES CHIMES Fully integrated electronic chime with volume control 2 selectable chime sounds for entry/exit Selectable high/low open collector triggers output that can be utilitzed for external cicuit Low power consumption Screw terminal for easy wiring Operated with 12V DC or 12V AC Stand-alone sytem or can be integrated with People Counter Series EBP-407C and EWP-202C Super bright (LED) light built-in (CM-4L Only) Entry = flashing light Exit = steady light Number – 4060002 CM-4 4060004 CM-4L Voltage (AC/DC) Sound Output Current Current Terminals Signal (JP1) Source Temperature dB (-) (+) HIGH LOW bright – 122 – 50 CM-4 Kit and CM-4L Kit includes transformer, power cord, button, installation wires, and hardware for complete installation. Brand Chime Chime/LED (89) (35) knock-out Diagram dia (3) +V OC IC +12V EXITENT SEL LEVELS HIGH Button AES-1 20VA Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850055 – REV B 1 OF 2 Brand Strip Negative terminal (connect the power supply negative lead here) Positive terminal (connect the power supply positive lead here) Generates a DONG sound when triggered with a positive or negative signal and Generates a sound when triggered with a positive or negative signal and flashes flashes four times. steady (3 sec.) SERIES CHIMES +V OC IC +12V EXIT ENT. SEL. LEVELS HIGH Chime Selector jumper changes the tone of the chime from high frequency to low frequency High frequency (DING DONG) Low frequency (DING DONG) factory setting The change of frequency will not affect the sound when the OC/EXIT terminal is triggered. Trip Levels jumper changes the signal for triggering the chime A high or positive signal is required to trigger the chime A low or negative signal is required to trigger the chime (factory setting) A steady, uninterrupted signal to either trigger terminal will create a constant sound. to Amseco People Counters GND DA 12V DIRECTION OUTPUT SENSITIVITY +V OC IC Entry 10S 60S Entry – min. – max. +V OC IC +12V EXIT ENT. SEL. LEVELS HIGH BUTTON BUTTON GND DA 10S 60S – min. – max. 12V REVERSE +V OC IC +12V EXIT ENT.

A Brand HORN Meets or exceeds NFPA/ANSI Standards UL Listed for wall mounting Screw terminal capacity up to AWG #12 Universal mounting plate included Horn eld selectable tones: Hz or 2400 Hz or Non-temporal or low dBA output Mounts to 4 square, single gang, double gang, or octagonal back box Synchronization requires Sync Module (SMD10-3A) Available in red or white housing Select-A-Chime Series is designed to provide audible (private mode) for re alarm protection systems. It meets or exceeds NFPA/ audible emergency evacuation signal and UL 464 (private mode). CM24W provides a continuous tone or temporal pattern (code 3) tone when constant voltage from a FACP is applied. Each tone has two level settings (high or low) that can be achieved with the use of mini-jumpers located on the back of the unit. The CM24W Series can be either independently or in unison. These appliances are polarized for connecting to supervised re alarm circuits. CM24W can by synchronized by using the SMD10-3A Sync Module. Information Number Housing Voltage Sound DC/FWR DC FWR 32 – 120 – 49 Speci cations audible alarm indicating appliance shall be Amseco Model CM24W or equivalent device. The chime shall be listed under UL 464 standard audible signaling appliance and shall be approved for re protective service. The sound output shall be eld selectable. The chime shall two different eld selectable temporal or steady tones, and a high and low eld selectable sound output setting. The signaling chime operate on 24V DC from a non-coded, regulated DC supply or full-wave recti ed, un ltered supply. The chime shall have a universal mounting plate, capable of wall mounting to a back box. When strobe synchronization is required, the chime shall be compatible with Amseco SMD10-3A (daisy chain) or other source of Amseco sync protocol. Signaling devices shall be installed in accordance with current guidelines. RMS Operating Current (mA) Sound Output at 10 ft per UL 464) 24V FWR 24V DC Only Current Table Hz Hz 2700 Hz Hz Pattern Tone PC1: Volume Regulated 24V DC Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850024 – REV A 5/06 1 OF 2 HORN Brand inches (mm) (127) (85.7) View View View (127) Diagram 1 2 Diagram for Audible Strobe Class Circuit without Audible Silence Feature to Fig. 1 Next or Circuit MODULE SMD10-3A H 3 Diagram for Audible Strobe Class Circuit with Audible Silence Feature (CM24W) Signal Signal MODULE SMD10-3A to Fig. 1 H Next or 1 Options Mounting Plate Gang Box Square Back Box Gang Box Selection Hz Hz Next or

CO 12/24 MONOXIDE CO DETECTOR UL listed to Standard 2075 12 or 24 VDC power input Low current draw 85dB at 10 sounder Form C alarm and trouble relay Self-testing device 6 year warranty Wall or ceiling mount Operating temperature range: 40 – 100 (4.4 – 37.8 15% – 95% RH 14-22 AWG terminal size Contact rating: 0.1A – 30VDC non-latching Specifications Carbon Monoxide detector shall be a system detector and shall be Potter CO 12/24. The detector shall have an operating range of 10-28 The normal stand-by current draw shall not exceed 100 micro- The wiring terminals shall accept wire from 22 to 14 AWG. The shall have a form C Alarm and Trouble relay rated at .1 amps 30 VDC for monitoring. detector shall be listed for wall or ceiling mount. The detector shall a LED that flashes to indicate a normal condition. The CO detector be UL listed to standard 2075. The detector shall have a button to a local silence of the sounder. The sounder shall resound within minutes if an unsafe level of CO is still detected. The sensor shall be for tampering as well as internal faults. Detectors that do not the sensor shall not be acceptable. is powered Signals Red LED flashes every 30 seconds indicating that the alarm Flashing red LED and pulsating horn Red LED flashes twice and horn “beeps” once every One chirp, then red LED flashes 4-5 times followed by 2 alarm signals 30 seconds Monoxide (CO) is a toxic odorless, tasteless, colorless gas that is whenever organic compounds are involved in combustion. Many utilize either propane, natural gas or wood for heat and cooking and the burning of these fuels produce CO. A malfunctioning or flue will fill a space with this toxic gas completely unknown the occupants. Potter CO 12/24 utilizes the premium Carbon Monoxide (CO) technology for accurate detection and false alarm immunity. CO 12/24 will only respond to the presence of CO and will not react other ordinary household chemicals that affect other detectors. When CO is detected, an 85 decibel sounder and the alarm relay activate indicate the presence of CO. The sounder can be silenced for four (4) by pushing the Reset button. CO 12/24 operates on 0-28 VDC supplied by an intrusion or fire The device emits a Temporal 4 pattern when the presence of is detected. In addition to monitoring for tampering, the detector monitors the sensor and detects if an internal problem exists. If a occurs within the detector, the trouble/service a horn activates and trouble relay. This monitoring feature also complies with the sensor requirement. The CO 12/24 has a 6 year warranty and life After 6 years, the detector needs to be replaced. Response Times Levels parts per million parts per million parts per million parts per million Time response for 30 days 60 to 240 minutes 10 to 50 minutes 4 to 15 minutes Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8910250 – REV C 1 OF 1

Features Full compliance with UL 2075 & ULC CSa 6. 19-01 Code required trouble relay Wiring supervision with SeMS terminals 12/24 VDC Current draw of 20ma in standby and 40ma in alarm Versatile mounting for wall and ceiling electrochemical sensing technology RealTest enables a functional test using canned CO 10-year end-of-life timer Tested up to 12,000 ft above sea level dangerous amounts of CO are detected, the System CO1224 Series CO detectors alert residents central station monitoring, residents are guaranteed whether they are away from home, sleeping, already suffering from the effects of CO. The CO1224 detectors are designed for system operation. These are fully listed to UL 2075 (US models only) and 6.19-01 (Canada model only) and offer a code-required relay to send a sensor failure or end-of-life signal to control panel and the central station. The CO1224 Series also use SeMS-type terminal philips head screws quicker and more positive wiring connections and code- wiring supervision. With a low current draw, these enable more devices to be connected to the panel, the need to purchase extra power supplies or more panels. as 12/24 VDC detectors, the CO1224 detectors will operate on most industry security and gas sensing cell used in the CO1224 Series CO detectors be tested using a CO gas agent, fully meeting the of NFpa 720: 2009 (US models only). Simply the detector into RealTest mode, spray a small amount CO into the detector per the installation instructions, and seconds the detector will alarm, indicating successful entry. Specifications Voltage Signal dB in alarm Current Current Contact Ratings Contact Ratings ma ma (75 ma test) a @ 30 VDC a @ 30 VDC x 3.3 x 1.3 (L x W x H) Weight oz Temperature Range – 40 C (32 – 104 Humidity Range – 90% RH Terminals – 22 aWg backbox; surface to wall or ceiling page 1 OF 2 monoxide (CO) detector shall be a system-connected Sensor model number CO1224T or CO1224TR listed Underwriters Laboratories UL 2075 for gas and Vapor and Sensors. The Canadian model CO1224a, is listed to CSa 6.19-01, for residential carbon monoxide devices. The detector shall be equipped with a sounder a trouble relay. The detector base shall be able to mount a single-gang electrical box or direct (surface) mount to wall or ceiling. Wiring connections shall be made by of SeMS screws. The detector shall provide dual-color indication that blinks to indicate normal standby, alarm, end-of-life. When the sensor supervision is in a trouble the detector shall send a trouble signal to the panel. the detector gives a trouble or end-of-life signal, the shall be replaced. The detector shall provide a means test CO gas entry into the CO sensing cell. The detector provide this with a test mode that accepts CO gas from a agent and alarms immediately upon sensing CO entry. For CO1224T only, the detector shall perform in the detection CO up to 12,000 feet above sea level and alarm within Recognized Test Laboratory. Mode Modes LeD LeD 1 minute in 4 pattern in 4 pattern Feature: the Test/Hush button will silence sounder for 5 minutes. Feature: When the detector is in a trouble it will send a trouble signal to panel. Timer: after the sensor inside the detector reached the end of its useful life, a signal will be sent to the panel. will indicate that it is time to the detector. an electrochemical monoxide detector lifespan is ten years, and the detector be replaced by the date marked on inside of the product

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS 1 of 1 Sensor, Unincorporated Div of Honeywell Int’l Inc.3825 Ohio Ave, St. Charles, IL Lisa Brant (203) 484-6105 Fax (203) 484-7309 [email protected] CO1224, CO1224T, and CO1224TR Carbon Monoxide detectors. Refer to listee’s sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes, NFPA 720, and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, Model number, electrical rating and UL label. as Carbon Monoxide detectors for use with separately listed fire alarm control units. Monoxide detectors are not intended/suitable for fire and smoke detection. No. bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

firealarmresources.com

No text preview available.

CoilKeeper Coil Supervisory Switch CoilKeeper coil supervisory switch is designed to monitor the that operates the releasing solenoid used in preaction and systems and to indicate if the coil is not properly installed on the # Requirements NFPA 13-2019 requirement for Actuator Supervision (8.3.1.2.1). Coil Supervisory Switch: 1010500 Listed, CE Actuator Supervision. Effective January 1, 2021, of an electric actuator from the preaction or deluge that it controls shall result in an audible and visual of system impairment at the system releasing panel.1 Questions Does the CoilKeeper work with any releasing solenoid? CoilKeeper has been tested by UL to be compatible with most solenoids. See document 5401607 for the complete of compatible solenoids. Can the CoilKeeper connect to any fire panel or releasing panel? Yes. There is no panel compatibility listing requirement. more information, visit: NFPA 13, for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2019 edition, 2018, National Fire Protection Association not included Provides confirmation of coil/actuator placement Provides visual indication of coil/actuator status Detects open or shorted coils Detects coils/actuators not installed on solenoid Mounts locally on solenoid or remotely Information # Supervisory Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: (314) 595-6900 www.pottersignal.com

No text preview available.

Features Coil monitoring on preaction/deluge system solenoids Ability to show coil state through simple LEDs Detects open and shorted coils Can be mounted at the solenoid or remotely Provides visual indication of coil and the releasing circuit status document contains important information on the installation operation of the Coil Supervisory Switch. Please read all carefully and notify the building owner or their representative before any work is done on the fire or fire alarm system. A copy of this document is by NFPA 72 to be maintained on site. CoilKeeper Supervisory Switch (CSS) is designed to supervise the of a coil on a solenoid for a preaction/deluge system as required NFPA 13. The unit monitors the coil electronically and determines if coil is installed on the valve stem. If a technician removes the coil the stem the CoilKeeper will activate a normally open set of dry that can be wired to a supervisory circuit of the releasing control LEDs at the CoilKeeper shows when the coil is in a normal state the valve body, when the coil is removed from the valve body in maintenance state, when the releasing circuit is energized and if the is open or shorted. The releasing circuit energized LED allows the to locally see the state of the circuit, preventing accidental by re-installing an energized coil. must be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with all national and local codes and ordinances. hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Serious injury or death could result. all instructions carefully and understand them before starting installation. Save instructions for future use. Failure to read and understand instructions could result in improper operation of device resulting in serious injury or death. of explosion. Not for use in hazardous locations. Serious injury or death could result. Pending Specifications Entrances Ratings Limitations NEMA type 2 for indoor dry use conduit connections provided (3 total) at 30 VDC Resistive W x 4.00 H x 1.90 D and impact resistant polycarbonate Requirements Weight Valves Range Range VDC, 20 mA max standby, 40 mA max alarm (20 mA power, 20 mA releasing circuit) lbs use with 24V solenoid valves UL listed for releasing 9-11 watts F to 120 (0 to 49 AWG subject to change without notice. PAGE 1 OF 6 Return Clamp Installation Figure 2) Position the return clamp around the wrenching flats of the Mounting location should have parallel flat edges. With the valve centered in the bracket, adjust the set screw it is touching the valve. For larger valves, the locknut can be moved to the of the U bracket for more clearance. Tighten the locknut to prevent the set screw from moving. Adjust the lock screw until the bracket is securely connected to valve. Attach the blue sense return wire to the set screw using the ring terminal washer and nut. On Valve Mounting 1 feed wire feed bracket collar tight grip return wire return clamp Return Clamp 2 1/2 solenoid not included Valve Body Valve Installation Feed Bracket (see Figure 1) Wire Valves: The sense feed bracket is not required on 3 wire Wire Valves: conduit nut onto supplied 1/2 pipe nipple or other 1/2 as needed. sense feed bracket onto nipple with screw facing coil. Thread nipple into solenoid valve and tighten conduit nut. Check that there is continuity between the solenoid coil collar sense feed bracket. Attach yellow sense feed wire using provided ring terminal and to the sense feed bracket. CoilKeeper on valve using supplied 1/2 pipe nipple and as shown in Figure 1 or other 1/2 nipple as needed. CoilKeeper can be mounted using any of the 3 conduit and rotated to ensure clearance of trim piping. Install tight cord grip into CoilKeeper housing. Do not tighten ou

NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH ADDRESSABLE RELEASING MODULES following is a list of third party solenoid valves that have been factory approved for use the Potter CoilKeeper Supervisory Switch (CSS) Number conduit entrance, connect sense feed wire screw inside housing on base Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com PAGE 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

Nitrogen Supervisory Gas for Controlling Ice Plugs in Cold Storage Applications Josh Tihen, ChE, Corrosion Product Manager Storage applications have distinct problems that require designers to provide alternative designs freezing conditions. The most common and largest concern is the development of ice plugs. Ice are blockages in the piping network caused by trapped water and the addition of condensation an air compressor. Ice plugs in sprinkler systems can restrict or completely block the flow of to a sprinkler. In some cases, ice plugs can also damage the pipe and cause leaks. the use of a regenerative desiccant dryer has been used to combat the addition of FM Global recommends the dew point of the air be 20 below the temperature of the A normal desiccant dryer provides a dew point of -40 to achieve this requirement. While dryers are effective, there are some drawbacks to the technology. use of a nitrogen generator for controlling ice plugs provides many additional benefits over a dryer. The nitrogen produced by a nitrogen generator has a much lower dew point of -70 easily the FM requirements. The nitrogen generator offers the benefit of corrosion controller by eliminating the majority of oxygen and extending the life of the fire sprinkler system on average by 5.3 times that of air compressor. A dryer does not offer this corrosion resistance. The nitrogen generator has less maintenance. For desiccant dryers, not only do the coalescing need to be changed annually, but the desiccant needs to be changed every 3 years. This cost thousands of dollars and is time consuming. The nitrogen membrane, on the other has an expected life of up to 20 years. A single desiccant dryer is not recommended to feed more than 3 sprinkler systems; a nitrogen system does not have this limitation. A desiccant dryer requires the contractor to open the inspection port and allow the system run for 24 hours to remove the wet air. The purge process on a nitrogen generator can be automatic. The Potter IntelliPurge purging device constantly monitors the purity of the nitrogen gas, that ice plugs are not forming. It can even send an alert if the purity drops. summary, the use of a nitrogen generator to prevent ice plugs in freezer applications offers benefits over the traditional use of a desiccant dryer. Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com PAGE 1 OF 1

The following is a list of compatible releasing devices for release capable Potter panels: 24 VDC Devices, only one device per circuit unless stated otherwise) Series (IPA-60, IPA-100, IPA-4000) PFC-6500R ARC-100 Private labeled panels JFS-IP60, JFS-IP127, JFS-IP4000 AFC Series (AFC-50, AFC-100, AFC-1000) Laboratories Series (AFC-50, AFC-100, AFC-1000) Parker 73212BN4TNLVN0C322C2 Parker 73218BN4UNLVN0C111C2 Parker 7321GBN99NLVN0C322C2 Victaulic 753-E Series Viking 11591, 11601, 11602, 13843 and 13844 IPA Series (IPA-60, IPA-100, IPA-4000), ARC-100, Private labeled panels JFS-IP60, JFS-IP-4000 FM200 Electric Valve Actuator 18481 Minimax MX1230 and MX200 with Minimax 887667 and 889323 actuators Viking – VSN200, VSN1230, VSH200, and VSH1230 with 887667 and 889323 actuators Nohmi – Koatsu R85M14, R85M10-N Parker 73212BN4TNLVN0C322C2 Parker 73218BN4UNLVN0C111C2 Parker 7321GBN99NLVN0C322C2 TLX – PA0036, PA0337 Victaulic 753-E Series Viking 11591, 11601, 11602, 13843 and 13844 Fireaway Stat-X Models 30E, 60E, 100E, 250E, 500E, 1000E, 1500E, and 2500E Models G30, G60, G100, G250, G500, G1000, G1500, and G2500 of 10 per circuit) Mutual (IPA Series/ARC-100 only) 4 Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 800-325-3936 www.pottersignal.com PAGE 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

CPRTK AND TeST KIT Pipe Systems: Use Model CPrtK-4 older-style ceiling mount, not riser Mount (rM) style.) Turn Verify that the 1/2″ drain valve is in the closed position. remove 1/2″ drain plug. relieve system pressure from the coupon rack by opening the valve slowly. Do not drain the coupon rack completely at time. Use a container or bucket to catch the escaping water. NOTe: the water in the coupon rack will be pressurized to the pressure. After the system pressure has been relieved, the drain valve. Fill the 120cc bottle by opening the drain valve slowly. Close the drain valve. Securely affix the cap to the bottle by making sure the cap screws tightly. tape cap to bottle. drain the remaining water from the coupon rack through the 1/2″ valve into a container. Close the 1/2″ drain valve. re-install 1/2″ plug into drain valve. Locate the plastic document holder (should be attached to the station). Locate the completed coupon insertion envelope that corresponds with Outlet #1. remove the coupon holder from Outlet #1. Use a screwdriver loosen the plastic screw and nut. (See Fig. 1) remove the from the coupon holder and place the coupon into the original coupon envelope. repeat this process on #5. (See Fig. 3) DO NOT HANDLe COUPONS OR PRObeS WITH bARe connected to the corrosion monitoring probe. remove the switches from the corrosion monitoring probes on outlet and #6 (See Fig. 3). if a union was used between the pressure and the corrosion monitoring probe you will not have to the wiring to the pressure switch. remove corrosion probes from outlet #3 and #6 and discard. remove the corrosion monitoring probe from the sealed using the latex gloves provided. Carefully remove the threads and install the new probe in the same outlet the old was removed from. remove the new corresponding coupon from the new coupon do nOt discard the envelope. steel locations are for C1010 coupons. locations are for CdA 360 coupons. CPrtK-4 kit shown number – 0090177 (For dry Pipe and all riser (rM) Styles) number – 0090178 (For older-style ceiling-mount, riser Mount (rM) Styles) read and follow the instructions and procedures provided this and referenced documents. Failure to do so will inhibit the to provide accurate and complete test results. not handle the coupons or probes with your bare hands. Use the gloves provided. CPrtK contains necessary components to remove, replace, and for analysis, the test coupons and water sample from a Potter Monitoring Station. for CPrtK-2) Kit Includes: two C1010 Mild Steel Corrosion Coupons two Corrosion Monitoring Probes (One for CPrtK-2) Two Corrosion 120cc One Required: Pipe holders and probes. Container Phillips holders. Teflon in U.S.A. electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com #5401176 – reV g 1 OF 4 Assemble the coupon on the coupon holder as shown in Fig. 1. holder. shown on the monitoring station label. repeat steps 1

Features Suitable for in-duct applications 360 view of detector status LeD Low 2 Highly Low One Automatic Magnetic Specifications fpm page 1 OF 2 Electric Signal CPS-24 photoelectric smoke detectors. The detector head and twist-lock base shall be UL listed smoke detector shall have one flashing status LED for visual sensitivity of the detector shall be capable of being measured. sensitivity of the detector shall be monitored automatically and To facilitate installation, the detector shall be non-polarized. Sensitivity Test Feature Potter CPS-24 Photoelectric Smoke Detector has a built-in

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CPS-24 and CPS-24N photoelectric smoke detector. Detectors are for use with listed Hochiki bases. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description operational considerations Vdc accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, rating and UL label. as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with separately listed fire alarm control units Hochiki bases. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features 360 view of detector status LED Low 2 Highly Low One Automatic Without Specifications PAGE 1 OF 2 Electric Signal CPS-24N photoelectric smoke detectors. The detector head and twist-lock base shall be UL listed base shall permit direct interchange with Potter CPS-24VN CPS-24N may be used in conjunction with, or as a replacement smoke detector shall have one flashing status LED for visual Green. When the detector is outside the UL listed sensitivity the LED will flash Red. When the detector is actuated, the sensitivity of the detector shall be capable of being measured. sensitivity of the detector shall be monitored automatically and To facilitate installation, the detector shall be non-polarized. Sensitivity Test Feature Potter CPS-24N Photoelectric Smoke Detector has a built-in

CRTK REPLACEMENT TEST KIT Pipe Systems: Use CrtK-4 older-style ceiling mount monitoring station, not riser (rM) version.) the two 1″ ball valves (PCMS) or butterfly valve to the closed position to isolate the coupon from the fire sprinkler system. that the 1/2″ drain valve is closed. remove the 1/2″ plug. system pressure from the coupon rack by opening drain valve slowly. Do not drain the coupon rack at this time. Use a container or bucket to catch escaping water. the water in the coupon rack will be pressurized the system pressure. After the system pressure has been close the drain valve. the 120cc bottle by opening the drain valve slowly. the 1/2″ drain valve. affix on tightly. tape cap to bottle. the remaining water from the coupon rack through 1/2″ drain valve into a container. Close the 1/2″ drain re-install 1/2″ plug into drain valve. the plastic document holder (attached to the Locate the completed coupon insertion sheet and original coupon envelopes. Find coupon envelope that corresponds to Outlet #1. the coupon holder from Outlet #1. Use a to loosen the plastic screw and nut. (See 1) remove the coupon from the coupon holder and the coupon into the corresponding original coupon repeat this process on outlets #4,#5, and #8. Fig. 2) the cap to the bottle by making sure the cap DO NOT HANDLE COUPONS WITH BARE HANDS the new corresponding coupon from the new envelope. do nOt discard the envelope. steel locations are for C1010 coupons. locations are for CdA 360 coupons. the serial numbers on the envelope and coupon the coupon on the coupon holder as shown in 1. Teflon tape to the 1 threaded bushing threads on coupon holder. and tighten the assembled coupon holder into the location shown on the monitoring station label. steps 9-13 for the remaining coupon holders (see 2-4). (dry) Stock number – 0090173 (Wet) Stock number – 0090174 (Pictured) Carefully read and follow the instructions procedures provided in this and referenced documents. to do so will inhibit our ability to provide accurate complete test results. Use the latex gloves provided. Do not handle the coupons with your bare CrtK contains the necessary components to remove, and forward for analysis, the test coupons and water from a Potter Corrosion Monitoring Station. Kit Includes: Two C1010 Mild Steel Corrosion Coupons (One for Two CDA360 Brass Corrosion Coupons (One for Corrosion Coupon Insertion Instructions #5401142 Corrosion Coupon Insertion Confirmation Sheet #5401141 120cc Bottle with Cap (Used for Wet Pipe Systems Only) One Pair of Latex Gloves Required: Pipe wrench or 14″ adjustable wrench to remove and Coupon Holders. Container used to drain water from the isolated coupon rack. Phillips head screwdriver to remove and re-install coupons the coupon holders. Teflon tape electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com in U.S.A. #5401156 – reV F 1 OF 4 the instructions provided on the coupon insertion sheet #5401141. that the isolation valves are in the open position the corrosion monitoring station is free of any the coupons and the coupon insertion sheet in the bottom of the original shipping container. the water sample bottle in the top of the original container. Ship the container next day air service the address on the enclosed shipping label. Pipe Systems with Riser Mount (RM) Version: CrtK-2 the 1 coupon rack isolation valve to the closed to isolate the coupon rack from the sprinkler that the 1/2″ drain valve is closed and remove the drain plug. system pressure from the coupon rack by opening drain valve slowly. Do not drain the coupon rack at this time. Us

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] CS-24 strobe light; followed by W or R (white or red color) and P (plain). For indoor on wall or ceiling mount. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product and operational considerations. 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, 95cd and 115cd VDC Rate: 60 flashes per minute accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical and candela ratings and UL label. as strobe lights suitable for the hearing impaired for use with separately listed fire alarm control units. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Nominal voltage 24 VDC field selectable candela options 15, 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 Bracket – Ease of Supervision Testing – Instant Voltage Verification strobe and/or horn with Gentex AVSM Control entire system, install mounting bracket, then install Documented lower installation and operating costs Terminals 12 to 18 AWG Selection for High or Low dBA Selection for 2400Hz or mechanical Tone Selection for Continuous or Temporal 3 re-entrant grill mount with the CLNGBB (Ceiling Surface Mount Back audible while visual appliance will remain flashing (for in accepted jurisdictions) available in red or off-white Temperature: to 120 (0 to 49 The CS Series is not listed for use. Dimensions (15.24 cm) x 2.6″ (6.604 cm) Ceiling Mount Series comes standard with the 4″ mounting plate incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature that allows the to easily test for supervision. The product also features a mechanism which secures the product to the bracket without screws showing. CS/CHS also features the patented Checkmate – Instant Voltage feature which allows the installer to check the voltage drop without removing the signal. CS Series appliances are ANSI/UL 464 and ANSI/UL 1971 listed use with fire protective systems. 1 OF 4 includes a 5 year warranty Potter CS/CHS Series is a ceiling mount strobe or horn/strobe that offers dependable audible and visual alarms and the current consumption. CS/CHS offers tamperproof field selectable candela options of 15, 75, 95, 115 and 150 candela. CHS horn offers a continuous or synchable temporal three in and mechanical tone. All tones are easy for the professional to in the field by using switches. The models are shipped from the in the temporal three alarm mode. CS Series has a very minimal operating current and has a minimum rate of 1Hz regardless of input voltage. Super-Slide Snap Cover Over Assembly Insert Locking Screw Slide Onto Bracket Instant Voltage Verification Locations access holes are provided in the back of the terminal block to the voltage to be measured directly without removing the Typically this would be done at the end of the line to confirm criteria. Most measurements will be taken using the S+ and locations although access is provided to other locations. NOTICE: SHOULD BE TAKEN TO NOT SHORT THE TEST PROBES. positions 1 and 2 in the down position to select isolated horn strobe power inputs. Switch 3 selects between temporal or non- tone. Up is temporal. Switch 4 selects between mechanical or frequency tone. Up is mechanical. Switch 5 selects between high low dBA. Up is high dBA. 2 OF 4 Series 24 Volt Ceiling Mount Selectable Strobe VDC VDC VDC VDC 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 VDC VDC VDC VDC 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 30, 75, 95, 115, 150 Designations: = Ceiling Mount = Red Faceplate = Strobe = White Faceplate = Horn/Strobe units are available in plain (no lettering). units are non-returnable. Product Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Series 24 Volt Ceiling Mount Selectable Horn/Strobe dBA @ ft. per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room @ 10 ft. VDC Volts) VDC Max1 cd cd cd mA 101 mA 167 mA mA 120 mA 200 mA cd mA mA cd mA mA cd mA mA Product Horn Decibel and Current Ratings (mA) dBA @ 10 ft. dBA @ 10 ft. ANSI/UL 464

CS-24 & CHS-24 SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT CCHS-24A, CCS-24B, CCHS-24B, CCHS-24G CCS-24R, & CCHS-24R SERIES & CAN/ULC COMPLIANT CANDELA CEILING STROBE AND HORN/STROBE CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGE 4 INTRODUCTION Potter Electric Model CS-24, CHS-24, CCS-24A, CCHS-24A, CCS-24B, CCHS-24B, CCS-24G, CCHS-24G, CCS-24R, CCHS-24R strobe and horn/strobe, is a high quality visible or signaling appliance intended for ceiling applications. The high intensity strobe utilizes a Xenon flash tube that generates a high-intensity flash visible from all angles. This appliance intended to provide a visible or audible/visible, depending on the model, notification signal for the purpose of life safety and property protection. This appliance is ideal for any occupancy that notification appliances per the applicable building or fire code or wherever dependable alarms are required. The CS-24 and CHS-24 strobe is listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1971, Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. The CCS-24A, CCHS-24A, CCS-24B, CCHS-24B, CCS-24G, CCHS-24G, CCS-24R, CCHS-24R strobe is listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1638, Signaling Appliances – Private Mode Emergency and General Signaling. LOCATION appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this manual, the recommendation of the local authorities having jurisdiction, and other NFPA that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The CS-24, CHS-24, CCS-24A, CCHS-24A, CCS-24B, CCHS-24B, CCS-24G, CCHS-24G, CCS-24R, is intended for indoor installations only. This appliance is not listed for outdoor or drip proof applications. Spacing for the CS-24 and CHS-24 shall be in accordance with Table A. If a configuration is not square, the room size that will entirely encompass the room or subdivide the room into multiple squares shall be used. MOUNTING, ROUGH-IN BOX AND RUN WIRING unit is designed for mounting to most single gang boxes, 4″ square outlet boxes, 2-gang masonry boxes or non-metallic 2-gang switch boxes. Conduit entrance to boxes should be selected to sufficient wiring clearance. Run a minimum 18 gauge insulated 2 or more conductor cable. Mount a box for each remote signaling appliance. Screw bracket onto box. Insert signal into bracket and slide to the right firmly into the terminal block receptacle. Insert mounting screw as and tighten. Cover assembly with the plastic housing. WIRING SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BRACKET PRIOR TO MOUNTING SIGNAL. INCOMING POSITIVE POWER LEAD MUST BE BROKEN AND EACH LEAD IS TO INSERTED INTO EACH OF THE TOP TWO TERMINALS. IF TWO POWER RUNS ARE MADE TO THE SIGNAL, ONE FOR THE STROBE AND ONE FOR THE HORN, ONLY ONE OF THE MUST HAVE ITS POSITIVE LEAD BROKEN AND PLACED UNDER THE TWO SEPARATE TOP TERMINALS. A BARRIER IS PROVIDED TO PREVENT BOTH LEADS FROM BEING UNDER THE SAME TERMINAL. A Room Size x 20 x 30 x 44 x 50 x 6.10 x 9.14 x 13.4 x 15.2 AND CHS-24 PRODUCT INFORMATION Spacing for Ceiling-Mounted Visible Appliances per NFPA 72, 2013 Edition Required Light Output (Effective Intensity, Cd; One Light) Foot Ceiling Ceiling Height Foot Ceiling Foot Ceiling Strobe light must be installed within 16 of the pillow when used in a sleeping area. = Not allowable THE VISUAL SIGNAL MUST BE IN THE DIRECT VIEWING AREA OF THE OCCUPANT IN ORDER BE SEEN. light can not be seen when objects such as doors, furniture or walls block light. VISUAL SIGNALS FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED ARE ONLY ONE METHOD OF ALERTING THE IMPAIRED. VISUAL SIGNALS MAY NOT BE THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR NOTIFYING ALL IMPAIRED INDIVIDUALS. THE STROBE LIGHT MUST BE SEEN BY THE SLEEPING PERSON. IF THE PERSON HAS HEAD OR OTHERWISE UNABLE TO BE ALERTED BY VISUAL, THE STROBE WILL NOT BE EFFECTIVE. Lens Strobe Current Ratings with CS-24 & CHS-24 Products 24VDC Max. Current (mA) 24VFWR Max. Current (mA) Nominal Current (mA) DC VOLTAGE RANGE LIMITS: 16-33V. FWR VOLTAGE LIMITS: 16-33V. THIS PRODUCT WAS ONLY TESTED TO STATED VOLTAGE RANGE(S); DO NOT APPLY 80% AND OF THIS RANGE FOR SYSTEM OPERATION. 1 CCHS-24A, CCS-24B, CCHS-24B, CCS-24G, CCHS-24G, CCS-24R AND CCHS-24R PRODUCT

Features Tamperproof field selectable candela settings of 15, 30, 60, 75, and 110 Lens colors available in amber, blue, green, and red Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Silence audible while visual appliance remains flashing (for use in accepted jusridictions) Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, and 2400Hz tone Switch for continuous or temporal 3 tone (not available on whoop) Tamperproof re-entrant grill Product includes a 5 year warranty CS/CHS Series Colored Lens Signals are wall mount, low profile and horn/strobes that offer dependable audible and visual for warning and emergency notification. Applications include communication, severe weather, emergency response and more. CS/CHS Series Colored Lens Signals are 24VDC units available lens colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The Series offers field selectable options of 15, 30, 60, 75, and 110 candela. have a minimal operating current and a minimum flash rate of regardless of input voltage. The strobes can be synced using a sync protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die-cast universal 4 bracket which incorporates the popular Super-Slide that allows the installer to easily pre-wire the system and test supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism that the signal to the bracket without showing any screws. The Lens Series also features the Checkmate – Instant Voltage Feature which allows the installer to check the voltage current draw, and match against the blue print. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0210 (CHS Series) 7135-0328:0209 (CS Series) Specifications Voltage Limitations Connections Weight 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 120 (0 – 49 Only H x 4.5 W x 2.5 D accept 18 – 12 AWG gang, double gang, or 4 backbox mount with AVBB lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Number Color dBA at 10 per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room dBA at 10 Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Number Series Colored Lens Strobe, Selectable Candela Color Max Strobe Current Ratings (24VDC Regulated) Gree, and Lens Lens unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. Bezels Number CS/CHS Series devices are plain (no wording). bezels can be ordered separately. Decibel and Current Ratings at 10 UL 464 at 10 UL 464 24VDC Operating at High (mA) Setting 3 2400Hz 3 Mechanical 3 Chime 2400Hz Mechanical Chime the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting minimum ANSI/UL 464 reverberant sound level required for public fire protection service. These settings are acceptable only for mode fire alarm us

Features Fixed 75cd strobe Available in surface-mount (standard) and Low Profile (LP) WPBB/LP made of clear Lexan – provides maximum visibility reliability, allowing full 75cd output Lens colors available in amber, blue, green, and red Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Switch selection for high/low dBA Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, and 2400Hz tone Input terminals accept 18 to 12 AWG Switch for continuous or temporal 3 tone (not available on whoop) Tamperproof re-entrant grill 5 year warranty CS/CHS-WP Series Outdoor Colored Lens Signals are wall low profile strobes and horn/strobes that offer dependable and visual alarms for warning and emergency notification in locations. Applications include emergency communication, weather, emergency response and many more. CS/CHS-WP Series Outdoor Colored Lens Signals are 24VDC available in lens colors of amber, blue, green and red. The Series a fixed 75 candela strobe. They have a minimal operating current a minimum flash rate of 1Hz regardless of input voltage. The enclosure is made of clear Lexan which provides visibility and reliability for effective visible signaling, full 75cd output. The strobes can be synced using a Gentex protocol or the AVSM Sync Module. Colored Lens Series is shipped with a die cast universal 4 bracket which incorporates the popular Super-Slide that allows the installer to easily pre-wire the system and test supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism that the signal to the bracket without showing any screws. The Lens Series also features the Checkmate – Instant Voltage Feature which allows the installer to check the voltage current draw, and match against the blue print. Version CS/CHS-WP Series devices are available in two different versions. standard version comes with a surface-mount back box (WPBB) install directly on a wall. The Low Profile (LP) versions come with low profile back box (WPLPBB) designed to be installed on a flush- electrical box. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 7135-0328:0212 (CHS-WP Series) 7135-0328:0213 (CS-WP Series) Specifications Voltage 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 150 (-35 – 66 Version – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 3.25 D – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 4.18 Connections accept 18 – 12 AWG Weight Version Single gang, double gang, or square back box Version – Surface mount back box lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 Series Outdoor Colored Lens Strobe, 75 Candela Number Color Models with LP include the LP version enclosure. Number

No text preview available.

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — HEAT DETECTOR 1 of 1 Inc.,2900 North 1000 West, Ogden, UT 84414 Lee Barker (801) 782-2233 Fax (801) 782-1746 [email protected] 302, 302H, 302AW, 302ET and 302EPM heat detectors. Units are open circuit, 1350 1940 F fixed temperature and rate-of-rise type heat detectors. Models 302 and 302-H are indoor use. Models 302-ET or 302-AW are for all weather use. Model 302-EPM is suitable use in Class I, Groups C and D and Class II, Groups E, F and G hazardous locations. to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational VAC or VDC, 125 VDC F, 1940 F fixed temperature and rate-of-rise accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models 302, 302-ET and are for intended for vertical mount and Models 302-H is intended for horizontal mount name, model number, electrical and temperature rating and UL label. as fixed temperature and rate of rise type heat detectors for use with separately listed fire alarm control units. No. 05-01-2003 listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

A Brand CSH24W LIGHT SERIES Limitless applications: Weather warning, mass noti cation, leaks, etc. Selectable candela output NFPA/ANSI compliant UL listed for wall mounting Polarized strobes with wide operating voltage range using ltered DC or un ltered FWR input voltage Horn eld selectable tones: Universal mounting plate for 4 single gang back box and more Synchronization using Sync Module (SMD10-3A) Available in red or white housing Available strobe colors: amber, blue, green, red Hz interrupted or electro-mechanical or Non-temporal or low dBA output Amseco Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSH24W offer a slim-line look with a stylish round The CSH24W colored strobe/horns are UL listed for indoor applications. The terminal strips accept a wide cable offering and provide a connection of one or multiple devices. The strobe/horn combinations are selectable with either a continuous or ANSI Temporal 3 output. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or white. The strobes are designed for 24 VDC, will operate anywhere between 16 and 33 VDC. Information Color Voltage Type Output Rate Range Number * * Potter before ordering 24V FWR Mount times/ – 120 – 49 Speci cations Amseco CSH24W colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual and audible noti cation. The device shall have a universal mounting and connect to a single gang, double gang, four inch square or octagon box. The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall with light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The colored strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective shall be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of amber, red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 16 and 33 VDC or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum of once a second continuously at 16 VDC. inches (mm) (127) (85.7) (127) View View View Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850036 – REV B 9/07 1 OF 3 CSH24W LIGHT SERIES Only RMS operating (mA) DC (57) (87) FWR (95) (135) ULC Current @ 24V (mA) either Low or High replace cap on front of unit. High Proof strobe/horn must be used only on circuits with continuously voltage. DO NOT use strobe on coded or interrupted in which the applied voltage is interrupted ON and OFF as strobe may fail to ash. The applied voltage must be within its input voltage range. Fuse ratings on signaling circuits must peak currents from all devices connected to those circuits. Brand cations Output Output on Axis (c

CSHB/CSLB120 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Unit alone is UL Listed for outdoor use Low current consumption Wide operating voltage range AWG #18 lead wire connection Mounts to SBX-1 outdoor box, SBP-2 plate on single gang box or SBP-1 large plate (optional) Alert decal included Available in red or gray housing Available strobe colors: Amber, blue, green, and red Amseco Outdoor Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSLB and CSHB offer a slim look with a round strobe. The CSLB and CSHB colored strobes and colored strobe/horns are listed indoor or outdoor applications and are completely units. The colored coded ying leads provide a simple connection of one or multiple devices. The strobe/horn combinations are selectable either a continuous or ANSI Temporal 3 output. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or gray. The strobes are designed for 120 VAC, will operate anywhere between 96 and 132 VAC. Number Number Color Color Rate Output Information Contact Potter before ordering AC / High Wall Mount Speci cations Amseco CSLB120 colored strobe or CSHB120 colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual (and audible with CSHB) noti cation. The shall be completely sealed and listed for both indoor and outdoor installations. For outdoor installations, the SBX-1 back box shall be The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall comply with light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective mirror shall be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 96 and 132 VAC regulated or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum once a second continuously at 96 VAC. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850041 – REV A 1 OF 2 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Gang Box Covers inches (mm) Surface Mount Back Box (3.4) 31/32 (50) Connector and Standard Box Plate (165) (85.7) (10) (22) (5.6) (4.7) (60)

A Brand CSHB/CSLB24 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Unit alone is UL Listed for outdoor use Low current consumption Wide operating voltage range AWG #18 lead wire connection Mounts to SBX-1 outdoor box, SBP-1 plastic mounting plate (optional), or SBP-2 plate (included) on single gang back box ALERT decal included Available in red or gray housing Available strobe colors: Amber, blue, green, and red Amseco Outdoor Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSLB and CSHB offer a slim look a stylish round strobe. The CSLB and CSHB colored strobes and colored strobe/horns are listed indoor or outdoor applications and are sealed units. The colored coded ying leads provide a simple connection of one or multiple devices. The strobe/horn combinations selectable with either a continuous or ANSI Temporal 3 output. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or gray. The strobes are designed for 24 VDC, will operate anywhere between 16 and 33 VDC. Information Number Color Voltage Rate Contact Potter before ordering 24V / High Wall Mount Speci cations Amseco CSLB24 colored strobe or CSHB24 colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual (and audible with CSHB) noti cation. The shall be completely sealed and listed for both indoor and outdoor installations. For outdoor installations, the SBX-1 back box shall be The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall comply with light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective mirror shall be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 16 and 33 VDC regulated or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum of a second continuously at 16 VDC. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MFG. #5401401 – REV A 10/04 1 OF 2 CSHB/CSLB24 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Brand Screw Gang Box Connector and Pipe Standard Box (165) (85.7) (10) Plate (16) inches (mm) (3.4) 31/32 (50) (22) (5.6) (4.7) (60) Surface Mount Back Box 1/4 (57) 5/16 (84) View View View Back View Diagram 1 and Horn Unison Next or 2 and Horn Signal

A Brand SERIES SELECT-A-STROBE Available strobe colors: amber, blue, green, or red UL Listed for wall mounting Screw terminal capacity up to AWG12 Selectable candela output NFPA/ANSI compliant Polarized strobes with wide operating voltage range using ltered or un ltered FWR input voltage Designed for use in non-sleeping areas Minimum one ash per second (1 Hz) Synchronization requires Sync Module (SMD10-3A) Available in red or white housing All models mount to a 4 or single gang back box Amseco Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSL24W offers a slim-line look with a stylish strobe. The CSL24W colored strobes are listed for indoor wall mount applications. The terminal strips allow for various wire sizes and a simple connection of one or multiple devices. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or white. Rate Information Number Contact Potter before ordering / 145 / 79 / 154 / 68 / 145 / 79 / 154 / 68 DC/ / – 120 – 49 Speci cations Amseco CSL24W colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual noti cation. The device shall have a universal mounting plate and to a single gang, double gang, four inch square or octagon box. The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall comply light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The colored strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective mirror be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of amber, red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 16 and 33 VDC or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum of once a second continuously at 16 VDC. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850038 – REV A 1 OF 2 Brand Gang Box Square Back Box Gang Box CSL24W SERIES COLORED SELECT-A-STROBE inches (mm) (127) 1/4 (56.9) 3/8 (85.7) 13/16 (46) Diagram 1 2 Diagram for using the Sync Module (SMD10-3A) Next or MODULE H Next or 45 45 ULC Current at DC (mA) either Low or High replace cap on front of unit. High Proof Light cations RMS Current DC FWR Output Output on Axis (cd) IN USA #8850038 – REV A 2 OF 2

CSHB/CSLB120 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Unit alone is UL Listed for outdoor use Low current consumption Wide operating voltage range AWG #18 lead wire connection Mounts to SBX-1 outdoor box, SBP-2 plate on single gang box or SBP-1 large plate (optional) Alert decal included Available in red or gray housing Available strobe colors: Amber, blue, green, and red Amseco Outdoor Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSLB and CSHB offer a slim look with a round strobe. The CSLB and CSHB colored strobes and colored strobe/horns are listed indoor or outdoor applications and are completely units. The colored coded ying leads provide a simple connection of one or multiple devices. The strobe/horn combinations are selectable either a continuous or ANSI Temporal 3 output. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or gray. The strobes are designed for 120 VAC, will operate anywhere between 96 and 132 VAC. Number Number Color Color Rate Output Information Contact Potter before ordering AC / High Wall Mount Speci cations Amseco CSLB120 colored strobe or CSHB120 colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual (and audible with CSHB) noti cation. The shall be completely sealed and listed for both indoor and outdoor installations. For outdoor installations, the SBX-1 back box shall be The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall comply with light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective mirror shall be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 96 and 132 VAC regulated or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum once a second continuously at 96 VAC. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850041 – REV A 1 OF 2 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Gang Box Covers inches (mm) Surface Mount Back Box (3.4) 31/32 (50) Connector and Standard Box Plate (165) (85.7) (10) (22) (5.6) (4.7) (60)

A Brand CSHB/CSLB24 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Unit alone is UL Listed for outdoor use Low current consumption Wide operating voltage range AWG #18 lead wire connection Mounts to SBX-1 outdoor box, SBP-1 plastic mounting plate (optional), or SBP-2 plate (included) on single gang back box ALERT decal included Available in red or gray housing Available strobe colors: Amber, blue, green, and red Amseco Outdoor Colored Strobe utilizes a patented design that produces a true color output. The CSLB and CSHB offer a slim look a stylish round strobe. The CSLB and CSHB colored strobes and colored strobe/horns are listed indoor or outdoor applications and are sealed units. The colored coded ying leads provide a simple connection of one or multiple devices. The strobe/horn combinations selectable with either a continuous or ANSI Temporal 3 output. strobes are used in various applications such as Mass Noti cation, Severe Weather Warning, Machine Operation, Industrial Detection Access Control and many, many more. These devices are UL listed for general signaling (UL 1638) and comply with the requirements signaling of the hearing impaired (UL 1971). The bodies of the strobes are available in red or gray. The strobes are designed for 24 VDC, will operate anywhere between 16 and 33 VDC. Information Number Color Voltage Rate Contact Potter before ordering 24V / High Wall Mount Speci cations Amseco CSLB24 colored strobe or CSHB24 colored strobe/horn shall be provided for visual (and audible with CSHB) noti cation. The shall be completely sealed and listed for both indoor and outdoor installations. For outdoor installations, the SBX-1 back box shall be The devices shall be UL listed for General Signaling and shall comply with light output requirements of UL 1971 for spacing. The strobes shall have a minimum light output of 15 cd. The re ective mirror shall be the same color as the lens to produce a true color of red, blue or green. The strobe shall operate between 16 and 33 VDC regulated or full wave recti ed. The strobe shall ash a minimum of a second continuously at 16 VDC. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MFG. #5401401 – REV A 10/04 1 OF 2 CSHB/CSLB24 INDOOR/OUTDOOR STROBE COMBINATION Brand Screw Gang Box Connector and Pipe Standard Box (165) (85.7) (10) Plate (16) inches (mm) (3.4) 31/32 (50) (22) (5.6) (4.7) (60) Surface Mount Back Box 1/4 (57) 5/16 (84) View View View Back View Diagram 1 and Horn Unison Next or 2 and Horn Signal

Features 24VDC fixed 15/75 candela strobe Lens colors available: amber, blue, green, and red Amber versions come with ALERT wording Speaker voltage 25 or 70.7 VRMs standard, field selectable Field selectable power taps: 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, 4W Xenon strobe maintains constant flash rate (1Hz) High quality dBA output (intelligible) Frequency range 400-4000 Hz Screw Terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Tamperproof grill Faceplate available in red or off-white Product includes a 5 year warranty Potter CSPKSTR-24 is an indoor wall mount, low profile, field speaker/strobe that offers a quality speaker and visual Applications include severe weather, evacuation, emergency and many more. CSPKSTR-24 Series offers a 24VDC, fixed 15/75 candela strobe in colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The CSPKSTR-24 provides 25 or 70.7 VRMs speaker with field selectable power taps of 1/8W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, or 4W. The strobes can be synchronized using Potter AVSM Synchronization Control Module, FACP, or power that produce a Gentex Synchronization Protocol. CSPKSTR-24 can be mounted to a 4 X 2 1/8 deep back box an extension ring or using Potter SPKRBB surface back box. CSPKSTR-24 grills are constructed of high impact textured Listings ANSI/UL 1480 and ANSI/UL1638 7320-0328:0206 Compliance Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) NFPA 72 Specifications Operating Voltage Operating Voltage Module Limitations Dimensions Box Weight or 70.7VRMs AVSM to 120 Only (15.494cm) square 1.88 (4.7752cm) deep X 2 1/8 deep box or Potter surface back box lbs. PAGE 1 OF 3 Colored Lens Strobe Current Ratings Color 24VDC UL Max dBA @ 10 ft. Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Watts does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling with any of our strobe products. CSPKSTR-24 Colored Lens Series is not listed for outdoor Lens Speaker/Strobes Number Alert Amber Speaker/Strobe Alert Amber Speaker/Strobe Blue Speaker/Strobe Plain Blue Speaker/Strobe Green Speaker/Strobe Plain Green Speaker/Strobe Red Speaker/Strobe Plain Red Speaker/Strobe Number Designations = Off-White Faceplate = Red Faceplate units are non-returnable and Engineering Specifications alarm speaker shall be Potter CSPKSTR-24 Colored Lens Series or equivalent. The speaker shall be capable of producing alarm tones or voice all 25 or 70.7 VRMs audio systems. The speaker shall provide incremental tap settings of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, or 4 watts. Minimum dBA ratings at watt shall be 76.7 dBA and at 4 watts 87.9dBA. Tap settings shall be adjustable with field selectable jumper pins. The speaker shall also have an visual signal capability. visual signal shall have a 1 Hz flash rate regardless of input voltage. All field wiring connections shall be made via separate in-out terminal connections the speaker or speaker strobe shall be ANSI/UL listed and comply with all local, state and federal fire alarm codes/standards. PAGE 2 OF 3 Tap Selection Diagram Diagram MAX WIRE DISTANCE – – X WIRE CONDUCTIVITY VOLTAGE – DEVICE MINIMUM VOLTAGE CURRENT DRAW CAUTION: APPLIES ONLY TO REGULATED SUPPLIES. NOTICE: POWER IS SUPPLIED TO DEVICES WHEN CONTROL PANEL IS LATCHED. DO NOT USE WIRE TERMINALS. WIRE TO PROVIDE OF PAGE 3 OF 3

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — SPEAKERS Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] FASPKR speaker, CSPKSTR-24-15/75WLP speaker strobes and GBLP backbox. FASPKR followed by R (red) or W (white). Model CSPKSTR, followed by A (amber), B G (green), R (red) indicating, followed by 24-15/75, may be followed by -A (alert) , -P then followed by W (wall) and followed by R (red) or W (white). Suffix WLP indicates mount and low profile design. All models are intended for use with Model GBLP backbox outdoor applications. Strobe is intended for non-fire applications. Refer to listee’s data for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. Rate accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, ratings, and UL label. as speakers and speaker strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units. Model CSPKSTR-24-15/75WLP is NOT suitable for the fire alarm notification for hearing impaired applications. For indoor and outdoor applications. Refer to Installation Manual for details. Vrms and 70.7 Vrms VDC flashes per minute devices do not generate a temporal pattern signal. If the distinctive three-pulse Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with 72, 2002 Edition is required, the appliance must be used with a fire alarm control unit can generate the temporal pattern signal. No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features 24VDC fixed 15/75 candela strobe CSPKSTR-24-WP is shipped with outdoor listed back box, SpKRBB Lens colors available: amber, blue, green, red Amber versions come with ALERT wording Speaker voltage 25 or 70.7 VRMs standard, field selectable Field selectable power taps: 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, 4W Xenon strobe maintains constant flash rate (1Hz) High quality dBA output (intelligible) Frequency range 400-4000 Hz Screw Terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Tamperproof grill Faceplate available in red or off-white Product includes a 5 year warranty Potter CSPKSTR-24-WP is an outdoor, wall mount, low profile, adjustable speaker/strobe that offers a quality speaker and signal. applications include severe weather, evacuation, and response. CSPKSTR-24-WP Series offers a 24VDC, fixed 15/75 candela in lens colors of amber, blue, green, and red. The CSPKSTR- provides a 25 or 70.7 VRMs speaker with field selectable taps of 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, or 4W. The strobes can be using the Potter AVSM Synchronization Control Module, or power supplies that produce a Gentex Synchronization with the CSpKSTR-24-Wp Series is the SpKRBB outdoor box. The SPKRBB provides protection from weather related and allows the necessary full candela output. CSPKSTR-24-WP body is constructed of high impact textured 7320-0328:0206 Listings UL S2657 ANSI/UL 1480 and ANSI/UL1638 Compliance Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) NFPA 72 Specifications Operating Voltage Operating Voltage Module Limitations Dimensions Box Weight or 70.7VRMs AVSM to 150 to 66 (15.494cm) square 1.88 (4.7752cm) deep X 2 1/8 deep box or Potter surface back box lbs. page 1 OF 3 and Engineering Specifications alarm speaker shall be Potter CSPKSTR-24-WP Colored Lens Series or equivalent. The speaker shall be capable of producing alarm tones or voice on 25 or 70.7 VRMs audio systems. The speaker shall provide incremental tap settings of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, or 4 watts. Minimum dBA ratings at 1/4 watt be 76.7 dBA and at 4 watts 87.9dBA. Tap settings shall be adjustable with field selectable jumper pins. The speaker shall also have an optional visual capability. visual signal shall have a 1 Hz flash rate regardless of input voltage. All field wiring connections shall be made via separate in-out terminal connections. appliance has extended temperature range of -31 to 150 (-35 to 66 The appliance shall satisfy all outdoor and severe environment The SPKRBB back box includes a gasket that must be inserted between the box and device. There are drain holes in the back box to allow drainage, the seal on the SPKRBB is not water tight. The speaker/strobe shall be ANSI/UL listed and comply with all local, state and federal fire codes/standards. Colored Lens Strobe Current Ratings Color 24VDC UL Max dBA @ 10 ft. Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Watts does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling with any of our strobe products. Lens Speaker/Strobes Number Number Alert Amber Speaker/Strobe Amber Speaker/Strobe Blue Speaker/Strobe Blue Speaker/Strobe Green Speaker/Strobe Green Speaker/Strobe Red Speaker/Strobe Red Speaker/Strobe Designations = Off-White Faceplate = Red Faceplate units are non-returnable page 2 OF 3 Tap Selection Diagram

CSS SERIES STROBE/ COMBINATION Field selectable wattage from 1, and 2 Watts Available 24VRMS and 70VRMS models Frequency range 400 to 4000 Hz Speaker: UL listed for Fire Protective Service Strobe: UL listed for ceiling and wall mount Strobe/Speaker: NFPA/ANSI compliant Available colored light: amber, blue, green, and red Operable with 24V regulated DC or FWR (16-33V) Polarized strobes with wide operating voltage range using filtered DC or unfiltered FWR input voltage Minimum one flash per second (1Hz) Selectable light output candela: low, mid, and high Synchronization requires SMD10-3A sync module terminal capacity up to #12 AWG back box skirt for surface mount (optional) retrofit plate allows mounting to a variety of boxes (optional) in red or white housing models mount to a 4 back box Specifications speaker and colored visual alarm indicating appliance shall be Model CSS25C, CSS70C, or equivalent device. The speaker be NFPA/ANSI compliant and listed under UL1480 standard for fire service. The strobe shall be listed under UL 1638 standard for devices and shall be approved for fire protective and emergency In addition to lens color, the reflective mirror shall also be of same color. The amber, blue, green, and red lens shall be listed in with UL 1638 Visual Appliance Private Mode Emergency General Utility, or Emergency for use in indoor applications. The output shall be field selectable, having three settings of high, or low light intensity output. The speaker shall operate with amplifiers having an output of either 25V RMS or 70V RMS emergency evacutaion system and fire protection signaling systems. speaker shall have a field selectable wattage from 1, or 2 Watts, a frequency range of 400 to 4000 Hz. The 24V DC signaling strobe be designed to produce a signal flash of one flash per second with applied minimum voltage. The strobe/speaker shall be of ceiling and wall mounting to a variety of back boxes using the SMD10-3A (daisy chain) or other source of Potter sync protocol. low profile ceiling mount Colored Light Select-A-Strobe/Speaker and CSS70C Series are designed to operate with distribution having an output either 25V RMS aor 70V RMS for emergency system and fire protection signaling systems. The speaker is listed under UL1480, Speaker for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and and Professional Use, and the colored light lens strobe series listed in compliance with UL1638, Visual Signaling. Both meet or NFPA/ANSI standards. speaker series provide a 25V RMS input and CSS70C provide RMS with a colored light strobe. The speakers incorporate a high speaker to reproduce a clear audible sound for maximum at minimum power across a frequency range of 400 Hz to 4000 Hz a capacitive input to allow for DC supervision. The series provides a field selectable four wattage taps of 1, and 2 Watts. The IN/ screw terminals accept #12 to #18 AWG wires. colored light strobe can be selected either low, medium, or high, a selectable slide switch located on the housing. The colored light is in amber, blue, green, or red. The light output candela ratings depending on the lens color. The series can be mounted on standard 4 electrical boxes and is available in red or white housing color. In those where two or more Amseco horns and/or strobes are connected require a synchronized code 3 temporal pattern and/or a synchronized flash, all models can be synchronized when used in conjuction with UL listed Sync Module SMD10-3A to meet the latest code. Information Color Voltage Rating RMS) Rate Output Mounting Type 24V Mid, or or Wall Potter Customer Service for stock availability before ordering Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833

DACT-5000 ALARM TRANSMITTER SIA or Contact ID reporting formats Bi-Colored telephone line status LED’s User set daily test Simplistic Programming with CFG-5000 Directly mounts in re alarm cabinet DACT-5000 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter allows the series re alarm control panel to call a Central Station and a local Fire Alarm, Trouble Condition or Supervisory Condition PFC-5002). When properly installed with two phone lines, DACT-5000 supervises the lines and can be programmed with Schematic Security Industry Association (SIA) Digital Communications (DCS) or the Ademco Contact ID protocols. The DACT- mounts directly to the PFC-5000 series cabinet and is powered from the main re alarm panel. The CFG-5000 Con guration is required to program the DACT-5000. LED CABLE MAIN BOARD 2 1 204-1 Speci cation contractor shall furnish the DACT-5000 Digital Alarm Transmitter for communicating an alarm, trouble or condition to a monitoring station. The DACT shall be UL and be compatible with the PFC-5000 series re alarm control The communicator shall have the capability to supervise the phone lines and report a line failure. The DACT shall be of seizing a phone line, dialing and communicating on the The DACT shall be installed in front of any private telephone in order for the line to be seized and utilized for dialing the station. The DACT shall have two LED that indicate status. The LED shall be off when not in use, a red LED shall the line in use and an amber LED shall indicate a line fault. trouble condition shall be communicated if a telephone line signal loss, regardless of which telephone line. In addition, a signal shall transmitted indicating a restoral of telephone service. If both lines fail, a trouble condition with activation of the trouble shall activate on the main control panel and the buzzer shall The DACT-5000 shall be capable of transmitting in either Security Industry Association (SIA) Digital Communications (DCS) and the Ademco Contact ID formats. The DACT be programmed to send a test report once a day at a speci ed The DACT-5000 shall be programmed using the Potter CFG- Con guration Tool. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8910204 – REV A 1 OF 1

Public Safety DAS Annunciator Panel VAC Models: 1221-A, 1221-B, 1221-C VDC Models: 1221-A-48, 1221-B-48, 1221-C-48 D 91117 VDC Models: 1221A-24, 1221-B-24, 1221-C-24 (Read This First) panel has been designed to make it nearly bullet proof to mistakes made when it to your DAS equipment . Once you have verified that everything is working as the panel 12 VDC backup battery should be the very last thing to connect. will ensure that the battery 1 amp fuse will be unlikely to blow due to any wiring Models manual covers the following Model Numbers: 1221-B, 1221-C 1221-B-48, 1221-C-48 1221-B-24. 1221-C-24 1221-A, 1221-B and 1221-C are all powered by an included 15 VDC power that is wall mounted and connects to any standard 120 VAC outlet. 1221-A-48, 1221-B-48 and 1221-C-48 are powered by a user supplied 48 VDC supply and backup battery used by the BDA 1221-A-24, Model 1221-B-24 and 1221-C-24 are powered by a user supplied VDC power supply and backup battery used by the BDA 1221-C , 1221-C-24, 1221-C-48 have a specially colored LEDS that are required some jurisdictions (see page 18 for details) REQUIRED Standard Voltmeter Tools and hardware for wall mounting TOOLS: screw driver for the connector clamps is included in the accessories trim pot adjustment tool is included with the accessories for applicable models. Lengths panel is designed to work with standard Cat 5 or Cat 6 cable that typically has a DC resistance of 2.5 ohms per 100 ft for a single wire strand. all the connections to standard dry relay contacts in the DAS equipment the length of the cable the panel and the DAS equipment is not critical because the current in the loop is only about milliamp. So cable runs up to 5000 feet or longer can easily be accommodated. is not true however for only the Model 1221-A interface connections that are used to sense the of the outdoor Donor Antenna. The panel has a circuit in it that measures the DC resistance of a terminator installed at the outdoor antenna via a bias-T fitting. If the resistance is too high an open circuit or too low indicating a short circuit an alarm is triggered. So the DC of the coax cable, any connectors and surge protectors in line and the Cat 5 or Cat 6 cabling to the panel can be a significant factor in the overall DC resistance that the panel measures. To out these variables there is a trim pot adjustment that must be made when the panel is first but there is a limit to how much resistance can be nulled. For this circuit to work well a twisted pair of cat 5 / cat 6 cable can be used up to 1000 feet in length. If the cable run is than this (for example 2000 feet) then two twisted pairs should be used in parallel to lower the resistance. Please consult our customer service for additional advice and information. DC powered units both draw about 100 milliamps of current at either 48 VDC or 24 VDC. Please a wire gauge that supports this current consumption with minimal DC voltage drop over the of the cable run . BDA Configurations and Settings your BDA does not conform to the standard alarm relay configuration shown in Figures 2 or 3, contact us. We have designed into the panel several special DIP switch settings that can almost any non-standard alarm set up. For example the CommScope NODE A some special settings to deal with issues when power is disconnected. Please contact us more information. Alarm Panel pin cable connector pin cable connector pin DC Power connector Driver for mating wires to connectors Ahr 12 vdc SLA backup battery pot adjustment tool (in applicable models) Manual k Ohm 0.25 watt end-of -line resistor VDC wall mount power supply (in applicable models) 1 amp battery fuse pin connector 1221-A, 1221-B and 1221-C Independent DAS Annunciator Panel Items: panel is designed to meet the requirements of NFPA -72 (versions 2010, 2013 and 2016), and 2016 version of NFPA-1221. consists of several component sections that enable its use with many different types of BDA and power supp

No text preview available.

Features 25W, 50W and 100W amplifier 25VRMS and 70VRMS audio power 8 Class A or 8 Class B speaker outputs P-Link device Single channel and dual channel amplifiers 120VAC or 240VAC with battery charger circuit Maximum of 31 amplifiers SCA and DCA amplifiers are a new addition to the Potter P-Link device catalog. Potter offers seven variations of with wattages up to 100W to support small, medium, and applications. The amplifiers have the capability to distribute up two audio channels simultaneously across multiple speaker zones. amplifier is supplied with a stacker terminal block to provide for 8 Class B or 8 Class A speaker outputs. The SCA DCA amplifiers offer output power at 25VRMS and 70VRMS. to 31 amplifiers can be linked to the IPA-4000V panel and offer up 248 Class B or Class A speaker outputs. DCA-10025 (Dual Channel, 100W, 25VRMS Amplifier) may programmed to provide an extraordinary 200W for single channel via Potter Fire Panel Programmer. 70V-1000 converter module will extend output power to 70VRMS the DCA dual channel amplifiers. The BUA-1000 backup amplifier a failsafe solutions for potential lapse in service and with the DCA dual channel amplifiers. Specifications Current – 58 mA – 58 mA – 58 mA – 58 mA – 60 mA – 48 mA – 48 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 766 mA – 520 mA – 520 mA (32 Current Humidity P-Link V-Link Amplifiers (WxHxD) ft. ft. @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity Enclosures (WxHxD) – 16 x 17 x 3 7/8 Enclosures (WxHxD) – 19 x 27 3/8 x 4 5/8 PAGE 1 OF 5 SCA and DCA amplifiers communicate in conjunction with the IPA- using a RS-485 connection via P-Link. The SCA amplifiers are with one V-Link and the DCA amplifiers provide two V-Link receive audio from the IPA-4000V. Options SCA-2550, SCA-5025 and SCA-5070 Connections List CHANNEL 25W, 25V CHANNEL 25W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 50W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER SINGLE CHANNEL 100W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER DUAL CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 100W, 25V PAGE 2 OF 5 Connections A P-Link Wiring B P-Link Wiring PAGE 3 OF 5 A V-Link 1 Wiring B V-Link 1 Wiring A V-Link 1 and V-Link 2 Wiring B V-Link 1 and V-Link 2 Wiring PAGE 4 OF 5 Information CHANNEL 25W, 25V CHANNEL 25W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 50W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER No. SINGLE CHANNEL 100W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER DUAL CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 100W, 25V PAGE 5 OF 5

SCA and DCA Channel and Dual Amplifier Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5409206-Rev. A Installation Wiring Documents 1. SCA-2525, SCA-2570, SCA-5025 and SCA-5070 Wiring Diagram 2. SCA-10070 Wiring Diagram 3. DCA-5025 and DCA-10025 of Circuit Connection Connection Circuits Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Supply Circuit AC terminal is located in the upper left hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main AC and provides indication that the AC power is absent. 4. Main Supply Circuit terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: SCA-2570, SCA-5025 and SCA-5070 Amplifiers: of 242mA at the nominal 120 VAC rating of 137mA at the nominal 240 VAC rating Amplifiers of 443mA at the nominal 120 VAC rating of 246mA at the nominal 240 VAC rating and DCA-10025 Amplifiers of 532mA at the nominal 120 VAC rating of 300mA at the nominal 240 VAC rating Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided in the bottom portion of the board. Terminal connections are provided to wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed sealed lead acid battery or battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The batteries operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 15 minutes of alarm. To determine the minimum size batteries for and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet to determine the battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is attached as A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes are provided. V V #593-5 5. Battery Circuit Connections of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The Battery conductors, and the AC and trouble relays are nonpower limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must be by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. SCA and DCA amplifiers operate in conjunction as an expansion device with the IPA-4000V via P-Link. expansion devices are supervised via the RS-485 connection. Wiring is fully supervised, and power limited. Any to ground of 0 ohms will be annunciated as a ground fault. Voltage = 24 VDC wire length = 6,500 feet. wire resistance = Maximum wiring resistance is based on load. using the following equation P-Link Alarm Current) x (Wire Resistance) < 6 volts. 6. P-Link Class B Wiring Example 7. P-Link Class A Wiring Example V-Link is a supervised proprietary bus that transmits audio to designated channels on SCA and DCA amplifiers. is fully supervised, and power limited. Any connection to ground of 0 ohms will be annunciated as a ground wire length = 6500 feet 8. VM-1000 VLINK1 Class B 9. VM-1000 VLINK1 Class A 10. VM-1000 VLINK1 and 2 Class B 11. VM-1000 VLINK1 and 2 Class A Specifications SCA-2570, SCA-5025 and

No text preview available.

Features 25W, 50W and 100W amplifier 25VRMS and 70VRMS audio power 8 Class A or 8 Class B speaker outputs P-Link device Single channel and dual channel amplifiers 120VAC or 240VAC with battery charger circuit Maximum of 31 amplifiers SCA and DCA amplifiers are a new addition to the Potter P-Link device catalog. Potter offers seven variations of with wattages up to 100W to support small, medium, and applications. The amplifiers have the capability to distribute up two audio channels simultaneously across multiple speaker zones. amplifier is supplied with a stacker terminal block to provide for 8 Class B or 8 Class A speaker outputs. The SCA DCA amplifiers offer output power at 25VRMS and 70VRMS. to 31 amplifiers can be linked to the IPA-4000V panel and offer up 248 Class B or Class A speaker outputs. DCA-10025 (Dual Channel, 100W, 25VRMS Amplifier) may programmed to provide an extraordinary 200W for single channel via Potter Fire Panel Programmer. 70V-1000 converter module will extend output power to 70VRMS the DCA dual channel amplifiers. The BUA-1000 backup amplifier a failsafe solutions for potential lapse in service and with the DCA dual channel amplifiers. Specifications Current – 58 mA – 58 mA – 58 mA – 58 mA – 60 mA – 48 mA – 48 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 608 mA – 766 mA – 520 mA – 520 mA (32 Current Humidity P-Link V-Link Amplifiers (WxHxD) ft. ft. @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity Enclosures (WxHxD) – 16 x 17 x 3 7/8 Enclosures (WxHxD) – 19 x 27 3/8 x 4 5/8 PAGE 1 OF 5 SCA and DCA amplifiers communicate in conjunction with the IPA- using a RS-485 connection via P-Link. The SCA amplifiers are with one V-Link and the DCA amplifiers provide two V-Link receive audio from the IPA-4000V. Options SCA-2550, SCA-5025 and SCA-5070 Connections List CHANNEL 25W, 25V CHANNEL 25W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 50W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER SINGLE CHANNEL 100W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER DUAL CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 100W, 25V PAGE 2 OF 5 Connections A P-Link Wiring B P-Link Wiring PAGE 3 OF 5 A V-Link 1 Wiring B V-Link 1 Wiring A V-Link 1 and V-Link 2 Wiring B V-Link 1 and V-Link 2 Wiring PAGE 4 OF 5 Information CHANNEL 25W, 25V CHANNEL 25W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 50W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER No. SINGLE CHANNEL 100W, 25V OR SELECTABLE AMPLIFIER DUAL CHANNEL 50W, 25V CHANNEL 100W, 25V PAGE 5 OF 5

DCM-4 Contact Module Single module with dual contact monitoring inputs Two (2) Class B or one (1) Class A monitoring inputs SLC Class A (Style 6,7) & Class B (Style4) Mounts in a standard 4 or double gang box Wiring terminals accessible when mounted in box All wiring terminals accept 22 to 14 AWG Product includes a 5 year warranty This addressable module does not support 2-wire smoke Number: 1430822 DCM-4 is compatible with Potter PFC-6000 series and PFC- addressable fi re alarm control panels. The DCM-4 is an interface used to monitor dry contact devices such as sprinkler water ow, valve tamper switches, or conventional pull stations. The module capable of monitoring two separate Class B or one Class A circuits. DCM-4 uses two (2) consecutive SLC loop addresses when two (2) Class B circuits or one (1) address when monitoring single class A (Style D) circuit. The module mounts on either a 4 or double gang box. The module is capable of monitoring two separate class B circuits making it ideal for monitoring sprinkler ow and valve tamper switches when they are located in the same The DCM-4 includes one red LED to indicate the modules In normal condition, the LED ashes when the device is being by the control panel. When a contact is activated, the LED will continuously and in case of an open circuit, the LED will turn off. Speci cations Voltage SLC Standby Current Power Required Wiring Resistance of IDC Wiring Cpacitance of IDC Resistor Tempurature Range Humidity Range no. of Module Per Loop Options Weight to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% (non-condensing) units (Class A) or 63 units B) (106mm)L 4.17 1.14 (29mm)D 4 Square or Gang Box lbs Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Tech Support: 866-956-0988 / Customer Service: 866-572-3005 www.pottersignal.com – REV B 7/14 PAGE 1 OF 2 the Address addressable module, smoke sensor, heat detector and combination sensor/detector must be assigned an address prior to installing the device. The is set using either the hand held device programmer or the addressing feature on the PFC 6000 /PFC 8500 Series control panels. When the DCM- is used to monitor two individual Class B circuits a single device address is assigned, with the second address number assigned automatically by the assuming the next consecutive address. For example, if the first address number is assigned as the second address number will automatically assigned as SLC device address connecting a device to the SLC loop, take the following precautions to prevent potential damage to the panel or device verify the following: Power to the device is removed Field wiring is correctly installed. Field wiring has no open or short circuits. Using Compatible Electrical Box Diagrams With One Class A Circuit FACP OR MODULE FACP OR THE NEXT MODULE MODULE THE NEXT MODULE STYLE D STYLE D With Two Class B Circuits FACP OR MODULE FACP OR THE NEXT MODULE MODULE THE NEXT MODULE STYLE B STYLE B END-OF-LINE RESISTOR IS NOT REQUIRED END-OF-LINE RESISTOR IS NOT REQUIRED RESISTOR OHM 1/2W RESISTOR OHM 1/2W RESISTOR OHM 1/2W RESISTOR OHM 1/2W FACP OR ONE NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT END-OF-LINE RESISTOR IS NOT REQUIRED ONE NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PAGE 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features Detects smoke in building HVAC ducts. Ships complete with housing and head. Compatible with addressable PFC-6000 series and Potter Plus SLC in and out wire terminals. Installation without removing the head. Listed Air Velocity of 100 to 4,000 ft/minute. No Durable plastic enclosure and clear cover. Integrated cover tamper switch. Utilizes simple snap in sampling tubes STN series. Potter Electric DDA duct smoke detector provides early detection smoke and products of combustion present in air moving through ducts in commercial, industrial and residential applications. DDA is compatible with the PFC-6000 series addressable fire control panels, the Potter Plus and any panel compatible with Potter/Nohmi addressable protocol. DDA is designed and built to meet all local requirements, as well the NFPA regulations regarding duct smoke detectors. sampling is accomplished by two tubes which protrude into the An exhaust tube of one standard length (7 is supplied in the kit with the smoke duct unit. Once the duct width has been the air intake sampling tubes must be ordered. Sampling are supplied in three standard lengths: 3 ft., 5 ft., and 10 ft. and the use of a template and 2 sheet metal screws, which are provided. can be achieved without the removal of the clear cover is secured by 4 capture screws. Specifications Voltage Draw Head Type Velocity Temperature Tubes VDC Amps DSA diagnostic test to 4000 ft./min to 120 (0 to 49 to 85% Relative humidity (non-condensing) backbox, clear plastic cover backbox with clear cover 1/2″L x 4 1/2″ W x 2 1/4″ H lbs. ft., 5 ft., or 10 ft. PAGE 1 OF 2 which must be maintained. The housing shall contain a detector and DSA duct smoke detector head. Terminal connections shall with local codes and regulations. Detector shall use the STN of sampling tubes. Specifications duct smoke detectors shall be Potter Electric DDA Series. The shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories per UL 268A. detectors shall operate at air velocities from 100 feet per minute 4000 feet per minute. duct detector housings shall be of plastic construction and complete installation may be performed without removal of detector Visual indication of alarm and power must be provided on front. Detector heads shall not require additional filters or Diagram USED USED CONTROL PANEL WIRING – STYLE / SLC (Supervised – A single open/ground condition will not inhibit an alarm response) CONTROL PANEL WIRING – STYLE SLC (Supervised – A single open condition will inhibit an alarm response) Listed Alarm Panel Listed Alarm Panel #1 #X #1 D #X PAGE 2 OF 2

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR, PHOTO. (W/ OR W/O BASE) Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] DDA photoelectric type sensor analog addressable duct smoke dectector. The duct sensor consists of a plastic enclosure, recognized component printed wiring board, listed duct detector subassembly, and an inlet coupling tube and an exhaust tube along gaskets. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and considerations. VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions and applicable codes and and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label. as photoelectric type, duct smoke detectors for use with separately listed compatible alarm control units . Suitable for use in ducts where air velocity is between 100 and 4000 and temperatures not exceeding 120 . Refer to listee Installation Instruction for details. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features Resets itself, nothing to replace, testable Offers various temperature settings Long lasting stainless steel shell Wide spacing, reduces installation cost Factory set Internal contact area hermetically sealed in stainless steel Kidde-Fenwal DeTeCT-a-FIRe units are the many Fire protection Systems. These highly reliable have a been a standard of the industry for 65 years, thousands of detectors in use controlling the release extinguishants such as clean agents, CO2, water, or dry In some systems the device is used as an aLaRM the device is used as an aLaRM device, to sense detectors have met with wide acceptance they are designed with RaTe COMpeNSaTION. and rate-of-rise types of detectors because the DeTeCT-a-FIRe detector accurately senses the at precisely the predetermined danger point, the system activated. temperature detectors must be completely heated alarm temperature and therefore a lag in response time hand, are triggered by the rate of increase in ambient and are subject to false alarms caused by transient thermal gradients such as the rush of air from process ovens. Specifications Type 300 Stainless steel Cold rolled steel/ Type 300 steel/brass Off-white oz key to the unit sensitivity is in the design. The outer shell made of a rapidly expanding alloy which closely follows in surrounding air temperature. The inner struts are of a lower expanding alloy. Designed to resist thermal absorption and sealed inside the shell, the struts follow and struts together. at the point, the unit will trigger, the alarm or releasing the extinguishant. transient rush of warm air up to 40 may expand the but not enough to trigger the unit. By ignoring transient air excursions, DeTeCT-a-FIRe detectors virtually false alarms prevalent with rate-of-rise devices. close, actuating the alarm or releasing the agent. The will react. page 1 OF 4 Detect-A-Fire Units DeTeCT-a-FIRe detectors are designed for design lends physical protection of the unit while it suitable for commercial, industrial, mercantile and buildings, institutions and marine applications in non- electric Code). Flush mounted units are designed to are designed to mount directly on ceilings or on 4 junction boxes. Canadian electrical Codes requires only to an electrical junction box. (Horizontal and Vertical) detectors are not position sensitive. and vertical detectors refer to the most common mounted either horizontally or vertically depending on the and installation requirements. Locations Type UL & ULC Required FM Approval I, Groups A, B and D; Class II E, F and G I, Groups B, C D; Class II, E, F and G detector to a suitable fitting in accordance National Electric Code local authority having DeTeCT-a-FIRe detectors are temperature preset at the factory. corrosive environments, care should be taken to protect the detector to obtain optimal performance and

550-0706-000 Bases: PAD100-SPKB PAD100-PHD, PAD200-PD, PAD200-PHD, and PAD100-CD Smoke Detector Description document provides instructions for mounting and wiring the detector bases and PAD100-SPKB. The following detectors are compatible with detec- bases PAD100-LFSB and PAD100-SPKB. PAD200-PD & PAD100-PD: PAD200-PHD & PAD100-PHD: Photoelectric Smoke / Heat Detector PAD100-HD: PAD100-CD: Field Wiring Diagram for PAD100-LFSB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 1). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. (FIGURE 1) Typical of NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) using the PAD100-LFSB base. In Class A arrangement two separate conduc- would return from the last detector base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Panel (FACP). Detector Monoxide Detector PWR + Base SLC – + PWR + Base SLC – + FACP (SLC) + – + – 1: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-LFSB X Wiring (FIGURE 2), requires use of PAD100-IM (Addressable Isolator Module). typical field diagram is in Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IM. The PAD100-IM can be obtained at www.pottersignal.com MODULE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IM NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 2: Wiring (Class X) Using PAD100-LFSB and PAD100-IM 3: PAD100-LFSB Wiring Field Wiring Diagram for PAD100-SPKB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) (FIGURE 4). The SLC NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. The PAD100-SPKB offer a choice of field power taps: 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watts (FIGURE 5) for use with either 25 or 70.7 VRMs audio amplifiers. The frequency range of the PAD100-SPKB is Hz. The PAD100-SPKB is suitable for line supervision. The PAD100-SPKB in- DC blocking capacitor which allows for supervision voltage of either polarity. 4: PAD100-SPKB Wiring Diagram power taps using nose pliers. 5: PAD100-SPKB Wiring and Power Tap wiring. SUPERVISION OF CONNECTION. ensure proper installation of the detector head to the base, wires shall be properly at the time of installation ARTICLE 300.3(B) OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70, AS WELL ARTICLE 210. EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD 72. Wiring Instruction When using PAD100-SPKB / PAD100-LFSB base, observe the correct polarity of THE WIRING TO BE USED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS DO NOT USE LOOPED WIRE UNDER TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE RUN TO Break wire runs to provide supervision for connections made to each wire pair. When installing, route field wiring away from sharp projections, corners and components. Base Mounting / PAD100-SPKB should be mounted directly on the electrical box (FIG- 6a) or to the LFSBBB-W back box (FIGURE 6b). The PAD100-LFSB / PAD100-SPKB holes are configured for a 4 x 2-1/8 deep square box. Use a box for each and run the power circuit to all base locations. 12 to 18 AWG conductors to connect to terminals of bases. It is that the SLC conductors be color-coded to avoid wiring errors and in system troubleshooting. Improper SLC connections may prevent the system operating normally. Disconnect power to the SLC until the detectors are Wire the detector bases according to Field Wiring Diagrams. Use the dip switches (SECTION 11) to set address(es) (1 – 127) for each detector THE PAD100-LFSB /PAD100-SPKB OBTAINS THE ADDRESS FROM THE THE DETECTORS AND THE PAD100 MODULES MUST HAVE INDIVIDUAL To install the detector head onto the base, match the detector heads to the using the alignment feature and twist clockwise until the detector heads into place (FIGURE 6a). HEAD. Number: 550-0706 the / base the electrical box the provided screws. screws are two for speaker the back box two for

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — DOOR CLOSER/HOLDERS/RELEASING DEVICES Junipero Ave., Signal Hill, CA 90755 Helen Moyer (562) 630-4684 Fax (562) 529-5100 [email protected] DH-12, -24, -120, -1224, -24120, and -24220 door closer/holders. Refer to listee’s sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. 24V, 120V, and 220V accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions and applicable codes and The system is intended to be mounted in a horizontal position only. name, model number, rating and UL label. as door closer/holders for use with separately listed compatible detectors and fire control units. 06-13-2003 listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2020 Expires 30, 2021 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Very low current draw Dual Voltage inputs Terminal block connections High holding force Low residual magnetism Powder Extension Surface Time features include standard dual voltage ac or dc inputs of 12 & model 24120 draws a mere .020 ma. @ 24VDC, overall job costs. In large installations the cost savings can substantial. features are single or double coil floor mounting, surface and direct wall mounting. No brackets are required. The series door holder offers a new installation technique using an template assuring alignment without secondary adjustments. include extension and misalignment rods in (various enabling parallelism between door and wall at distances than 12 inches and misalignment over 4 inches. in installation is the aircraft quality DH drill that reduces time and provides a near perfect alignment of catch-plate units offer superior holding force and low residual magnetism. 1224 and 24120 can operate at higher listed voltages producing Specifications Draw ma @ 24VDC or 120V or C&H page 1 OF 3 Hardware base chrome base brass plate chrome plate brass back box chrome back box brass wrenches Extensions inch extension chrome inch extension brass inch extension chrome inch extension brass inch extension chrome inch extension brass inch adjustable extension chrome inch adjustable extension brass Voltage DC/ma aC/ma Terminals values are slightly less. & L & H & L & H & L & H Voltage DC/ma aC/ma Terminals & L & L HOLDINg FORCe/SpeCIaL appLICaTIONS: To obtain performance DH (24120) (S) (P) (C) (1) Holder 24120, 24200 Style Flush, Ground, Recessed Brass, DBR (Dark Bronze) 2 For ground mount models (cid:5) (cid:129) page 2 OF 3 mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm)

DPCMS-RM POTTER CORROSION STATION-RISER MOUNT Pressure: up to 175 psiG Range: -40 to 120 (-40 to 49 Holders: Qty. (2) included Information number: 1119547 dpCms-rm (dry) Kits number: Options: Coupon Holder assembly Coupon replacement test Kit Coupon/probe replacement test Kit potter Corrosion monitoring probe Kit for servicing and monitoring of test specimens (corrosion without interruption to fire protection. Test material strip may be an excessive amount of corrosion taking place in the CPRTK2-Coupon/Probe Replacement Test Kit contains the monitoring probe and test coupons from a dpCms-rm. The probe is not for analysis. It allows the fire sprinkler administrator to leave the coupons in the system until the probe activates the pressure switch. Rack Installation: (see Fig. 1) Assemble Install Coupon Installation (see Fig. 1, 2, 3, & 4) Take Assemble Figure 2. Attach the Coupon Holder Assemblies-quantity (2) in the Open sure to leave the coupon isolation valve open to the fire sprinkler system. Verify all valves are in the correct position and the corrosion station is free of any leaks. Fill

DPS-50 PRESSURE SWITCH Listed and CSA Approved Rated Pressure: 250 PSI Working Pressure: 180 PSI Connections: Brass 1/4-18 NPT Female Differential Pressure Range: Proof Pressure: 180 PSID allowable pressure difference across high/low pressure ports.) Type 1 (For indoor use only) Formed sheet metal with powdercoat nish. (Not for use in hazardous locations.) PSID (Increasing Differential Pressure) Setting: 20 PSID (Increasing Differential Pressure) SPDT (Form C) Switch Amps at 125/250/480 VAC Contacts: Entrance: Opening for 1/2″ conduit Motor Rating: 120VAC Horsepower: AC F.L.A.: AC L.R.A.: Duty Rating: 125VA, 120/240 VAC Temperature Range: -40 F (-40 Temperature Range: 32 F (0 1 properly rated temperature supply wire for the anticipated temperature. all electrical connections in accordance with the National Code and local regulations. wire under switch bracket to avoid interfering with switch mechanism. (See Fig. 3) 2 ACTION ON DECREASE ACTION ON INCREASE 1034-3 number 9000100 device is not intended for applications in explosive environments. Model DPS-50 is a differential pressure switch used to monitor difference in pressure between two pressure sources. A change pressure between the high and low pressure ports greater than the pressure setting (8-50 PSID range) will reposition the mechanism to open or close a single electrical circuit by means a snap-action electrical switch. This control device is designed applications sensing air, water or any uid not harmful to brass or and not classi ed as a hazardous uid. control device is designed for use only as an operating control. an operating control failure would result in personal injury loss of property, it is the responsibility of the installer to add (safety, limit controls) that protect against, or systems (alarm, systems) that warn of control failure. And Installation Model DPS-50 may be mounted in any position on a at surface by screws or bolts through the holes in back of the case, or by use of the mounting bracket in an area protected from the weather. switch where vibration, shock and ambient temperature uctuations are mimimal. Be sure to connect the high pressure source the port labeled and the low pressure source to the port avoid damage to the control, always hold a wrench on the wrench ats of the pressure ports when tightening pressure connections. Never the pressure connections by turning the control into the tting. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5401034 – REV D 1 OF 2 differential pressure operating point of the switch can be to any point between 8 and 50 PSID by using the scale and turning the adjustment knob to the left to raise the pressure actuation point, and turning to the right to lower differential actuation point. The scale is calibrated for increasing pressure settings. The repeatability of the set operating is typically of the differential pressure range ( The change in set operating pressure due to change in ambient is typically less than 1% (based on the differential range) per 50 For best setting accuracy, make the nal with a pressure gauge and the actual working pressure in the application. Differential range (PSID) Differential Pressure Pressure Maximum Minimum Maximum Deadband (Differential to Reset) 3 SETTING KNOB TO LEFT TO RAISE DIFFERENTIAL POINT TURN

No text preview available.

Features Provides 50 user configurable LED outputs provides 6 system LeD outputs (power, earth Fault, Silenced, Supervisory, and Trouble) Provides Audible/PZT and 4 supervised dry contact inputs LeD outputs internally current limited, no external resistor Maximum 31 DRV-50s for: aFC-1000, p400/R, pFC-6800 Maximum 10 DRV-50s for: aFC-100/50, aRC-100, p300/200/100, pFC- PFC-4064 Maximum p-Link wire length is 6,500 feet product includes a 5 year warranty UUKL Listed for Smoke Control DRV-50 is a LeD driver module. The DRV-50 using a RS-485 (p-Link) connection to the providing 50 user configurable LED outputs and 4 dry contact inputs. DRV-50 is connected to the fire alarm control panels using four wire RS-485 (p-Link) connection. This connection is limited and supervised. The 50 programmable LED are located on connectors p1-p5, each containing LeD outputs and 2, 5VDC outputs. The system LeDs pZT control outputs are located on connector p6. The 4 dry-contact inputs are located on connector P7. input circuits are power limited and use a UL Listed 5.1k resistor (potter part #3005013). all outputs are power DRV-50 can be installed in the AE-2, AE-8, and AE-14 Enclosures. The DRV-50 can also be installed the pSN-1000e Intelligent power Supply and larger panel enclosures that include space for mounting bracket modules. UOXX.S2930 Specifications Current VDC) pWR Current VDC- 33 VDC) Panels ma (alarm) mA (Standby) mA (maximum Standby) ma (maximum alarm) Series Series Addressable Series* product LED PWR can be provided by any fire listed source. Output power be 16 VDC VDC, and must be power limited. Information Driver Module No. page 1 OF 1

LISTING No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — MISCELLANEOUS SIGNALING EQUIPMENT Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] LED-16 and *LED-16F 16 Zone LED Annunciator, Remote Annunciator Remote Annunciator Remote Annunciator Remote Annunciator Expander Expander Loop Expander RLY-5 5 Output Relay Board, DRV-50 50 Output LED Driver, FCB-1000 Fire Communications Bridge, FCB-1000RM Fire Communications Bridge Rack Mount, FIB-1000 Fiber Interface Bridge, FIB-1000RM Fiber Interface Bridge Rack Mount, SPG-1000 Serial/Parallel Printer Driver, SPG-1000RM Serial/Parallel Printer Driver Rack Mount to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as cited in the above description section for use with listee’s separately listed fire control panels. Refer to listee Installation Instruction Manual for details. 12-21-18 dcc listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

DSD-P DUct SMoKe DetectoR Detect Compatible No Cover Rugged Accessories Meets Description Electric Signal Company St. Louis, MO, 63042 Phone: 866-956-1211/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com in U.S.A. #8840015 – REV D 1 OF 2 DUct SMoKe DetectoR

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HOUSING/BASE Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] DSD-I, DSD-P, ADSD-P and ADSD-PR duct smoke detector units. Each unit of a smoke detector head. The smoke detector heads are not suitable for use as area detection. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description operational considerations. VAC, 230 VAC, 24 VAC and 24 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, electrical rating and UL label. as duct smoke detector units for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units to detect an abnormal amount of smoke density in the return air ducts of air and ventilating system. The air velocity in the duct shall be between 300-4000 duct application only. Not suitable for open area protection. listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

A Brand RANGE DOOR SYSTEM Intelligent microprocessor driven system 40 ft. detection range across doorway Four user selectable chime sounds Advanced circuit integrated with active-infrared beam technology High/low volume control Expandable using additional chimes (CM-5) number: 4130030 EBP-401 is a surface mount, 40 ft., long range annunciator system using active infrared technology. This invisible single infrared beam triggers a chime sound when the infrared beam is interrupted. The system can be installed anywhere inside the buildings where traffic surveillance is required. Kit Includes: Electronic chime Infrared sensor Reflector Power transformer (12V AV 20VA) Long plastic bracket Metal short bracket Short plastic bracket 6 ft. power cord with in-line switch 26 ft. 2-conductor wires 3/4 sheet metal screws 3/8 bolt w/locking washer 5/8 machine screws w/washers and nuts Manual ft Wires 20VA) Plastic Short ft Power Cords In-line ON/ Switch Diagram Switch AC N P U T +12V SEL. White/Black :White Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850053 – REV B 2/10 ON/OFF 1 OF 2 Brand necessary, use cable ties keep wires safely out of way to avoid tripping. RANGE DOOR SYSTEM LED LIGHTS UP THE REFLECT OR IS SUCCESSFUL. Bolt Screw Short Bracket Plastic Bracket Mount Washer Washer Mount Information method range transmission range source consumption: Standby consumption: In alarm level sounds selection sounds level selection time source location beam interception warning setting Range Wired Annunciator System infrared ft. ft. AWG#22 2P wire 12V AC/DC, 20VA Chime: 12V DC, 10VA 50mA Chime: 100mA – Chime: 500mA (low) – 95dB (high) among 4 sounds by a dip SW (Jumper SHORT LOW Jumper OPEN HIGH) sec. pulse beam 950mm JP1 selectable OFF/10 sec/60 secretary Power ON – Red Alignment LED ON – Transformer OFF – Transformer Power ON – Setting switch Dimension: (W x H x D) – 122 (-10 – 50 125g 164.4g 2 1/2 x 1 7/8 x 3 7/16 4 7/8 x 3 1/2 x 1 3/8 IN USA #8850053 – REV B 2 OF 2

XIT

A Brand ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM Microprocessor driven system Independent entry/exit counters 20 ft. detection range across doorway Resettable 4-digit digital counter (up to 9999) Distinctive entry/exit chime sound Electrically erasable memory (EEPROM) Selectable detection range 10 ft. min., 20 ft. max. Chime volume control Expandable using additional chimes (CM-4) Door bell feature using optional call button (AES-1) number :4130015 EBP-407C annunciator system is designed with a superior dual-counter, dual-active, infrared technology. The invisible infrared beam designed to trigger a pleasant chime sound. The infrared signal differentiates among entry and exit. The dual entry/exit counter registers a any time the beams are interrupted. Each event is counted, recorded, and registered by the built-in digital counter, and can be viewed and later in entry/exit modes. Kit Includes: Infrared beam sensor with dual counters Electonic chime with volume chime Reflector Power transformer (XF-1220 UL/CSA approved) Long plastic bracket Metal short bracket Short plastic brackets 6 ft. power cord with in-line switch 26 ft. 4-conductor chime wire (AWG #24) Screws for mounting chime Screws for securing mounting brackets 3/8 bolt with locking washer to secure infrared beam sensor inches (mm) Beam Sensor (EBPT-407) Chime 3-35/64 5 4-59/64 1-1/2 Range Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850054 – REV C 1 OF 2 Brand Method Range Detection Mode Infrared Beam Sound dB Output Source (-) (+) (OC) (IC) Distance Be- Transceiver and Consumption Consumption (In Input Tem- Range = Factory Setting Trans- Infrared ft. JP2 = ON 20 JP2 = OFF (f.s.) Selective right left entry (f.s.: Selective 10 sec/OFF (f.s.: sec) Pulse Beam Output DC 1A Output Output (-) TR 1A Output (-) TR 1A (AC) Output DC Input Signal Input Signal Input ft – AWG#22 ft – AWG#20 ft – AWG#18 (DC) Amp (AC) (DC) AC/20 VA 14 – 140 – 60 DC/10 VA 14 – 140 – 60 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM Chime (optional) Connector 4-conductor cable AC 20VA Diagram 12V OUTPUT Normal Reverse +V OC IC 10S 60S – min. SEL. LEVELS AES-1 BUTTON IN USA #8850054 – REV C 2 OF 2

firealarmresources.com

EFT-C ELECTRIC FIRE ALARM Listed and FM Approved 12 5/16″H x 8 5/16″W x 3 5/8″D H x 21,1cm W x 9,2cm D 9 lbs. (4,05 kg.) 18GA CRS – Finish: Red enamel ferrous metal parts painted, or the equivalent to resist Ratings: Relay – 3 Amps, 250V AC or 30VDC Trouble Relay – 3 Amps, 250V AC 30VDC Ratings: Contacts: Limited Energy at 150V DC Input: – 12V AC, 10VA Min. Listed Class II Requirements: 6V – 1.0AH 60 second retard for waterflow alarm devices. Trouble Relay Stock No. 5190147 Model ULT Stock No. 1000391 (if by authority having Model EFT-C is an electric motor driven for use on McCulloh type signal adjustment on the circuit board provides motor speed adjustment from 1 to 4 pulses per second. transmitter provides a Class A supervised circuit for connection of NORMALLY devices such as heat sensor thermo- smoke and ionization detectors, alarm switches and manual pull sta- The EFT-C utilizes an external low voltage transformer. A built in battery charger the battery which provides in excess 72 hours of standby operation. A low battery circuit insures battery integrity. SPDT alarm contacts are provided and an plug-in relay is available to provide trouble contacts. An electronic retard approximately 60 seconds delay on alarm transmission if desired (see 1, Fig. 2). One round trouble signal indicates low battery or open detection circuit. condition indicated by yellow LED on board. reset switch to restore from trouble to normal when cause of trouble con- has been corrected. Four round alarm signal when Class A circuit is shorted by detection device round alarm signal from trouble condi- Alarm condition indicated by red LED. One round restore signal from to normal is automatic when short is from Class A detection circuit. Electric Signal Company (cid:127) 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 (cid:127) Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 (cid:127) www.pottersignal.com IN USA #5400748 REV H (cid:127) MKT. #8860002 (cid:127) 9-01 1 OF 4 ELECTRIC FIRE ALARM Connect detector loop. Activate reset switch. Transmitter will run to condition. Red and yellow LED off. If transmitter will not run to the NORMAL check for open or grounded detec- loop. Check for low battery (battery must at least 6 volts). If transmitter runs and stops in ALARM condi- (red LED on), check for short circuit detector loops. Connect central office line, earth ground and per Fig. 2. 1 CODE WHEEL REMOVAL AND CODING Mount EFT-C Coding the Transmitter: Code wheel must be removed, code and code wheel and bracket reinstalled any power is applied to the transmitter. Remove code wheel and metal bracket under wheel. Cut code wheel to desired code. Place hole in bracket over emblem on of code wheel (recessed area – see 1). Reinstall code wheel and bracket. The tab must be centered in the slot in opto device on the circuit board (see 2). Hold code wheel and bracket in this position tighten mounting nut. Pull tamper switch plunger to deactivate tamper. Connect POSITIVE (red) battery lead to terminal Connect NEGATIVE (black) battery lead to ter- #22. The transmitter will run and stop in condition. Yellow LED on. Connect 12V AC from plug in transformer to 7 and 8. Activate tamper. Transmitter will transmit one trouble signal. Yellow LED will come on TROUBLE condition. Activate a detector in the Class A detection The transmitter will transmit a three alarm signal. Red LED will come on ALARM condition. Pull tamper switch plunger to deactivate NORMAL condition. Activate a detector in the Class A detection The transmitter will transmit a 4 round signal. Red LED will come on indicating condition. Restore detector in the Class A detectio

Features Nominal Horn Documented temperature Information includes a 5 year warranty 1 OF 3 Switch Locations Bracket Instant Voltage 2 OF 3

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] EH24 horn and Model HS24 and HS24-177 horn strobes. May be followed by -W and -W or -R (white or red) or -P plain. Refer to listee’s data sheet for additional product and operational considerations. VDC No. Wall: 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 110cd (selectable) accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical ratings and UL label. as horn and horn/strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control For indoor use only. The audible in Model EH24 and HS24 may produce distinctive including: mechanical, 2400Hz and chime tones in continuous and temporal 3 settings well as a whoop tone in either a high or low dBA setting. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

A Brand SERIES ALERT Extremely quiet on standby Operates on 5V DC – 28V DC Rated at 20mA operating current at 24V DC Multi-functional mounting method Lead wire type or screw terminal type Piezo-A-Lert Model ESZ-25 and ESZ-26 are specially designed as advanced electronic audible signaling devices that are extremely on stand-by, emitting less extraneous noises because they have no oscillator coils in their electronic circuits. Both ESZ-25 and ESZ-26 an extremely loud sound output. piezo type buzzers are energized piezo electric transducers operating at a resonance in a solid state oscillator, but ESZ-25 and ESZ-26 have completely different design. Both units operate on as little as 5V DC to as much as 28V DC and are rated at 20mA operating current at 24V DC. ESZ-25 and ESZ-26 are quiet on standby and because of this they are highly recommended for use on microcomputer electronic equipment. microelectronic computer equipment is very sensitive to extraneous noises, the ESZ Series Piezo Alarms are excellent choices for security requirements. ESZ-25 and ESZ-26 have a multi-functional mounting method. By simply unscrewing the face nut it can be inserted into any standard hole. By screwing the nut back in place, there will be a solid mounting. On the base, located on either side, are two loops. Inserting in these loops will allow the device to be surface mounted. The two loops may be cut off if not required. Piezo-A-Lert signal operates in free air only. It is not compatible with under water applications. The recommended operating temperature is -4 to 140 (-20 to 60 ESZ-25S has a single continuous tone sound. The ESZ-25B and ESZ-26B have a dual-tone, continuous, or intermittent sound in one unit. dual-tone unit has an override protection. The continuous tone will override the intermittent tone if both tones are sounded at the same time. ESZ-25 is the lead wire type and Model ESZ-26 is equipped with screw terminals. Information Voltage Current Voltage Length Output at 3V inches (mm) or single or – 28V DC max. at 24V DC DC max. Model ESZ-25 @ 1 ft. @ 1 ft. @ 1 ft. @ 1 ft. @ 1 ft. 1/2 (56.8) (48.5) VIEW 1/2 (56.8) (48.5) 1/2 (41) 1/2 (35) 1/2 (35) + ) ( – ) ( + ) Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8900116 – REV B-1 1 OF 1

EVD-1 VIBRATION SYSTEM x 3.26″W x 1.20″D H x 8,3cm W x 3,0cm D) and ULC Listed EVD-1 0.64 lbs. (0,29 kg) Die-cast aluminum Stamped Steel, 22 Gauge Input: VDC to 16.0 VDC, 12 VDC Nominal 0.1 V ripple If the EVD is going to be powered by auxiliary power of a burglar panel, and the panel has ground fault detection, it may be to power the EVD from a separate UL 12 VDC power supply. Alternately, the safe be insulated from ground. Current: (Supply Voltage 12.0 VDC) Standby Condition: 26 mA Condition: 24 mA Condition: 34 mA model RTA connected, add 10 mA in Tamper and 10 mA in Alarm Condition. Current: (Supply Voltage 16.0 VDC) Standby Condition: 26 mA Condition: 24 mA Condition: 34 mA model RTA connected, add 14 mA in Tamper and 14 mA in Alarm Condition. No. Information Detector Safe Pak EVD-1 Detector Security Safe Contact Equipment: Remote Test Annunciator Security Cable ( Cable) equipment required for UL safe complete installation. EVD-1 is a stand-alone detector. For applications more than one detector, the EVD-2 may be more For more information on the EVD-2 system, bulletin no. 8870015. Data: Relay: Form C, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC Contact: Form A, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC Information EVD-1, Electronic Vibration Detector, is listed by Underwriters Inc. for primary protection of Mercantile or Bank, safe vault, ATM machines and supplementary protection of interior units as le cabinets, display cases, walls and ceilings. The detector must used with an appropriate UL listed control unit. Detects all common threats to safes and vaults Sophisticated signal processing provides unprecedented sensitivity false alarms Low cost, stand alone system Reliable, sensitive piezo sensor technology Integral, multi-color status LED Built in test circuit Remote test and annunciator capabilities Supervised microprocessor Independent tamper output On board test point facilitates installation and service Built in accumulator Controller EVD-1 controller detects short duration, large amplitude signals those produced in attacks from explosions, hammering or It also detects long duration, small amplitude signals like produced in attacks from torches, thermic lances, drills, grinders cutting discs. As soon as the EVD-1 detects a large amplitude alarm it signals an alarm. Construction Requirements 1. Maximum Linear Distances from Detector to Any Point the Protected Surface Construction Linear From to Any Point Pickup RV1 inches Safes Minimum 1/4″ Minimum 1/2″ Safes Minimum 16 steel over 3″ material minimum steel over 3″ material The Number Of Detectors For A Safe Application to column one in Table 1 for the type of the safe in the application. column two nd the maximum linear distance from a detector to any on the protected surface. This distance is the detector range. Next, to column one, (for steel safes), or column two, (for composite in Table 2. Find the range of distances based upon the detector inches Electric Signal Company St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870016 – REV M 1 OF 3 that corresponds to the safe in the application. Using the row of this range of distances, determine the number of detectors from column (if safe has a single door), or from column four, (if safe has double doors). For applications with a larger distance than that shown in Table consult Potter technical support for assistance. VIBRATION SYSTEM D=Maximum Linear Distance Safe Construction: Minimum 1/4″

EVD-1 Operation, and Manual Vibration System speci cations subject to revision.) Controller (optional) ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, LLC Louis, MO 956-1211 (314) 595-6900 FAX (314) 595-6999 #5401043 – Rev N 5401043 REV M 9/07 INFORMATION essential purpose of any sale or contract for sale of any of the products listed in the POTTER catalog or list is the furnishing of that product. It is expressly understood that in furnishing said product, POTTER not agree to insure the Purchaser against any losses the Purchaser may incur, even if resulting from the of said product. warrants that the equipment herein shall conform to said descriptions as to all af rmation of fact shall be free from defects of manufacture, labeling and packaging for a period of one (1), three (3), or ve (5) year depending on the product, from the invoice date to the original purchaser, provided that samples are returned to POTTER for inspection. The product warranty period is stated on exterior of the product package. Upon a determination by POTTER that a product is not as warranted, shall, at its exclusive option, replace or repair said defective product or parts thereof at its own except that Purchaser shall pay all shipping, insurance and similar charges incurred in connection the replacement of the defective product or parts thereof. This Warranty is void in the case of abuse, abnormal usage, faulty installation or repair by unauthorized persons, or if for any other reason determines that said product is not operating properly as a result of causes other than defective labeling or packaging. Aforesaid Warranty Is Expressly Made In Lieu Of Any Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, It Understood That All Such Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, Including The Warranties Merchantability And Fitness For Particular Purpose Are Hereby Expressly Excluded. In No Event Potter Be Liable To Purchaser For Any Direct, Collateral, Incidental Or Consequential Damages Connection With Purchaser Use Of Any Of The Products Listed Herein, Or For Any Other Cause Relating To The Said Products. Neither Potter Nor Its Representatives Shall Be Liable To The Or Anyone Else For Any Liability, Claim, Loss, Damage Or Expense Of Any Kind, Or Direct Incidental Or Consequential Damages Relative To Or Arising From Or Caused Directly Or By Said Products Or The Use Thereof Or Any De ciency, Defect Or Inadequacy Of The Said It Is Expressly Agreed That Purchaser Exclusive Remedy For Any Cause Of Action Relating To Purchase And/or Use Of Any Of The Products Listed Herein From Potter Shall Be For Damages, And Liability For Any And All Losses Or Damages Resulting From Any Cause Whatsoever, Including Or Other Fault, Shall In No Event Exceed The Purchase Price Of The Product In Respect To The Claim Is Made, Or At The Election Of Potter, The Restoration Or Replacement Or Repair Of Such ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, LLC Louis, MO (866) 956-1211 (314) 595-6900 FAX (314) 595-6999 www.pottersignal.com 5401043 REV M 9/07 Information cations Information Controller Function Controller Details Terminal Connections Wiring Wire Types Wiring EVD-1 Controller Control Panel Wiring and RTA Connections Wiring with Safe Detector Zone and 24 Hour Alarm Zone Wiring with Safe Detector Zone Only Adjustments Test Point Levels Construction Requirements Detector Locations the Number of Detectors for a Safe Application the Maximum Linear Distance on a Safe Safe Exterior Dimensions and Maximum Linear Distances UL Complete Safe Installations UL Complete Vault Installations Wall Protection Wall Protection Installation Maximum EVD-1 Spacing for W

EVD-2 VIBRATION SYSTEM and EVD-R) x 3.26″W x 1.20″D H x 8,3cm W x 3,0cm D) and ULC Listed Input: 9.0 VDC to 16.0 VDC, 12 VDC Nominal EVD-M 0.64 lbs. (0,29 kg) EVD-R 0.62 lbs. (0,28 kg) Base: Die-cast aluminum Cover: Stamped Steel, 22 Gauge 0.1 V ripple If the EVD is going to be powered by the power of a burglar panel, and the burglar has ground fault detection, it may be necessary power the EVD from a separate UL listed 12 VDC supply. Alternately, the safe may be insulated ground. Current: (Supply Voltage 12.0 VDC) With model RTA connected, add 10 mA in Tamper Condition and Standby Condition: 34 mA Condition: 33 mA Condition: 41 mA additional EVD-R Remote Pickup adds (approx.) 3 mA mA in Alarm Condition. Current: (Supply Voltage 16.0 VDC) With model RTA connected, add 14 mA in Tamper Condition and Standby Condition: 36 mA Condition: 33 mA Condition: 43 mA mA in Alarm Condition. Data: Alarm Relay: Form C, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC Contact: Form A, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC torches, thermic lances, drills, grinders or cutting discs. As soon as the detects a large amplitude alarm source it signals an alarm. EVD-M controller supports up to 15 EVD-R remote pickups, (or may used as a stand alone unit), and fully supervises EVD-R wiring. Construction Requirements 1. Maximum linear distances from detector to any point on the protected surface the number of detectors for a safe application Construction Linear Distance Detector to Any Point Safes Body: Minimum 1/4″ Door: Minimum 1/2″ Safes Minimum 16 gauge steel 3″ composite material minimum 1/4″ steel over 3″ material inches inches to column one in Table 1 for the type of the safe in the In column two find the maximum linear distance from detector to any point on the protected surface. This distance is No. Information System Of: EVD-M Controller EVD-R Remote Pickup Safe/Vault Pak HSC-1 High security safe contact Equipment: Remote Test Annunciator Security Cable ( Cable) For one detector applications order 1 EVD-M controller. equipment is required for UL safe complete installation. Information EVD-2, Electronic Vibration Detector System, is listed by Laboratories, Inc. for primary protection of Mercantile Bank, safe or vault, ATM machines and supplementary protection of units such as file cabinets, display cases, walls and ceilings. The must be used with an appropriate UL listed control unit. standard EVD-2 system consists of a model EVD-M controller and model EVD-R remote pickup. Detects all common threats to safes and vaults. Sophisticated signal processing provides unprecedented sensitivity false alarms. Expandable system allows up to 15 remote pickups, (Model EVD-R). Reliable, sensitive piezo sensor technology. On board high security safe contact interface. Integral, multi-color status LED. Built in test circuit on both controller and remote pickups. Remote test and annunciator capabilities. Supervised microprocessor. Independent tamper output. On board test point facilitates installation and service. Built in accumulator. Controller EVD-M controller detects short duration, large amplitude signals like produced in attacks from explosions, hammering or chiseling. It also long duration, small amplitude signals like those produced in attacks Electric Signal Company St. Louis, MO Phone: 866-956-1211/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870015 – REV J 1 OF 3 VIBRATION SYSTEM of Detectors for Coverage Single Door Safes of Detectors for Coverage Double Door Safes Linear from to Any Point

EVD-2 Operation, and Manual Vibration System speci cations subject to revision.) Controller Pickup (optional) ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, LLC Louis, MO 956-1211 (314) 595-6900 FAX (314) 595-6999 #5401042 – Rev N 5401042 REV N 6/09 INFORMATION essential purpose of any sale or contract for sale of any of the products listed in the POTTER catalog or list is the furnishing of that product. It is expressly understood that in furnishing said product, POTTER not agree to insure the Purchaser against any losses the Purchaser may incur, even if resulting from the of said product. warrants that the equipment herein shall conform to said descriptions as to all af rmation of fact shall be free from defects of manufacture, labeling and packaging for a period of one (1), three (3), or ve (5) year depending on the product, from the invoice date to the original purchaser, provided that samples are returned to POTTER for inspection. The product warranty period is stated on exterior of the product package. Upon a determination by POTTER that a product is not as warranted, shall, at its exclusive option, replace or repair said defective product or parts thereof at its own except that Purchaser shall pay all shipping, insurance and similar charges incurred in connection the replacement of the defective product or parts thereof. This Warranty is void in the case of abuse, abnormal usage, faulty installation or repair by unauthorized persons, or if for any other reason determines that said product is not operating properly as a result of causes other than defective labeling or packaging. Aforesaid Warranty Is Expressly Made In Lieu Of Any Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, It Understood That All Such Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, Including The Warranties Merchantability And Fitness For Particular Purpose Are Hereby Expressly Excluded. In No Event Potter Be Liable To Purchaser For Any Direct, Collateral, Incidental Or Consequential Damages Connection With Purchaser Use Of Any Of The Products Listed Herein, Or For Any Other Cause Relating To The Said Products. Neither Potter Nor Its Representatives Shall Be Liable To The Or Anyone Else For Any Liability, Claim, Loss, Damage Or Expense Of Any Kind, Or Direct Incidental Or Consequential Damages Relative To Or Arising From Or Caused Directly Or By Said Products Or The Use Thereof Or Any De ciency, Defect Or Inadequacy Of The Said It Is Expressly Agreed That Purchaser Exclusive Remedy For Any Cause Of Action Relating To Purchase And/or Use Of Any Of The Products Listed Herein From Potter Shall Be For Damages, And Liability For Any And All Losses Or Damages Resulting From Any Cause Whatsoever, Including Or Other Fault, Shall In No Event Exceed The Purchase Price Of The Product In Respect To The Claim Is Made, Or At The Election Of Potter, The Restoration Or Replacement Or Repair Of Such ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, LLC Louis, MO (866) 956-1211 (314) 595-6900 FAX (314) 595-6999 www.pottersignal.com 5401042 REV N 6/09 Information cations Information Controller Function Controller Details Terminal Connections Remote Pickup of Line Resistor Locations Remote Pickup Details Terminal Connections Wiring EVD-2 System Wiring Wire Types Control Panel Wiring and RTA Connections Wiring with Safe Detector Zone and 24 hr Alarm Zone Wiring with Safe Detector Zone Only Adjustments Test Point Levels Detector Locations the Number of Detectors for a Safe Application the Maximum Linear Distance on a Safe Safe Exterior Dimensions and Maximum Linear Distances UL Complete Safe Installations UL Complete Vault Installations

ELECTRONIC VIBRATION DETECTOR LISTED 12 1/4″H x 8 3/8″W x 3 1/8″D H x 21,3cm W x 7,9 cm D 8 lbs., 3,6 kg. 18 Gauge – Cold Rolled Steel Input: 12VAC, 20VA, 60Hz Voltage: 6VDC Current: 20mA Current: 25mA Ratings: Alarm Relay and Tamper Switch Amp at 28VDC Amp at 130VDC Equipment: An APC, Accumulator Pulse is available for use in applications where signals may cause false alarms. Mounts in housing. (See Bulletin No. 5400740.) and an alarm indicator (red LED) for subscriber of the EVD-S System. Terminals are also provided connection of a remote test unit, Model PTU-B, and/or of dry contacts from any Underwriters Laborato- Listed central station test unit. 2 to 15 pickup units may be connected to the EVD-C in series supervised pickup loop. The supervision of the pickup is maintained by a factory adjusted DC differential circuit, makes a compromise attempt of the pickup loop more PICKUP UNIT EVD-P pickup units detect sound vibrations in the material. These signals are fed to the amplifier where the pickup loop sensitivity control determines the level necessary to create an alarm condition. A Model resistor assembly must be installed in the last EVD- pickup units are housed in a 4 1/4″H x 3″W x 1 1/4″D enclosure with cover and back tampers and are to be with the speaker opening against the protected EVD-C EVD-P UNITS INFORMATION EVD-S, Electronic Vibration Detector System, is listed Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for primary protection of or Bank, safe or vault and supplementary protec- of interior units such as file cabinets, display cases, and ceilings. The System must be used with an UL listed control unit. PROCESSOR UNIT amplifier unit, model EVD-C, provides SPDT alarm for connection into the alarm protective circuit. The is housed in a metal cabinet protected by a cover and a housing vibration detector. The housing is provided with a housing sensitivity control. low voltage plug-in transformer and a regulated battery circuit maintain the standby battery at a fully state. auxiliary output is provided to power the APC-B (accu- option) when required. The battery provides in of 80 hours standby operation even if the maximum auxiliary output is utilized. EVD-C provides an AC on indicator (green LED), a test Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 (cid:127) Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 (cid:127) www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870001 – REV M #5400736 – 7/99 1 OF 6 VIBRATION DETECTOR CERTIFICATED SAFE APPLICATIONS following conditions must be met to qualify for an Underwriters Laboratories complete safe certificate: A minimum of 2 EVD-P pickup units required for all applications (see exception). COMMERCIAL BURGLARY SAFES must be constructed of a minimum 1/4″ steel for the body of the safe and 1/2″ for door. Burglary safes exceeding 20 cubic feet in size must have an additional EVD-P pickup for every additional 10 feet. COMMERCIAL FIRE SAFES exceeding 44 cubic feet in size must have an additional EVD-P pickup for every additional cubic feet. (EXCEPTION) UL LISTED TRTL and TXTL SAFES: One pickup may provide protection for a safe not exceeding 36 cubic An additional pickup unit is required for each additional 36 cubic feet or portion thereof. SAFES Cu Ft less Cu Ft less Cu Ft less Cu Ft less Cu Ft less Cu Ft less Cu Ft less EVD-P for each 10 Cu Ft EVD-P for each 22 Cu Ft EVD-P for each 36 Cu Ft (SEE FIGS. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7) device must be installed in accordance with all applicable local codes. Battery must be charged for 48 hours before unit into service. Mount EVD-C. Mount pickup units and wire according to installation drawing. See Figs. 2 and 4 for connection of remote test unit Model PTU-B and/or central station test unit, if applicable. Connect BLACK battery lead to NEGATIVE battery post and RED battery lead to POSITIVE battery post. Plug transformer to unswitc

SUPERCEDES: REVISION DATED AUGUST 1, 2004 B Sheet Water Feeder NOVEMBER 10, 2004 UL GUIDE (MBPR) for Limit Controls per UL Standard Limit Controls CUL per CSA Standard C22.2 No. 24-93 for tempera- indicating and regulating equipment. Connections: 3/8″ FNPT or 3/8 NPT to 1/2″ copper (included) Type 1 (For indoor use only.) Formed sheet metal powder coat/plated finish. Five openings for 1/2″ fittings. (Not for use in hazardous locations.) Inlet Pressure: PSI (10.5kg/cm2) Outlet (Boiler) Pressure: PSI (1kg/cm2) Media Temperature: F (71 C) Pending Ambient Temperature: (38 Rate: gpm (3.8 lpm) Choices: Mode, Fixed Feed, or Manual Feed Protection Lockout Feed Indicator 24 VAC to be supplied by an EXTERNAL Class 2 power source Electric Water Feeder (EWF), is an electronics based feeder for steam boilers. The EWF monitors the output a Low Water Cutoff (LWCO). When the LWCO detects a water condition, it signals the EWF, which initiates a cycle. Since the EWF is fully programmable, it can as long as the low water cutoff detects a low water (LWCO mode) or fixed feed amounts. In addition, EWF allows the user to set Delays Before Feeding (DBF), Mode the mode switch of S1 (See fig. 9a) is set to the ON the EWF will operate in LWCO mode. This causes EWF to feed water whenever the LWCO signals a low condition. Both the Delay Before Feeding (DBF), and Hold After Water OK (HAW), settings may be set in LWCO As soon as the EWF receives a low water signal from LWCO, the EWF starts feeding water to the boiler after DBF delay expires, if enabled. The EWF continues water to the boiler until the LWCO signals that the condition is normal and any HAW delay expires. If the feeds 10 gallons, Flood Protection Lockout occurs and stops immediately and a red LED is illuminated. hold delays after the low water cutoff signals water is (HAW). The EWF also includes a programmable feed indicator, (patent pending). The EWF blinks this after it has fed more than a settable number of gallons the boiler over the past 30 days. This will help identify that may need maintenance. Feed the mode switch of S1 is set to the OFF position, the will operate in Fixed Feed, (FF), mode. While in this the EWF will feed the number of gallons set by switch (See fig. 9a & c). While in Fixed Feed mode, only DBF may be used. HAW settings only apply to LWCO After a feed cycle completes, if the LWCO still signals low water condition, the EWF will start another feed cycle. If EWF completes the second feed cycle and the LWCO still a low water condition, the EWF will enter the Flood Lockout and a red LED is illuminated. the LWCO signals a normal water while the EWF is feeding a fixed the EWF will NOT stop feeding the number of gallons set at DIP S3 has been fed to the boiler. Be S3 is set to feed the correct amount water. or property damage may result. Feed Manual Feed button on the EWF allows the user to feed water to the boiler system as long as the user the button. Up to 5 gallons may be manually fed before the EWF automatically closes the feed If the EWF automatically closes the feed valve, the Feed button must be released and re-pressed to feed more water. Manually fed water counts Excess Feed settings. Feed Indication Feed/Status Indicator will be rapidly blinking amber the EWF has dispensed more water over the past 30 than the setting of the Excess Feed switch (S4). and holding switch S5 will reset the Excess Feed See Fig. 2 for location of Excess Feed Reset Once this reset button is pressed and held for 2 the EWF briefly turns off the Feed/Status Indicator reset has occurred. Once the EWF completes the UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING 1 process, the Feed/Status Indicator will resume its state. Once the EWF is installed and the system is with water, reset the Excess Feed Condition to start operation of the system. Protection Lockout the EWF

EWP-202C ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM Advanced dual-infrared beam and superior wireless technology Wireless multi-function receiver Dual channel receiver with status LED 20 ft. detection range across doorway Independent entry/exit counters 200 ft. wireless RF transmission in open field 2 selective chime sounds per channel Chime volume control Resettable 6-digit counter (up to 999999) Power failure memory back-up Wireless push-button included 16 million I.D. codes system EWP-202C is a two channel wireless annunciator system designed with a superior dual counter and active infrared technology. It delivers pleasant chime along with a recorded count. It emits a continuous, invisible dual beam across the doorway to the reflector. When either beam interrupted, it announces the entrance or exit of customers with a pleasant, distinguishable chime sound. Each event is counted, recorded, and by the built-in digital counter and can be viewed and compared later in both modes. The annunciator is also equipped with an alert that sounds the built-in siren when triggered, adding additional security. This is ideal for malls, office buildings, liquor stores, warehouses, structures, medical offices, and more. Brand number: 4130003 Kit Includes: Infrared sensor/transmitter Wireless receiver with built-in chime and counter Wireless push-button Reflector Power transformers (12V AC 20VA) Long plastic bracket Short metal bracket Short plastic brackets 6 ft. power cords with in-line switch 3/4 sheet metal screws 1/2 bolt with locking washer 1 1/4 machine screws with washer and nut 1/2 sheet metal screws Receiver count on all incoming and outgoing customers and retains in memory. Range Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850052 – REV B 1 OF 2 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM Mode restricted, unauthorized areas after hours by simply changing setting on your receiver from CHIME to ALERT MODE. This provides a programmable entry/exit delay (30 or 60 seconds) a 50 second audible alarm when triggered. The EWP-202C alarm output allows you to connect to any security control panel or a number of other devices such as: video event recorder, self- siren, bell box, strobe, or any other device designed for signaling to provide additional security. to Security Devices Box (ABB-1031) (SL-401) Supply DC 1A (SSX-51) Recorder Central Panel Brand Sensor/ Infrared ft. JP2 = ON 20 ft. = OFF (f.s.) Push- Transmission Range Source ft. Open Field AC 20 VA ft. Open Field DC Included AC 20VA Switch: 2 Switch: 1 Method Range Consumption Consumption Activation) Control Sounds Selectable Time Source Terminal (-) Terminal Output Terminal (OC) Terminal (IC) 1 & 2 3 4 Time Sound Sound ON/OFF Direction Infrared Warning Memory Range = Factory Setting Amp Pulse 950nm Mhz DC 1A Output (-) Output 1A Output (-) Output 1A AC Input ON = Min OFF = Max Selectable Selective: – 122 – 50 AC Input Dry Contact (2 sec) Dry Contact (2 sec) ON = 30 sec OFF = 60 se

DESCRIPTION 1 9 ) INFRARED SENSOR/TRANSMITTER OPERATION (EWPT-202) INFRARED SENSOR/TRANSMITTER OPERATION (EWPT-202) 9 ) 1

Smoke Detection 2000 EExd Proof Beam Smoke Detector 2000 EExd system ideally suited to protect large areas potentially explosive atmospheres, protection against smoking fires be provided by this beam. 2000 EExd an infrared and a receiver, both of which are ATEX-certified for use in 2 hazardous areas. There is a separate, safe area, wall-mounted low level control unit to allow adjustment and testing from a non-hazardous location. product is designed for large enclosures with oil rigs, refineries, explosion-proof Transmitter and Receiver units stores, waste water treatment plants, and similar premises. It Strength indicating LED an early warning of smoldering smoke generated fires, some which may not be picked up by flame detectors installed in many areas. For installations complying with UL268/NFPA72, the distance of Detector and Reflector from the ceiling must be 33ft. to 330ft. (10m to 100m) set up and alignment test switch of the distance between floor and ceiling. with ATEX and EN54:12 Detection smoke is present in the beam path, the received signal is reduced by level determined by the density of the smoke. If the smoke reduces VDC or 24 VDC operation selectable fire alarm thresholds: 25%, 35% or 50% latching or auto reset Gain Control (AGC) alarm and trouble relay contacts Level Control unit using wall bracket 1/2 conduit knock-outs on controller. threaded on TX/RX. signal strength to between the obscuration threshold and 93% for 10 seconds, the fire alarm relay is activated. The alarm may be set to 25%, 35% or 50% to suit the installation. Specification projected beam type smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 12/24 VDC to be used with a separately supplied 4-wire control panel. The shall consist of an integrated transmitter and receiver. The detector operate between the range of 33ft to 330ft (10m to 100m). The range of the beam shall be -4 to +131 (-20 to The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control which compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation the lens. The beam detector shall be ATEX Certified, comply with and meet EExd IIB T6 temperature range requirements. The shall include one wall mount alignment bracket. Testing shall be out by using a calibration test filter. The projected beam smoke shall be a FFE Ltd. EExd. 2000 EExd Wall Bracket 2000 EExd Specification – Double pressed sheet steel – grade aluminum alloy & Approvals Directive 94/9/EC & CPD ref 0786-CPD-20196 Rating: IP50, Transmitter/Receiver IP66 – 2243 2 G D IP6X EEx d IIB T6 (Tamb = -20 to +55 (210mm) (88mm) – White RAL9010 Red RAL 2002 – 2.4 lbs (1.1 kg) mounting brackets) – 8.8 lbs. (4 kg.) Controller – 8.5 W x 10.3 H x 3.5 D W x 260mm H x 88mm D) (excluding mounting – 4.8 W x 4.8 H x 4.8 D W x 124mm H x 121mm D) Outs: Controller – 7×1/2 – M-10 Threaded Specification Input Power: to 28 VDC Fuse in Control unit Current: @ 24VDC Current: @ 24 VDC Contacts: at 30 VDC, resistive Time: Seconds maximum Up Time: Seconds Wavelength: 35%, 50% Alarm Thresholds: 1.25dB (25%), 1.87dB (35%), 3dB (50%) Rating: to +131 (-20 to +55 Humidity: to 93% RH non-condensing Range: ft. – 330 ft. (10

Fireray 3000 Infrared Beam Smoke Detector Fireray 3000 End to End Infra-red Optical Beam Smoke Detector has been designed using the latest optical technology, modern industrial, electronic and software techniques. This offers cost effective protection of large, open area spaces with ceilings. It is also very suited to applications where access to ceiling Fireray 3000 is ideal for applications where line of sight for the IR detection path is narrow and where the building structure and thus can equally suit modern architectural buildings as well as sites, particularly where ornate ceilings exist. projected beam type smoke detector shall be listed to U.L. 268 and consist of up to two transmitters, two receivers and a single low level control unit. The detector shall operate between a range of 16.5 ft. 393 ft. (5m to 120m). The temperature range of the system shall be -4 131 (-20 to 55 The receiver shall include an integral built-in laser to assist in optimum alignment. beam detector shall feature automatic gain control, which will for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on the The receiver heads shall incorporate a Wide Field of View to ensure unit is always receiving maximum signal available. The system shall a low level remote display and control unit with LCD read-out for reporting and testing of up to 2 separate sets of heads. The system be capable of sending separate Trouble and Alarm signals for each the sets of heads. The system shall be capable of programming alarm of 25% to 60% in 1% increments. The system shall be capable programming delay to fault and delay to alarm from 2 seconds to 30 in 1 second increments. and acceptance of the system shall be carried out by using the UL/ smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 24VDC device to be used with a Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed and separately supplied wire control panel. The End to End beam type smoke detector shall be a Ltd. Fireray 3000. Detection Detector Pack Separate Transmitter and Receiver Heads (cid:53)(cid:68)(cid:81)(cid:74)(cid:72)(cid:3)(cid:20)(cid:25)(cid:17)(cid:24)(cid:3)(cid:87)(cid:82)(cid:3)(cid:22)(cid:28)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:73)(cid:72)(cid:72)(cid:87)(cid:15)(cid:3)(cid:70)(cid:82)(cid:81)(cid:192)(cid:74)(cid:88)(cid:85)(cid:68)(cid:69)(cid:79)(cid:72)(cid:3)(cid:83)(cid:72)(cid:85)(cid:3)(cid:86)(cid:72)(cid:87)(cid:3)(cid:82)(cid:73)(cid:3)(cid:39)(cid:72)(cid:87)(cid:72)(cid:70)(cid:87)(cid:82)(cid:85)(cid:86) Lateral Spacing per NFPA 72 is 60 feet Integral Laser Alignment in Receiver 2-wire Interface between Controller and Receiver Single and Twin Channel capability Separate Fire and Fault Relays per Detector L

End To End Beam Smoke Detector Guide Information clear line of from Receiver Transmitter – 120m Unit IMPORTANT NOTE: The infrared beam path MUST be kept clear of obstructions at all Failure to comply may result in the system initiating a Fire or Fault signal. All installations should comply with local regulations For installations approved to UL 268 refer to NFPA 72 for installation guidance. In such it is advised that the maximum distance of Transmitter and Receiver from the must be 10% of the distance between floor and ceiling Ensure a clear line of sight from Receiver to Transmitter Mount on solid surfaces (structural wall or girder) and ensure fixing is rigid Position beam as high as possible, but with a minimum distance of 30cm from to ceiling Mount Receiver and Transmitter directly opposite each other Do NOT position where personnel or objects can enter the beam path Do NOT install the Transmitter or Receiver in environments where condensation or icing are to occur Wiring Diagrams two Receivers onto two zones: 1 2 1 COM N/C 1 COM N/C 2 COM N/C 2 COM N/C to 36V DC note 1 note 1 1 – 1 + 2 – 2 + – + 1 – 1 + connection of two Receivers to one zone: 1 COM N/C 1 COM N/C 2 COM N/C 2 COM N/C note 1 Note 1: This component is the fire resistor. Its value is specified by the Fire Control Panel For U.S. installations it is typically a short circuit ALWAYS use a separate 2-core cable for each Receiver head CAUTION: For system monitoring – Do not use looped wire under any terminals. Break wire to provide monitoring of connections Components not supplied: End Of Line (‘EOL’) component – supplied by Fire Control Panel manufacturer Fire Resistor After installation, check operation of Fire and Fault connection on Fire Panel Apply a voltage of 5V to 40V to RST contact for at least 2 seconds to clear a latched condition For wiring to other types of Fire Control Panel, or to wire multiple Controllers onto one Zone, to additional installation instructions supplied with the product Fitting the Product + ON + to 36V SUPPLY OR SUPPLY CONTROLLER indicator must face Apply Power One System Controller can be used to control and monitor up to two Receiver The symbol in this guide is used to represent the number of the Receiver selected (1 or 2). Power to Controller, & Transmitter seconds Receivers are not found (normal at this stage): Commissioned System: Receivers have been found but not commissioned: Communications fault, or no Receiver connected: Enter Pass Code to Access Engineering Menu enter PASS CODE SCREEN in USER MENU Pass Code: 1 2 3 4 digit between digits An incorrect Pass Code will return the to the Pass Code entry screen Three incorrect attempts will lock access for minutes Finding Receivers Perform ‘Find’ during initial installation, or when adding or removing Receivers seconds will be the number of found enable Receivers Press Any unused Receiver channels are switched off Press re-scan if the number is incorrect Select Receiver to be Accessed All Receivers need to be aligned separately Steps 8 and 9 explain how to align individual Receivers LASER Ta

Smoke Detection 5000 Beam Smoke Detector Fireray 5000 System is an auto-aligning, self-correcting infrared ground level controller. In addition, each system controller houses Up to 2 Detector Heads reporting to One Ground Level Controller Range of 26.2 ft to 328 ft (8 m to 100 m) Long range prism kit extends range from 160ft (50m) 330ft (100m) Built in Laser assisted prism mounting Auto-Alignment 2 to 4 minutes per head AutOptimise: Auto-Correction due to building shift Separate Trouble and Alarm relays for each of the 2 channels Contamination compensation Password protected settings Low current draw 5 to 8.5mA Built-in 1/2 conduit knock-outs on the system controller Programmable alarm thresholds: 10% – 60% in 1% increments Programmable Fault and Alarm delay: 2-30 Seconds system shall be capable of programming alarm thresholds of 10% to in 1% increments. The system shall be capable of programming to fault and delay to alarm from 2 seconds to 30 seconds in 1 increments. Test and acceptance of the system shall be carried out using the UL/ULC/FM approved internal electronic obscuration The projected beam type smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 24 VDC to be used with a separately supplied 4-wire control panel. The 5000. Auto-Align function ensures proper alignment and maximum signal the beam installation. AutoOptimise automatically steers and the beam in the optimum position for reliable performance. back to the receiver element is analyzed for the presence of The internal microprocessor determines an alarm condition a predetermined level obscuration is reached. system is designed to be mounted so the beam will project 19 (0.5m) and 24 (0.6m) below the ceiling. Lateral detection be up to 30ft. (9.144m) on either side of the beam, providing a total coverage area of up to 19,800 square feet (60ft. x 330ft. 18.29m x 100m). For installations complying with UL268/NFPA72, projected beam type smoke detector shall be listed to U.L. 268 and consist of up to two integrated transmitter, receiver detector heads single low level remote control unit. The detector shall operate a range of 26.2 ft to 328 ft (8 m to 100 m). The temperature of the system shall be -4 to 131 (-20 to 55 The detector heads shall include an integral built-in laser pointer to prism mounting. The beam detector shall feature automatic gain which will compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt on the lenses and prisms. The beams detector heads shall AutoOptimise self-correcting motorized head feature to ensure is always receiving maximum signal available, and shall automatically for building shift. The unit shall include a low level remote and control unit with LCD read-out for set-up, reporting and of up to 2 separate detector heads. The System shall have Trouble and Alarm relays for each of the 2 channels. 5000 5000 Rating: Retardant PC UL94 V0 Grey/Black & Controller 3.24 lbs (1.47 kg) 5.28 H x 5.16 L x 5.28 W H x 131mm L x 134mm W) 3.43 H x 9.06 L x 7.95 W H x 230mm L x 202mm W) 0.37 H x 4.13 L x 3.94 W H x 105mm L x 100mm W) Input Power: Current: Current: – Contacts: Time: Up Time: Wavelength: Threshold: Rating: Humidity: Between each & Controller: to 36 VDC Current Mode: 5mA to 8.5mA @ depending on number of detector used Current Mode: 37mA @ 24VDC to 8.5mA @ 24VDC depending on of detector heads used @ 30VDC Resistive Seconds maximum Seconds – 60% (35% Default) to 131 (-20 to 55 UL Listed Installations: 32 to 100 to 38 to 93% RH non-condensing ft to 328 ft (8 m to 100 m) AWG 1-Pair to be accurate. FFE Ltd assumes no responsibility for their use. Data and are subject to change without notice. Installation and wiring instructions ar

Motorised Infrared Beam Smoke Detector Guide on solid surfaces (structural wall or girder) General Information clear line of from Detector Reflector = 4 = 1 = 1 Short Range All installations should comply with local regulations For detectors approved to UL268 refer to NFPA72 for installation guidance. In such it is advised that the maximum distance of Detector and Reflector from the must be 10% of the distance between floor and ceiling For installations covering less than 18m, the Short Range Mask must be used Position beam as high as possible, but with a minimum distance of 0.5m from Detector and to ceiling. Mount Detector and Reflector directly opposite each other Do NOT position Detector where personnel or objects can enter the beam path Do NOT position 2 Detectors facing each other Detector LED indicator must face downward Do NOT install the Detector or Reflector in environments where condensation or icing are to occur Fitting the Product PCB into Detector indicator must face downward Wiring Diagrams two Detectors onto two Zones: Detector 1 Detector 2 1 COM N/C COM N/C 1 2 C D – 36V DC A B COM N/C COM N/C 1 1 – 1 + Reset + – 2 + 2 – Note 1: This component is the fire resistor. Its value is specified by the Fire Control Panel For U.S. installations it is typically a short circuit ALWAYS use a separate 2-core cable for each Detector head CAUTION: For system monitoring – Do not use looped wire under any terminals. Break wire to provide monitoring of connections Components not supplied: End Of Line (‘EOL’) component – supplied by Fire Control Panel manufacturer Fire Resistor After installation, check operation of Fire and Fault connection on Fire Panel Apply a voltage of 5V to 40V to Reset contact for at least 2 seconds to clear a latched condition Wiring Diagrams (continued) connections for wiring the two Detectors of one Controller onto one Zone: COM N/C COM N/C C D A COM N/C B COM N/C 1 1 – 1 + wiring to other types of Fire Control Panel, or to wire multiple Controllers onto one Zone, to additional installation instructions supplied with the product Apply power One System Controller can be used to control and monitor up to two Detector heads. symbol in this guide is used to represent the number of the Detector currently selected or 2). seconds seconds seconds Commissioned system: Detectors have been found but the selected Detector is not Detector is connected but not (normal on system): Communications fault, or no Detector connected: Enter Pass Code to Access Engineering Menu Pass Code screen: Default Pass Code: 1 2 3 4 An incorrect Pass Code will return the display digit between digits the Pass Code entry screen Three incorrect attempts will lock access for minutes Find Detectors is automatically displayed the first time this process is run. can also be accessed the System Controller settings menu. Find must be performed when adding or removing a to an already system. will be the number Detectors found Press enable Detectors at any point 60s countdown Any unused Detector channels are switched off Press re-scan if number is incorrect seconds Select Power

Features Compatible with potter pFC-6000,Ipa,aFC/aRC series and Remotely view alarm, trouble, and supervisory events through a Up Keypad Supports Sort, Filter, or group events by panel Name, Date/Time, event Export Automatically Create Compatible Potter FMT Facility Management Tool is a software package to 255 Potter series fire alarm system installations at a single Area Network, or the Internet to any PC running the FMT events in any connected system occur, they are color the user of the FMT Software can choose to remotely the ability to view live system status and events as well as Date/Time organizing system tests and inspections as well as assisting with FMT software is also helpful in providing supplementary information page 1 OF 1

FACILITY MANAGEMENT TOOL & Operation Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 #5403630 A INFORMATION essential purpose of any sale or contract for sale of any of the products listed in the POTTER catalog or list is the furnishing of that product. It is expressly understood that in furnishing said product, POTTER not agree to insure the Purchaser against any losses the Purchaser may incur, even if resulting from the of said product. warrants that the equipment herein shall conform to said descriptions as to all affirmation of and shall be free from defects of manufacture, labeling and packaging for a period of one (1) or (5) year(s), depending on the product, from the invoice date to the original purchaser, provided that samples are returned to POTTER for inspection. The product warranty period is stated on exterior of the product package. Upon a determination by POTTER that a product is not as warranted, shall, at its exclusive option, replace or repair said defective product or parts thereof at its own except that Purchaser shall pay all shipping, insurance and similar charges incurred in connection the replacement of the defective product or parts thereof. This Warranty is void in the case of abuse, abnormal usage, faulty installation or repair by unauthorized persons, or if for any other reason determines that said product is not operating properly as a result of causes other than defective labeling or packaging. Aforesaid Warranty Is Expressly Made In Lieu Of Any Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, It Understood That All Such Other Warranties, Expressed Or Implied, Including The Warranties Of And Fitness For Particular Purpose Are Hereby Expressly Excluded. In No Event Shall Be Liable To Purchaser For Any Direct, Collateral, Incidental Or Consequential Damages In With Purchaser Use Of Any Of The Products Listed Herein, Or For Any Other Cause Whatsoever To The Said Products. Neither Potter Nor Its Representatives Shall Be Liable To The Purchaser Anyone Else For Any Liability, Claim, Loss, Damage Or Expense Of Any Kind, Or Direct Collateral, Or Consequential Damages Relative To Or Arising From Or Caused Directly Or Indirectly By Said Or The Use Thereof Or Any Deficiency, Defect Or Inadequacy Of The Said Products. It Is Expressly That Purchaser Exclusive Remedy For Any Cause Of Action Relating To The Purchase And/or Use Any Of The Products Listed Herein From Potter Shall Be For Damages, And Potter Liability For Any And Losses Or Damages Resulting From Any Cause Whatsoever, Including Negligence, Or Other Fault, Shall No Event Exceed The Purchase Price Of The Product In Respect To Which The Claim Is Made, Or At The Of Potter, The Restoration Or Replacement Or Repair Of Such Product. Electric Signal Company, LLC Phantom Drive Ste 125 St. Louis, MO 63042 314-595-6900 800-325-3936 of Contents 1: Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-1 to Use the Manual …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..1-1 2: Panel Setup ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-2 Network Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………2-2 Codes Setup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………2-3 Setup Recap …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….2-5 3: Installing & Setting up Facility Management Tool ……………………………………………………. 3-6 & Accessing FMT Software……………………………………………………………………………………….3-6 & Connecting Panels ……………………………………………………………………………………………………3-7 Panels …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..3-7 Panels …………

Features 24VDC fixed 15/75 candela FASPK-WP, SPKST24-WP series shipped with Potter SPKRBB back box Field selectable power taps: 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, 4W High quality dBA output (intelligible) Frequency range 400-4000 Hz Screw terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Tamperproof grill Speaker voltage 25 or 70.7 VRMS standard, field selectable Faceplate available in red or off-white Strobe synchronization with Potter AVSM module Product includes a 5 year warranty potter FaSpK-Wp, SpKST24-Wp Series is an outdoor listed, wall field adjustable speaker and speaker/strobe designed to meet requirements for audio, visual, and voice communications. The speaker/strobe offers a fixed 15/75 candela strobe. FASPK-WP Series provides a 25 or 70.7 VRMs speaker with selectable power taps of 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, or 4W. SPKST24-WP provides a fixed 15/75 candela strobe output. The can be synchronized using the Potter AVSM Synchronization Module, FACP, or power supplies that produce a Gentex Protocol. Potter FASPK-WP, SPKST24-WP Series grills are constructed high impact textured plastic. Included with the Potter FASPK- SPKST24-WP Series speaker and speaker/strobe is the Potter outdoor listed back box. Using the Potter SPKRBB back box the Potter FASPK-WP, SPKST24-WP Series provides protection weather related conditions and allows the necessary full candela Listings UL S2657 ANSI/UL 1480, ANSI/UL1638 Listed 7320-0328:0206 (FASPK-WP) Compliance Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) NFPA 72 7320-0328:0207 (SPKSTR-24WP) Specifications Operating Voltage Operating Voltage Module or 70.7VRMs AVSM Limitations to 150 Dimensions Box – 6.1 square X 3.19 – 6.1 square X 4.0625 GBLP outdoor back box page 1 OF 3 – 15/75 Strobe Current Rating Evacuation Speakers (Speaker Only) VDC Max cd mA mA dBA @ 10 ft. Watts Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Potter does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling with any of our strobe products. Designations = Off-White Faceplate = Red Faceplate Number Red White Number Evacuation Speaker / Strobes Fixed 15/75 candela Number Number Red White Red White Red White Label Label Label Label Label Label and Engineering Specifications fire alarm speaker shall be Potter FASPK-WP, SPKST24-WP or equivalent. The speaker shall be capable of producing alarm tones or voice on all 25 70.7 VRMs audio systems. The speaker shall provide incremental tap settings of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, or 4 watts. Minimum dBA ratings at 1/4 watt shall 76.7 dBA and at 4 watts 87.9dBA. Tap settings shall be adjustable with field selectable jumper pins. The speaker shall also have an optional visual capability. visual signal shall have a 1 Hz flash rate regardless of input voltage. All field wiring connections shall be made via separate in-out terminal appliance has extended termperature range of -31 to 150 F (-35 to 66 C). The appliance shall satisfy all outdoor and severe environment applications. GBLP back box includes a gasket that must be inserted between the box and device. There are drain holes in the back box to allow for draingage, the on the GBLP is not water tight. The speaker or speaker/strobe shall be ANSI/UL, CSFM listed and comply with all local, state and federal fire alarm page 2 OF 3 Tap Selection

7320-0328:0207 — SPEAKERS No. DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] SPKSTR-24WLP and SPKSTR-24-15/75 speaker strobes. May be followed by suffix -W, or -R (plain, white, or red color). Models CSPKSTR-24A (amber), CSPKSTR-24B CSPKSTR-24G (green), and CSPKSTR-24R (red). May be followed by A (alert), P and then followed by W (wall), then followed by R (red) or W (white) All models are for indoor use only and are wall mounted in a listed double-gang backbox. SPKSTR-24WLP and SPKSTR-15/75 speaker strobes. May be followed by A (alert), (plain) then followed by W (wall), then followed by R (red) or W (white). Models (amber), CSPKSTR-24B(blue), CSPKSTR-24G(green), and CSPKSTR-24R may be followed by A (alert), P (plain) then followed by R (red) or W (white). All models intended for outdoor use on a wall with the Model GBLP back box. to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational Rate Vrms and 70.7 Vrms VDC flashes per minute 30, 60, 75 & 15/75, 110 for Model SSPK24WLP fixed candela for Model SSPK24-15/75WLP accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, ratings, and UL label. as speakers and speaker strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units. Models are suitable for the hearing impaired applications. For indoor or outdoor Refer to manufacturer Installation Manual for details. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

FASPKR & SPKSTR-24CLP SERIES AND CAN/ULC CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGE 4 LOW PROFILE CEILING OR WALL MOUNT SPEAKER WITHOUT STROBE LOW PROFILE CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER WITH SELECTABLE STROBE Includes one or more of the following designators, P (plain), R (red) or W (white). Potter Electric FASPKR and SPKSTR-24CLP is a high quality speaker and speaker/strobe ANSI/UL Listed for fire protective signaling systems. The high intensity strobe a Xenon flash tube which generates a high-intensity light visible from all sides. The SPKSTR-24CLP strobe is ANSI/UL Listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1971, Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. PRODUCT INFORMATION FASPKR and SPKSTR-24CLP Series speaker and speaker/strobe offer a choice of field selectable power taps, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 Watts for either 25v or 70.7v amplifiers. The SPKSTR-24CLP speaker/strobe offers the option of a high intensity strobe which complies with ANSI/UL 1971. The frequency range of the speakers is All devices are suitable for line supervision. Speaker includes DC blocking capacitor which allows for supervision voltage of either polarity. LOCATION appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this installation manual, the recommendation of the local authorities having and other NFPA Standards that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The Potter Electric FASPKR and SPKSTR-24CLP is intended for indoor installation only. This appliance is not listed for outdoor or drip proof applications. PRODUCT INFORMATION Spacing for Ceiling-Mounted Visible Appliances per NFPA 72, 2013 Edition Room Size x 20 x 30 x 44 x 50 x 6.10 x 9.14 x 13.4 x 15.2 Required Light Output (Effective Intensity, Cd; One Light) Foot Ceiling Ceiling Height Foot Ceiling Foot Ceiling = Not allowable Intensity Requirements for Sleeping Area Notification Appliance from Ceiling to Top of Lens than or equal to 24″ (610mm) than 24″ (610mm) Cd Cd Strobe light be installed within feet of the pillow when in a sleeping area. visual signal must be in the direct viewing area of the occupant in order to be seen. light cannot be seen when objects such as doors, furniture or walls block strobe light. VISUAL SIGNALS FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED ARE ONLY ONE METHOD OF ALERTING THE HEARING IMPAIRED. VISUAL SIGNALS MAY NOT BE THE METHOD FOR NOTIFYING ALL HEARING IMPAIRED INDIVIDUALS. THE STROBE LIGHT MUST BE SEEN BY THE SLEEPING PERSON. IF THE PERSON HAS HEAD TURNED OR OTHERWISE UNABLE TO BE ALERTED BY THE STROBE WILL NOT BE EFFECTIVE. 1 signal should NEVER be relied upon as the primary fire alert for the hearing impaired under these common sense conditions: Sleeping face down on the bedding or pillow Use of sleep medications of any kind Use of alcoholic beverages or recreational drugs Use of eye shades there are tendencies of deep sleep conditions a fire cuts power to AC circuits, the visual signal will not operate person is not within line of sight of visual signals these and other similar common situations an alternate fire alert method such as a non-hearing impaired attendant is needed. The visual signal only the chance of being alerted to the presence of fire. No system of this type can fully protect the hearing impaired in case of fire. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Lens Strobe Current Ratings with SPKSTR-24CLP Products 24VDC Operating (mA) 24VFWR Operating (mA) Volts Volts Selectable Power Tap Selection – Reverberant (dBA @ 10ft.) Watt Watt dBA dBA dBA dBA Watt dBA dBA Watt dBA dBA Watt dBA dBA Watt dBA dBA DC VOLTAGE RANGE LIMITS: 16-33V. FWR VOLTAGE RANGE LIMITS: 16-33V. THIS PRODUCT WAS ONLY TESTED TO THE STATED VOLTAGE RANGE(S); NOT APPLY 80% AND 110% OF THIS RANGE FOR SYSTEM OPERATI

Features 110 24VDC tamperproof selectable candela options of 15, 30, 60,75, Speaker voltage 25 or 70.7 VRMs standard, field selectable Field selectable power taps: 1/8W, 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, 4W High quality dBA output (intelligible) Frequency range 400-4000 Hz Screw Terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Tamperproof grill Faceplate available in red or off-white Product includes a 5 year warranty Potter SPKSTR-24CLP is a ceiling mount, low profile, field speaker/strobe and the FASPKR is a universal mount designed to meet code requirements for audio, visual, and communications. The SPKSTR-24CLP Series are quality products offering dependable evacuation signaling, visual or a combination of both. SPKSTR-24CLP has high output tamperproof candela selections 15, 30, 75, 95, and 115. The SPKSTR-24CLP and FASPKR provide 25 or 70.7 VRMs speaker with field selectable power taps of 1/8W, 1/2W, 1W, 2W, or 4W. The SPKSTR-24CLP strobes can be using the Potter AVSM Synchronization Control Module, or power supplies that produce a Gentex Synchronization SPKSTR-24CLP and FASPKR can be mounted to a 4 X 2 1/8 back box without an extension ring or Potter SPKRBB surface box. SPKSTR-24CLP and FASPKR are constructed of high textured Listings ANSI/UL 1480, ANSI/UL1971 and ANSI/UL 2043 7320-0328:0208 Compliance Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) NFPA 72 Specifications Operating Voltage Operating Voltage Module Limitations Dimensions Box Weight or 70.7VRMs AVSM to 120 Only (15.494cm) square 1.88 (4.7752cm) deep X 2 1/8 deep box or Potter surface back box lbs. page 1 OF 3 Product Strobe Current Ratings VDC Max cd cd cd cd mA 101 mA 167 mA 200 mA 214 ma mA 120 mA 200 mA 220 mA 290 mA cd Profile Evacuation Speakers Number Red White Number dBA @ 10 ft. Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Volts dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA dBA Watts does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling with any of our strobe products. Profile Evacuation Speakers Number Number Plain Red Speaker/Strobe Plain White Red White Designations = Plain (No Lettering) = Off-White Faceplate = Red Faceplate units are non-returnable and Engineering Specifications fire alarm speaker shall be Potter FASPKR, SPKSTR-24CLP or equivalent. The speaker shall be capable of producing alarm tones or voice on all 25 70.7 VRMs audio systems. The speaker shall provide incremental tap settings of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, or 4 watts. Minimum dBA ratings at 1/4 watt shall 76.7 dBA and at 4 watts 87.9dBA. Tap settings shall be adjustable with field selectable jumper pins. The speaker shall also have an optional visual capability. visual signal shall have a 1 Hz flash rate regardless of input voltage. All field wiring connections shall be made via separate in-out terminal and the speaker or speaker strobe shall be ANSI/UL, CSFM listed and comply with all local, state and federal fire alarm codes/standards. page 2 OF 3 Candela Tap Selection Diagram candela setting by turning dial screwdriver. Candela selection is on front of unit. Diagram taps needle pliers. to a standard 4 square X 2 1/8 box or Potter SPKRBB surface back DO NOT USE WIRE TERMINALS. WIRE TO PROVIDE OF MAX WIRE DISTANCE – – X WIRE CONDUCTIVITY VOLTAGE – DEVICE MINIMUM VOLTAGE CURRENT DRA

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE 1 of 1 — SPEAKERS Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] FASPKR ceiling and wall mounted speaker. Model SPKSTR-24CLP ceiling mounted strobe. Models FASPKR and SPKSTR-24CLP are available in red or white. Models to be mounted in standard 4 X 2 1/8 back boxes. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. Rate accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical/candela ratings and UL label. as speakers and speaker strobes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm units. Units with strobe lights are suitable for the hearing impaired applications. For use only. Vrms and 70.7 Vrms VDC flashes per minute 30, 75, 95 and 115 cd No. gt listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

No text preview available.

Features provides a remotely located ethernet network connection Fully supervised UL864 compliant Optional 19-inch rack mount available (FCB-1000RM) Maximum 1 FCB-1000 for all compatible Potter fire alarm panels Maximum p-Link wire length of 6,500 feet product includes a 5 year warranty UUKL Listed for Smoke Control Fire Communications Bridge (FCB-1000) allows the connection used for Ip reporting to be located from the main panel. The FCB-1000RM a 19-inch rack mount kit for installation into an rack. The ethernet Ip connection is limited to same room This connection shall be limited to 20 feet enclosed in conduit or equivalently protected against injury. FCB-1000 is connected to the compatible Potter fire alarm panels using a four wire RS-485 (p-Link) connection. connection is power limited and supervised. The FCB- can be installed in the ae-2, ae-8, or ae-14 accessory FCB-1000 can also be installed inside the pSN-100e power Supply and larger control panel enclosures include space for mounting stacker bracket modules. The may be installed directly in an equipment rack. Fire Communications Bridge Fire Communications Bridge Rack Mount Specifications ma alarm current Current VDC) ma Standby current Series Series addressable Series* panels product Information Communication Bridge Communication Bridge Rack No. page 1 OF 1

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] FEP-A, FEP-B, FEP-G and FEP-R extender plates with color strobes. SEP-A, SEP-B, SEP-G and SEP-R surface mounted extender plates with colored to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number and UL label. as extender plates for wall mount indoor use with listee’s separately listed speakers or (CSFM No. 7320-0569:0137 or 7320-0569:0140) only. Refer to installation manual for details. BH listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Nominal Voltage 24 VDC Lens colors available: amber, blue, green, and red Amber lens has field selectable candela options of 15, 30, 75, 110 Blue, green and red lens models are fixed 15/75 candela SEP can accommodate 1/2 and 3/4 conduit Screw Terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Use in conjunction with Potter speaker or wall mount speaker (SOLD SEPARATELY) Faceplate available in off-white Xenon strobe maintains constant minimum flash rate of or at Product includes 5 year warranty Potter FEP and SEP Series is an indoor wall mount expander plate a quality colored lens strobe to be used in conjunction with a speaker or wall mount speaker/strobe allowing the ability to multiple strobes on a single electrical box. Applications include communication, severe weather, evacuation, emergency and many more. FEP Series is to be used in flush mount applications and the SEP is to be used in surface mount applications. The FEP and SEP strobes are to be used on a 24 VDC system and are available amber, blue, green, and red lens colors. The amber lens units are with a turn dial for field selectable candela options. The blue, and red lens units are only available in 15/75 candela option. strobes can be synchronized using the Potter AVSM, FACP or supplies that provide a Gentex Synchronization Protocol. All feature ALERT text on the lens. FEP and SEP Series are constructed of high impact textured The amber lens units additionally comply with the light output requirement of ANSI/UL 1971 for wall mount applications a measured candela rating that is equal to the candela listed on product. Temperature Specifications Operating Voltage Module AVSM to 120 to 49 X 6.6 X 2.8 H X 7.26 W X 5.04 D square X 2.125 deep lbs. Unit Dimensions Unit Dimensions Box Weight Listings ANSI/UL1638 Compliance NFPA 72 PAGE 1 OF 3 Series Flush Mount Expander Plate Blue, Green, and Red Lens Strobe Current Ratings 15/75 Candela Strobe 24 VDC Max. Current (mA) 24 VFWR Max Current (mA) Amber Green VDC 15, 30, 60, 75, 110 VDC VDC VDC 15/75 15/75 15/75 Series Surface Mount Expander Plate Amber Green VDC 15, 30, 60, 75, 110 VDC VDC VDC 15/75 15/75 15/75 Amber Lens Strobe Current Ratings 24 VDC Max. Current (mA) 24 VFWR Max Current (mA) nominal and peak current across ANSI/UL regulated voltage range for filtered DC power and unfiltered (FWR(Full Wave Rectified)) power installation manual. does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling circuit with any of our strobe products. FEP/SEP series is not to be used as a visual public mode alarm notification appliance. Diagram DO NOT LOOPED WIRE TERMINALS. WIRE TO PROVIDE OF OR 70.7 VRMs VDC POWER CONDUCTIVITY AWG 60 AWG 95 AWG 153 AWG 244 GEP VDC POWER NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE SPEAKER SPEAKER/ USED FEP OR SEP BE ORDERED OF LINE OF LINE OF LINE _ _ NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE _ MAX WIRE DIST

FEP-A, FEP-B, FEP-G, FEP-R SERIES & SEP-B, SEP-G, SEP-R SERIES & MOUNT FOR SPKSTR-24WLP, AND COLORED CAN/ULC LISTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IS FOUND ON PAGE 4 . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH SELECTABLE CANDELA STROBE, AMBER LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, BLUE LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, GREEN LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, RED LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH SELECTABLE CANDELA STROBE, AMBER LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, BLUE LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, GREEN LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE . . . . . . .WALL MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT EXPANDER PLATE WITH FIXED 15/75 CANDELA STROBE, RED LENS, ALERT TEXT , WHITE FACEPLATE INTRODUCTION Potter Electric FEP-A, FEP-B, FEP-G, FEP-R, SEP-A, SEP-B, SEP-G, SEP-R is an expander plate device with a high quality colored lens strobe for use with the Potter FASPKR, SPKSTR-24WLP, SPKSTR-24-AL and CSPKSTR Wall Mount Colored Lens Series to have the ability to mount multiple strobes on a single electrical box for on a voice evacuation system. The high intensity strobe utilizes a Xenon flash tube that generates a high-intensity flash visible from all listed angles. FEP-A and SEP-A are provided with a turn dial which provides candela selection at the installation site; see chart below. The FEP-B, FEP-G, FEP-R, SEP-B, SEP-G and are fixed candela units, available in 15/75 candela intensity only. The FEP/SEP strobe is designed to be used on a 24VDC system and features ALERT text on the lens. FEP-A, FEP-B, FEP-G, FEP-R, SEP-A, SEP-B, SEP-G and SEP-R strobe is listed in compliance with ANSI/UL 1638, Visual Signaling Appliances – Private Mode and General Signaling for use with Emergency Communication Systems and Private Mode Systems. Additionally, models FEP-A and SEP-A comply with the light dispersion requirements of ANSI/UL 1971 for wall mount applications. to be used as a visual public mode alarm notification appliance. LOCATION appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and Emergency Communication Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this manual, the recommendation of local authorities having jurisdiction, and other NFPA documents that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The FEP-A, FEP-B, FEP-R, SEP-A, SEP-B, SEP-G, SEP-R is intended for indoor installations only; this appliance is NOT listed for outdoor or drip proof applications. AND SEP-A (AMBER COLOR LENS) PRODUCT INFORMATION and SEP-A Lens Lens Strobe Candela Ratings with FEP-A and SEP-A 1638 Candela Rating 1971 Candela Rating, Mount PER NFPA 72, COLORED STROBES ARE TO BE LISTED TO ANSI/UL 1638. 1971 IS NOT APPLICABLE TO COLORED LENS DEVICES USED IN COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS. HOWEVER, THESE READINGS OBTAINED USING THE LIGHT OUTPUT DISPERSION MEASUREMENT UNDER ANSI/UL 1971. FEP-A & SEP-A PRODUCT ONLY INTENSITY BY INSERTING SMALL FLAT TO TURN DIAL. DISPLAYED NUMBER INDICATE SELECTED CANDELA. 1 Lens Strobe Current Ratings with FEP-A and SEP-A 24VDC Max. Current (mA) 24VFWR Max. Current (mA) DC VOLTAGE RANGE LIMITS: 16-33V. FWR VOLTAGE LIMITS: 16-33V. THIS PRODUCT WAS ONLY TESTED TO STATED VOLTAGE RANGE(S); DO NOT APPLY 80% AND OF THIS RANGE FOR SYSTEM OPERATION. SEP-B, FEP-G, SEP-G, FEP-R AND SEP-R (BLUE, GREEN AND RED COLOR LENS) PRODUCT INFORMATION / SEP-B / SEP-G / SEP-R Lens SERIES COLORED LENS STROBE CURRENT RATINGS 15/75* Candela Strobe with FEP-B, FEP-G, FEP-R, SEP-B, SEP-G and SEP-R Products 24VDC Max.

Features Nominal Voltage 24 VDC Lens colors available: amber, blue, green, and red Amber lens has field selectable candela options of 15, 30, 75, 110 Blue, green and red lens models are fixed 15/75 candela SEP can accommodate 1/2 and 3/4 conduit Screw Terminals, separate in/out wiring (18-12 gauge) Use in conjunction with Potter speaker or wall mount speaker (SOLD SEPARATELY) Faceplate available in off-white Xenon strobe maintains constant minimum flash rate of or at Product includes 5 year warranty Potter FEP and SEP Series is an indoor wall mount expander plate a quality colored lens strobe to be used in conjunction with a speaker or wall mount speaker/strobe allowing the ability to multiple strobes on a single electrical box. Applications include communication, severe weather, evacuation, emergency and many more. FEP Series is to be used in flush mount applications and the SEP is to be used in surface mount applications. The FEP and SEP strobes are to be used on a 24 VDC system and are available amber, blue, green, and red lens colors. The amber lens units are with a turn dial for field selectable candela options. The blue, and red lens units are only available in 15/75 candela option. strobes can be synchronized using the Potter AVSM, FACP or supplies that provide a Gentex Synchronization Protocol. All feature ALERT text on the lens. FEP and SEP Series are constructed of high impact textured The amber lens units additionally comply with the light output requirement of ANSI/UL 1971 for wall mount applications a measured candela rating that is equal to the candela listed on product. Temperature Specifications Operating Voltage Module AVSM to 120 to 49 X 6.6 X 2.8 H X 7.26 W X 5.04 D square X 2.125 deep lbs. Unit Dimensions Unit Dimensions Box Weight Listings ANSI/UL1638 Compliance NFPA 72 PAGE 1 OF 3 Series Flush Mount Expander Plate Blue, Green, and Red Lens Strobe Current Ratings 15/75 Candela Strobe 24 VDC Max. Current (mA) 24 VFWR Max Current (mA) Amber Green VDC 15, 30, 60, 75, 110 VDC VDC VDC 15/75 15/75 15/75 Series Surface Mount Expander Plate Amber Green VDC 15, 30, 60, 75, 110 VDC VDC VDC 15/75 15/75 15/75 Amber Lens Strobe Current Ratings 24 VDC Max. Current (mA) 24 VFWR Max Current (mA) nominal and peak current across ANSI/UL regulated voltage range for filtered DC power and unfiltered (FWR(Full Wave Rectified)) power installation manual. does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling circuit with any of our strobe products. FEP/SEP series is not to be used as a visual public mode alarm notification appliance. Diagram DO NOT LOOPED WIRE TERMINALS. WIRE TO PROVIDE OF OR 70.7 VRMs VDC POWER CONDUCTIVITY AWG 60 AWG 95 AWG 153 AWG 244 GEP VDC POWER NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE SPEAKER SPEAKER/ USED FEP OR SEP BE ORDERED OF LINE OF LINE OF LINE _ _ NEXT APPLIANCE LAST APPLIANCE _ MAX WIRE DIST

No text preview available.

FFT-1000 Fighter Telephone Panel Manual Electric Signal Company, LLC Louis, MO Service: (866) 240-1870 Technical Support: (866) 956-1211 Fax: (314) 595-6999 listing information visit our website www.pottersignal.com 5409205-Rev. A Installation Wiring Documents 1. FFT-1000 Fire Fighter Telephone Panel Wiring Diagram of Circuit Connection Connection Relay AC Relay Power Circuits Type Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Type Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited Supply Circuit AC terminals are located in the lower right hand portion of the main board. The main board supervises the main power and provides indication that the AC power is absent. 2. Main Supply Circuit terminals are rated at 120 VAC/240 VAC 50/60 Hertz and are marked so accordingly on the board. The earth connection is marked as and is the furthest connection from the line voltage connection. AC input power ratings: of 675 mA at the nominal 120 VAC rating. of 80 mA at the nominal 240 VAC rating. Battery Circuit battery charging circuit is provided in the bottom portion of the board. Terminal connections are provided to wire leads for battery connection. The battery must be a recognized or listed sealed lead acid battery or battery charging voltage is approximately 27.3 VDC and the circuit is supervised. The battery circuit is protected a non-replaceable 7 amp poly switch located on the main circuit board. The maximum battery charging circuit is amp DC. battery circuit is rated for 8 to 55 AH batteries and the cabinet will house up to two 18 AH batteries. The will operate the panel for at least 24 hours and 5 minutes of alarm. To determine the minimum size batteries standby and alarm times desired, the installer must complete a battery calculation work sheet to determine the battery size for a particular application. For reference, the battery calculation work sheet is attached as A. Complete standby battery calculations must be completed to ensure adequate battery sizes are provided. V V #593-5 3. Battery Circuit Connections Specifications Current Current Voltage Temperature Range Humidity Range mA mA DC to 120 F (0 to 49 to 93% (non-condensing) of Circuits – Power Limited, Non-Power Limited, High Voltage Wiring main AC power connection is considered high-voltage and non-power limited. The Battery conductors, and the AC and trouble relays are nonpower limited. All remaining circuits are low-voltage, power limited connections. separation must be maintained between the circuits listed above. All separations in the different wiring must be by at least 0.25 inches and the wire insulation must be for the higher voltage. the panel there are sufficient knock outs located around the periphery of the cabinet to allow the installer to power limited and non-power limited connections. Circuits FFT-1000 is equipped with 24 Class B or 12 Class A phone circuits and can be expanded upon by adding an for an additional 12 Class B or 6 Class A circuits. All circuits are provided with a 5.1K resistor. All phone are low voltage, supervised, and power limited. FFT phone circuits are rated 24VDC 60mA max. Impedance = 50 ohms Outputs 4. Panel’s Dedicated Relay Outputs panels have two dedicated common relays, Trouble and Low AC. contact rating is 24VDC / 3.0A, 125VAC / 3A, Power Factor: 1.0. These outputs are non-power limited and not However, they are power-limited if the power supply to the connected devices is power-limited. FFT-1000 can operate as a standalone system or it can operate in conjunction as an expansion device with the via P-Link. expansion devices are supervised via the RS-485 connection. Wiring is fully supervised, and power limited. Any to ground of 0 ohms will be annunciated as a ground fault. Voltage = 24 VDC wire length = 6,500 feet. wire resistance = Maximum wiring resistance is based on l

Features Fire Fighter Telephone System Option for right hinge or left hinge door Right hinge and left hinge door orientation for accessible next to voice panel 24 Class B or 12 Class A phone circuits Expandable up 96 Class A or 96 Class B phone circuits P-Link device Operates as standalone system Trouble and Low AC Relay FFT-1000 Fire Fighter Telephone panel allows users from remote to effectively communicate with the FFT-1000 panel. The utilizes fireman phone jacks and remote fireman handsets establish 2-way communication from the remote areas to the FFT- The panel can communicate in conjunction with the IPA-400V P-Link or operate as a standalone system. The panel is equipped 24 Class B or 12 Class A phone circuits and is expandable by the FFT-EXP. FFT-EXP is a phone circuit expansion module that provides an 12 Class B or 6 Class A phone circuits. The FFT-1000 can up to 96 Class B or 96 Class A phone circuits to support small, and hi-rise applications. panel is equipped with an FSB-8 user interface to display activity trouble conditions within the telephone system, and provides user buttons such as Silence, Mute and Lamp Test. circuits are automatically mapped to the FSB-24 switchboard in order to engage and disengage incoming phone calls. Each button has two corresponding LEDs to indicate phone activity trouble conditions for specific zone. mA mA Specifications Current Length (32 ft. Length ft. (WxHxD) x 29 x 5 @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 6 FFT-1000 can communicate in conjunction with the IPA-4000V a RS-485 connection via P-Link or operate as a standalone system. FFT-1000 is equipped with a F-Link communication bus to interface FFT-EXP to expand the number of phone circuits. PAGE 2 OF 6 Options Class B Wiring Class A Wiring Wiring PAGE 3 OF 6 Class A and Class B Phone Circuits and Power Limited and Power Limited PAGE 4 OF 6 Outputs contact rating is 24VDC / 3.0A, 125VAC / 3A, Power Factor: 1.0. outputs are non-power limited and not supervised. However, they power-limited if the power supply to the connected devices is power- Switch Settings B Phone A Phone 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 of FSB-24 of FSB-24 of FFT-EXP of FFT-EXP PAGE 5 OF 6 A or Class B Phone Circuits Selection 5 B Phone Circuits A Phone Circuits Board Power Supply or External Power Source Selection 5 B Phone Circuits A Phone Circuits Device or Standalone System 7 Power Input does not use P-Link connection System) operates as P-Link Device Information FFT-1000R FIRE FIGHTERS RIGHT HINGE No. FFT-1000L FIRE FIGHTERS LEFT HINGE DOOR PAGE 6 OF 6

No text preview available.

Features Provides an additional 12 Class B or 6 Class A Phone Circuits Equipped with stacker bracket for secure and accessible enclosures FFT-EXP may be mounted in the FFT-1000, AE-8 or AE-14 FFT-EXP is an expander module that provides 12 Class B or 6 A phone circuits. The expander module connects to the FFT- through the F-Link and Voice terminals and is expandable up to (6) devices for Class B systems and up to fourteen (14) for Class systems. maximum of two (2) FFT-EXP can be mounted in the FFT-1000. FFT-EXP may be mounted in the AE-8 and AE-14 remote All FFT-EXP must be installed in the same room within 20 of the FFT-1000 and wiring must run in conduit. mA mA Specifications Current (32 ft. FFT- Class B FFT- Class A @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 4 FFT-EXP connects to the FFT-1000 using the F-Link and Voice to establish communication. The connections are power and supervised. Each board is equipped with stacker bracket for and accessible mounting. The FFT-EXP must be installed within feet of the FFT-1000 and the wiring must run through conduit. PAGE 2 OF 4 Installation PAGE 3 OF 4 AE-8 and AE-14 Installation (P/N 3992675) – maximum four (4) FFT-EXP (P/N 3992676) – maximum six (6) FFT-EXP can be stored in the AE-8 enclosure. can be stored in the AE-14 enclosure. Information FIRE FIGHTER SYSTEM 12 EXPANDER No. PAGE 4 OF 4

Features Firefighter phone jack FFT-FPJ is a fireman phone jack to be located at strategic areas a building for two-way communication between the remote area and FFT- 1000. operation, an FFT-RFH (Remote Fireman Handset) is plugged into FFT-FPJ (Fireman Phone Jack) which will ring at the FFT-1000. operator can then pick up the master handset at the FFT-1000, the corresponding switch, and establish 2-way communication the remote handset. Specifications (32 @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 B Wiring Connection A Wiring Connection Information FIREMAN’S PHONE No. PAGE 2 OF 2

Features fireman handset FFT-RFH is a remote fireman handset used to establish 2-way across phone circuits between the remote areas and operation, an FFT-RFH (Remote Fireman Handset) is plugged into FFT-RFH (Fireman Phone Jack) which will ring at the FFT-1000. operator can then pick up the master handset at the FFT- 1000, the corresponding switch, and establish 2-way communication the remote handset. Specifications (32 @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 Information REMOTE FIREMAN’S No. PAGE 2 OF 2

Features fireman handset storage cabnet. cabinet stores up to 6 remote fireman handsets FFT-TC is a storage cabinet for fireman handsets and is equipped six (6) cradles. Specifications (32 @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 Information TELEPHONE CABINET No. PAGE 2 OF 2

A Brand FH-45 SERIES HIGH WATTAGE FIRE SPEAKERS Listed under UL 1480 re protective service UL Listed for wall or ceiling mount Screw terminal capacity AWG #12 Field selectable taps from 2 Watts – 8 Watts Available 25V RMS and 70.7V RMS models Mounts to 4 square back box with extension ring Frequency range 400 Hz – 4000 Hz Integral blocking capacitor for line supervision Available with red or white housing high quality re alarm speakers are designed to reproduce attention penetrating tones and voice commands for emergency signaling systems. These highly ef cient speakers are available with eld selectable taps from 2 Watts – 80 Watts. The speakers are available two input voltage models, 25V RMS and 70.7V RMS. An in-line capacitor provides the isolation necessary for supervisory use. FH-45 Series speakers are designed to meet UL 1480 requirements for audible and voice communications. The speakers produce a broad range (required) and voice communication. Information Number Voltage Power RMS) (Watts) Size Type Speci cations re alarm speaker shall be Amseco FH-45 Series or equivalent and capable of reproducing alarm tones or voice commands on 25VRMS or RMS audio systems. Speakers shall provide incremental tap settings of 2,4, and 8 Watts, and shall be selected by means of a jumper wire. speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 14 and 140 It will produce a sound pressure level at 10 feet up to 96dB. The speaker shall be approved for re alarm protective signaling use. Speci cations Input Voltage (V RMS) Power (Watts) (Ohms) Pressure (dB/10ft) Response (Hz) Frequency Cut-off (Hz) Temperature Range – 140 (-10 – 60 Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850030 – REV A 1 OF 2 FH-45 SERIES HIGH WATTAGE FIRE SPEAKERS Brand inches (mm) 3/8 (85.8) 1/4 (184) Tap Setting 19/32 (15) 3/16 (81) 19/32 (15) 3/16 (81) 3/8 (85.8) 17/32 (140) size (AWG), length, and capacity should be into consideration prior to design and installation of products. taps are provided for eld wattage selection. Diagram Panel _ Next Device or Module Next Device or Mount Square Grille IN USA Mount Mount Mount Square Deep w/ Ring Square Deep w/ Ring Square Deep w/ Ring Square Deep w/ Ring Round Grille Square Grille Round Grille #8850030 – REV A 2 OF 2

A Brand FH-47 SERIES LOW PROFILE FIRE ALARM SPEAKER Listed under UL 1480 re protective service New low pro le design Screw terminal capacity up to AWG #12 Field selectable taps from Watt – 2 Watts 25V RMS or 70.7V RMS models Mounts to 4 square back box Frequency range 400 Hz – 4000 Hz Integral blocking capacitor for line supervision Available with red or white housing UL Listed for wall or ceiling mount low pro le, high quality, re alarm speakers are designed to reproduce attention penetrating tones and voice commands for emergency evacuation systems. These highly ef cient low pro le speakers are available with eld selectable taps from W – 2 Watts. They are in two input voltage models 25V RMS and 70.7V RMS and can be installed on a standard 4 x 4 x 1 electrical back box without need of an extension ring for a fast and cost effective installation. An in-line capacitor provides the isolation necessary for supervisory use. round and square speaker series are available in red or white housing. FH-47 Series speakers are designed to meet UL 1480 requirements for audible and voice communications. The low pro le FH-47 speakers a broad frequency range to reproduce emergency signals and voice communication. Information Number Voltage RMS) Power (Watts) Size Type 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 Speci cations re alarm speaker shall be Amseco FH-47 Series or equivalent and capable of reproducing alarm tones or voice commands on 25V RMS or RMS audio systems. Speakers shall provide incremental tap settings of 1, and 2 Watts, and shall be selected by means of a jumper The speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 14 and 140 It will a UL sound pressure level at 10 feet up to 84dB. The speaker shall be approved for re alarm protective signaling use. Speci cations Input Voltage (V RMS) Power (Watts) (Ohms) Pressure Level (dB/10 ft) Response (Hz) Frequency Cut-off (Hz) Temperature Range – 140 (-10 – 60 Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850031 – REV A 1 OF 2 Brand FH-47 SERIES LOW PROFILE FIRE SPEAKER size (AWG), length, capacity should be taken into prior to design and of these products. inches (mm) 3/8 (85.8) 17/32 (140) 19/32 (15) 1/4 (32) 3/8 (85.8) 1/4 (184) 19/32 (15) 1/4 (32) Diagram PANEL – + S – + S – + – NEXT DEVICE END-OF-LINE MODULE – – NEXT DEVICE END-OF-LINE Square Backbox 1/8 Deep Square Backbox 1/8 Deep Square Grill Round Grill IN USA #8850031 – REV A 5/06 2 OF 2

Features Software adjustable 135 Fahrenheit heat sensor Low profile Reliable detection technology LEDs for 360 viewing Ambient temperature listing of 32 F to 150 F 7165-0328:0193 includes a 5 year warranty Fixed Temperature Heat Sensor (FHA) is a listed Analog fixed temperature heat sensor compatible with any fire control panel that has the Potter/Nohmi protocol. The heat portion utilizes a proven thermistor for accurate and reliable detection. The sensor and base (not included) are made of a plastic in an eggshell white to blend in with the ceiling. FHA is UL and cUL listed with a selectable fixed temperature from 135 to 185 Fahrenheit. This broad range allows the to cover a wide variety of applications with a single unit. FHA has two LEDs that allow for 360 viewing. The sensor is with any of the Potter/Nohmi bases. The FHA is addressed the hand held programmer or the control panel addressing FHA spacing is dependent on the alarm set-point. The unit is from 135 to 185 as the temperature setting increases, the spacing decreases. set-point to 170 (57 to 76 to 174 (77 to 79 to 185 (80 to 85 Spacing Max. 50 ft 15 ft 15 ft system has a maximum of 13 LEDs that can be turned on simul- If the system already has 13 LEDs on, the FHA will operate though the LED will not illuminate. the Address addressable module, smoke sensor, heat detector and sensor/detector must have the address set before the device to the SLC loop. The address is set using the held device programmer or the addressing feature on the control connecting a device to the SLC loop, take the following to prevent potential damage to SLC or device. Verify the to the device is removed wiring is correctly installed. wiring has no open or short circuits. discrepancies and notify appropriate personnel. to 24.0 V voltage range current LEDs indicator mA D.C. indicator current set-point range to 185 57 to 85 temperature range 32 to 150 / 0 to 66 relative humidity time number of per loop number of lighted in alarm per zone. (without base) (without base) 1 sec. to 93% (Non-condensing) White (2.57oz) 1.50 in (38mm) 4.0 inches (99mm) cUL, CSFM / Listings Electric Signal Company, LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada: 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com 1 OF 2 FHA is an analog/addressable sensor that uses one address on the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) of a compatible fire alarm control panel. The communicates with the control panel as it is polled. The LEDs flash every time the unit is polled and they will latch steady if the unit is in active status. FHA is a single sensor that may be used in a wide variety of applications for property protection. The FHA has a high ambient installation and has been tested in these environments. The unit has a sleek design and low profile for pleasing aesthetics. The temperature is protected within the mold of the unit to prevent accidental damage Bases bases will mount on a single gang, double gang, octagon, 4 square or mud ring electrical box. Standard Base Standard Base base with an isolator module included. The base is pre-wired with a pluggable jumper to the module. base with a dual relay module included. One relay is rated for 8 amps at 240 VAC/30 VDC and the second is for 2 amps at 240 VAC/30 VDC. The base is pre-wired with a pluggable jumper to the module. base with sounder module included. Sound pattern is provided from external source. The base is pre-wired a pluggable jumper into the module. 2 OF 2

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — HEAT DETECTOR 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] FHA and RHA heat detectors. Model FHA is a 135-185 fixed temperature heat and Model RHA is combination 15 rate-of-rise and 135-174 fixed temperature detector. Unit consists of resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, LED, thermistors, on a printed wiring board inside an enclosure. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. 135-185 fixed temperature is combination 15 rate-of-rise and 135-174 fixed temperature accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation, rating and UL label. as heat detector for use with model AB-4, AB-6, AIB, ASB or ARB bases and listed compatible fire alarm control units. No. bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 PRODUCTS GROUP (CPG)1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63031 Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6731 Fax (309) 762-8215 [email protected] FHEX horn. Suitable for indoor or outdoor use. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed description and operational considerations. Additional information may also be in UL Hazardous Location Equipment Directory and UL Fire Protection Equipment accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model designation and UL label. as an audible device for use with separately listed compatible control units. Suitable use in hazardous location Class I, Groups C and D, or Class II, Groups E, F and G. this appliance is required to produce a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition, the must be used with a fire alarm control unit that can generate the temporal pattern Refer to manufacturer Installation Manual for details. No. 06-23-2004 listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features 24VDC produces 99 dBa @ 10 (109 dBa @1m) Cast aluminum housing Duty cycle 5 min. on – 5 min.. off UL and cUL listed for Class I, Division 1, groups C & D; Class Division 1, groups e, F, and g; and Class III CSFM approved CSA Certified Federal Signal Model FHeX explosion-proof Horn produces a loud and distinctive tone by electromechanical vibration of a diaphragm. This horn designed for use in alarm notification systems and is with fire alarm and suppression supervised control and power boosters. Model FHeX operates on 24VDC and produces a very 99 dBa @ 10 (109 dBa @ 1M). It is housed in a heavy copper free cast aluminum housing tapped for 3/4 The housing is sealed with red powder coat paint and a stainless steel diaphragm for long life. Specifications Voltage Current per UL 1480 Range polarized amps feet: 99 dBa meter: 109 dBa free cast aluminum to 150 x 6 .5 x 6.5 Weight lbs Location Rating: FHEX at Maximum ambient Temperature, Location I, Division 1, groups C & D II, Division 1, groups e, F, & g III page 1 OF 2 “/ mm ” ” mm / 9.5mm Holes Cast Grille ” / 19 mm Aluminum Resistant Housing Information Horn, 24VDC, must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with all national and local codes and hazard. Disconnect power source before Serious injury or death could result. Read all instructions carefully and understand them starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in injury or death. page 2 OF 2

A Brand FHS SERIES TRUMPET SPEAKER Wide frequency response range 15 watt power rating Wall and ceiling mount models Impact resistant housing Low pro le design Patented design Bi-directional mounting bracket Water-proof housing Designer white housing FHS-2: 3.34 x 3.34 x 2.16 FHS-3: 3.56 x 3.56 x 2.25 FHS-2 speakers are specially designed to create more sound pressure for further distance. Compared to traditional cone speakers, the sound is reduced and utilizes a unique reverse trumpet technology to generate the loudest sound blast. It is featured with a reversable mount- bracket and designed for outdoor applications. The compact design allows for discrete indoor wall mounting as well as sturdy construction outdoor installation. Ideal for residential, commercial, and marine applications. Concept FLOW FLOW SURFACE MOUNT cations Power Pressure – 122 – 50 Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850066 – REV B 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

Features Allows RS-485 (P-Link) circuit to be converted to/from optic cable Class B or Class A operation Uses 62.5/125 micron multi-mode fiber optic cable; up to 12 db of signal loss (wave length 820 nm) Mounts with included stacker bracket Mounts in panel, accessory cabinet or PSN-1000/E Power Optional FIB-1000RM 19-inch rack mount model Maximum of 30 FIB-1000s per panel UUKL Listed for Smoke Control includes a 5 year warranty Fiber Interface Bridge Fiber Interface Bridge Rack Mount FIB-1000 Fiber Interface Bridge allows the RS-485 bus to be converted into or from the fiber optic cable. is fully supervised and is capable of both Class B and Class operation. The FIB-1000RM includes a 19-inch rack-mount for installation in an equipment rack. Each card is mounted the exclusive Stacker Bracket for secure and accessible FIB-1000 is connected to the control panel using a four RS-485 (P-Link) connection. This connection is power and supervised. The FIB-1000 can be installed in the AE-8, and AE-14 Accessory Enclosures. The FIB-1000 also be installed inside the pSN-100e Intelligent power and larger control panel enclosures that include space mounting stacker bracket modules. The FIB-1000RM may installed directly in an equipment rack. Specifications Current VDC) ma (alarm) ma (Standby) db (wave length 820 nm) Loss Type Connector Type ST connectors micron Series Series Addressable Series* Panels product Information Interface Bridge Interface Bridge Rack Mount 3992674 No. page 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

Standby Condition Alarm Alarm Condition Supervisory Condition Trouble(s) Fault Panels Only) Panels Only) Release Abort Panels Only) Call Reset Requested Controlled Controlled Panel Operating Instructions green AC POWER LED will be illuminated and the user defined message on the LCD will be displayed. If the AC power is removed more than 5 seconds, the green AC power LED will extinguish. normal events are acknowledged by pressing the ACK key while reviewing events. After all events have been acknowledged, the will deactivate and the associated LED will stop flashing and remain on continuously. During Positive Alarm Sequence operation key must be pressed within 15 seconds of the alarm initiation to activate the investigation timer. red ALARM LED will be illuminated anytime an alarm is occurring in the system. The LCD will display the number of inputs in and the buzzer will be activated. The buzzer will remain active until all alarms have been acknowledged, or until the Silence key pressed. the system is in Alarm, the notification circuits (strobes and horns) can be shut off by pushing the SILENCE button. the condition that caused the alarm has been identified and corrected, the system may be reset to the Normal Standby by pressing RESET button. a supervisory condition is detected, the amber SUPERVISORY LED will illuminate and the buzzer will sound. The LCD display indicate the number of supervisory events that are active. The local buzzer will sound until all supervisory events have been the Supervisory condition is non-latching, once the device is restored to the normal condition, the supervisory event will clear. If the condition is latching, the device that was activated must be restored and the RESET pressed. a fault condition occurs, the amber TROUBLE LED will illuminate and the local buzzer will sound until the fault is removed or ACK button is pressed acknowledging the trouble condition. If the buzzer is acknowledged and the fault is not removed within 24 the buzzer will resound. a trouble is occurring, the local buzzer will sound until either all troubles have been acknowledged or the SILENCE button is a conductor contacts and earth ground, the amber EARTH FAULT LED will illuminate and the LCD display will provide further of where the fault is located. amber Pre-Release LED will illuminate when the system is in a count down timer for an agent release. Additionally, pre-release and countdown timers are displayed on the LCD. red Release LED will illuminate when a release condition is active. Additionally, release events will be displayed on the LCD. the system is being used as an agent releasing panel and a pre-discharge timer is programmed, the release may be aborted by pressing abort switch. For ULI installations, pushing the Abort will allow the timer to countdown until 10 seconds and then halt. Releasing reactivating the Abort will set the timer to 10 seconds. and Maintenance Test this system monthly or more frequently as required by the AHJ. Before conducting any testing contact the building personnel the monitoring facility as applicable. When testing a system configured for releasing, activate the releasing disconnect switch to accidental discharge of a suppression system. Test the circuits as outlined in the Installation Manual. Test in accordance with 72 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance Chapter(s) and any local requirements. The batteries should be marked with the date of and replaced every four years or sooner if battery trouble occurs. Batteries should be checked with a tester acceptable to the such as a Stone Technologies model STC612A or equivalent. In case of a fuse replacement, refer to the Installation Manual for the rating. Contact the agency below for service or operational questions. the button is pressed, all programmed speaker zones are selected and corresponding LEDs on the SB-8 and SB-24 will illuminate indicate the zones are enabled. Speaker zones can be deselected individually by selecting the corresponding button or can relinquish speaker zones by pressing the All Call button. the RESET button is pressed, all active ECS events will relinquish. the CTRL button is pressed, this allows operator consoles to request control of the system when a remote operator console is in steady amber LED indicates a LOC-1000 is requesting control of t

Terms address of the device 1 – 31 ID – 84 1-5 reporting account 1-64 – 127 address By Point following table identifies the reporting codes generated for specific panel events when reporting by point. using SIA reporting format with the MC-1000 module(s) to allow a single account for multiple panels, the events will the modifier added to them to identify the specific panel the event pertains to. ID cannot be used to report by point when using MC-1000(s) to allow multiple panels to report using the same By Point Format ID Format Panel Panel power Up power Trouble power Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Charger Trouble Charger Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore 00 00 00 00 00 00 page 1 OF 11 By Point Format ID Format Panel Panel Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Trouble Trouble Restore Host Trouble Host Trouble Restore Client Trouble Client Trouble Restore Reporting ethernet Trouble Reporting ethernet Restore Line 1 Trouble Line 1 Restore Line 2 Trouble Line 2 Restore Communication Fail Communication Restore Com 1 Trouble Com 1 Restore Com 2 Trouble Com 2 Restore primary Target Trouble primary Target Restore Secondary Target Trouble Secondary Target Restore primary Target Trouble primary Target Restore Secondary Target Trouble Secondary Target Restore page 2 OF 11 By Point Format ID Format Panel Panel Changed Changed program Suc

Fireray One no specialist tools or knowledge needed for installation and operation, the Fireray is a standalone beam detector that prioritises ease of installation. the Fireray One, it couldn be easier to bring the benefits of beam detection to application: One Minute Auto-Alignment just steer the laser onto the Reflector, at the flick of a switch, it aligns itself. 8 times faster than detectors One person installation everything can be done by one person One standalone product no specialist tools required; minimal prior knowledge training needed Challenge One effective protection standalone beam detector all the benefits of Fireray beam detection point of wiring and Movement Tracking compensates for building movement to maintain alignment* installation of the building cause other beam to misalign and in nuisance alarms specification performance range method protocol Movement Tracking Compensation Cancellation Technology wavelength smoke detection laser laser alignment Beam Phasing output user settings response threshold levels to Alarm to Fault features user interface status indication status indication to 164ft (0 to 50m) to 394ft (0 to 120m) with Reflective Long Range Kit assisted, Auto-Alignment Manual alignment optional setting check, Box search, Adjust and Center for natural shifts in alignment from building movement* for gradual build-up of contamination on the optical surfaces for high levels of sunlight and artificial lighting near infrared (invisible) visible. Class IIIa <5mW beam detectors to be mounted facing each other with the reflectors in the middle. false alarms caused by crosstalk between beams Alarm and Fault relays (VFCO) 0.5A @ 30 VDC (1.25dB) Fastest response to smoke (1.87dB) Default value (3.46dB) High immunity to false alarms, slow response to smoke (8.23dB) Highest immunity to false alarms, slowest response to smoke via the integrated user interface seconds, for momentary partial obstruction of the beam path seconds, for momentary obstruction of the beam path mode switch, alignment directional buttons and configuration switches for alarm response Green LEDs and 1 Yellow LED operation Green LED flashing every 10 seconds condition Red LED flashing every 10 seconds condition Yellow LED flashing every 10 seconds for obscuration or every 5 seconds for front face with enclosed optics. Cleaning the optics does not affect alignment parameters distance between Detector Reflector path clearance spacing between detectors location dimensions dimensions weight arrangement color specifications voltage current (constant) all operational modes wiring gauge and type entry and maintenance test specifications temperature: -4 to 131 (-20 to +55 temperature: -40 to 185 (-40 to +85 humidity (non-condensing or icing): 0 to 93% rating: IP55 flammability rating: UL94 V0 polycarbonate figures are quoted for 77 (25 information number and Maintenance Kit Detector adjustment bracket Fireray One Protective cage Reflector Adjustment Bracket Reflector Adjustment Bracket wall bracket - white wall bracket - black One Anti-condensation heater Anti-condensation heater One Back Box Gang Electrical Box Cover Plate to 164ft (5 to 50m) to 394ft (50 to 120m) with Reflective Long Range Kit (1m) in diameter from center line between Detector and Reflector (18.3m)

User Guide de usuario de l per l DE, ES, FR, IT Guide 1 the Box Fireray One Base Fireray One Detector Head Reflector Guide Range Mask guide 2 Information installations should comply with local 0.3m – 120m – 20m = + Short Range Mask – 50m = 1 Reflector NOT position Detector where personnel objects can enter the beam path NOT install the Detector or Reflector in where condensation or icing are to occur unless preventative measures been taken beam as high as possible, but with a distance of 0.3m from Detector and to ceiling. detectors approved to UL268 refer to for installation guidance. In such it is advised that the maximum of Detector and Reflector from the must be 10% of the distance between and ceiling – 120m = 4 Reflectors correct Reflector selected for the distance Detector and Reflector directly each other not mount Reflector onto reflective 3 Fireray One contains software that the output of the detector and a Fire and Fault status. This status output using volt-free relays so that it can interfaced to all types of conventional Fire Panel (FCP). To wire a single Detector an FCP, use the following wiring diagram. not supplied: Fire Resistor (Note 1) – value is specified by FCP manufacturer. U.S. installations it is typically a short End Of Line ( component – supplied FCP manufacturer installation, check operation of Fire and connections to the FCP – see page 15. a voltage of 5V to 40V to Reset for at least 2 seconds to clear a latched condition see page 14 for latching mode For system monitoring Do not looped wire under any terminals. run to provide monitoring of con- + – Reset – + – + 1 4 using more than one Detector on a zone of a conventional FCP, it is to choose the correct method wiring. Incorrect wiring may result in a isolating subsequent devices on that if it enters a Fault condition, and may these subsequent devices signalling a condition back to the FCP. the FCP monitors for point detector it is possible to use the following diagram which uses a diode to provide continuity in the event of a Fault state on Detector. diode type: Schottky, 60 Volt, Amp, must be UL listed for installations NFPA72 + – Reset – In +In – + 1 – Out + Out 5 Base and drill holes for mounting of Base. appropriate hardware (not supplied) base securely in orientation shown. the cable from the Detector head into the on the PCB in the Base. the Detector Head on the base. Grip of Detector Head and rotate clockwise lock together. Base is mounted on solid surface as a structural wall or girder. For accessories please see our 6 the and Dip align 7 User Interface window and settings Status door should remain attached to Fireray One, however on the rare that it becomes unattached, is possible to reattach the tether by the barbed end. 8 Status indicators Switch Alignment-Off/On keys Switch 9 One will align in less than a minute if Alignment is selected. In this mode, the consumption dur

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Smoke Detection Transmitter head emits a narrow beam of infra-red light to an Receiver head. Once smoke crosses through and thus the IR beam path, the signal strength at the Receiver drops a preset level which in turn results in an alarm condition. Fireray 3000 Exd has been designed so that it can be installed by operator, with its laser assisted alignment method combined with to use alignment LEDs offering visual feedback. Integrated laser aid can be activated at the Controller. Fireray 3000 Exd also has a feature which allows for the Transmitter be powered from the Controller by wiring directly, thus reducing the of power supplies required. low level system Controller incorporates a LCD display, which offers full icon-based, easy-to-use interface unit. This Controller enables ease commissioning, testing and maintenance of the beam detection system. commissioning the detector fire sensitivity thresholds can be along with the user variable time to alarm and time to trouble system is fully compliant with the requirements of RoHS and WEEE. 3000 Exd Optical Beam Detector Fireray 3000 Exd is ideally suited for the protection of large with potentially explosive atmospheres, against smoking fires. 3000 Exd comprises an infrared transmitter and a receiver, of which are ATEX-certified for use in Group 2 hazardous There is a separate, safe area, wall-mounted remote/low control unit to allow adjustment and testing from a convenient location. product is designed for large enclosures within oil rigs, refineries, stores and similar premises. It provides an early warning of or strongly smoke-generative fires, which may not be up by flame detectors installed in many hazardous areas. Separate transmitter and receiver unit certified to Exd Allows for 2 Detectors per System Controller Range 33ft to 262ft, (10 to 80 metres) configurable set of Detectors Integral Laser Alignment in Receiver 2-wire Interface between Controller and Receiver Separate Alarm and Trouble Relays per Detector Remote/low Level Controller with LCD display (Safe Area) Programmable Sensitivity and Fire/Fault delay Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for drift compensation First Fix concept for transmitter, reciever and controller Multiple cable gland knockouts for ease of wiring Transmitter can be powered from Controller Complies with ATEX Light Cancellation Technology Fireray 3000 Exd complies with the ATEX directive. II 2GD IP66 d IIC T6 Gb tb IIIC T85 Db List (Additional Detector): Inch (203mm) Inch (73.50mm) 3000 Exd Specification Range: Voltage Range: Controller Current 1 or 2 Receivers): Transmitter Current: Down Reset Time: and Fault Relay Contacts: Temp. (non-condensing): Wavelength: Indications: Unit – to 262ft, (10 to 80 metres) to 36V DC (constant) (per Transmitter) seconds 2A @ 30 Volts DC to +55 (14 to131 = Fire = Fault = System OK LEDs for person alignment. (Controller) (Transmitter/Receiver) x Transmitter (clear lens) x Receiver (dark lens) x Control Unit x Fixing Kit x Brackets x Transmitter (clear lens) x Receiver (dark lens) x Fixing Kit x Brackets V2 PC Free Alloy LM25, red x 20mm 15ATEX1260 – Rating: Humidity (non- List (System): Material Gland Entries: Approval figures are quoted for 25 Inch Inch & Operation Thresholds Default Max to Alarm/Fault in 1 sec steps): Time-out in 1 min steps): Sensitivity/Threshold in 1% steps): Unit: (606g) & Receiver (Inc. Brackets): 2.513670oz (3.7kg) Inch (149mm) Inch (190mm) Recommendations ref

Optical Beam Smoke Detector Guide Description Ex d Optical Beam Smoke Detector is used for fire detection in explosive atmospheres. consists of a standard Controller, combined with rugged flameproof / dustproof Transmitter Receiver heads. The Transmitter and Receiver heads are designed to be mounted within protected hazardous area, whilst the Controller is housed outside it. installed, the Transmitter head projects a modulated infra-red beam (inherently safe radiation) across the protected area, to the Receiver head mounted opposite. The signal strength is monitored and analysed in the Receiver, and should the signal fall below the preset threshold for more than the fire delay selected by the user, a fire is signalled to the Controller. Statement of Intended Use system is intended for use as a Smoke Detector only, in Exd IIC/IIIC, or lower grade areas. must not be used in areas with a greater hazard rating. It must be installed and tested by competent personnel, in accordance with all regulatory and local codes of practise. liability shall be accepted for installations not conforming to this requirement. equipment is covered by certificate number Sira 15ATEX1260, and the following apply. The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapours with apparatus group II and temperature class T6 in the ambient temperature range -20 to +55 The equipment is only certified for use in ambient temperatures in the range -20 to +55 should not be used outside this range. Installation should be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the code of practice. Inspection of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance the applicable code of practice. The equipment does not have any user-serviceable parts and must be returned to the for servicing or repair. This Installation Guide contains the system Principle of Operation; system Specification; Precautions; Installation Setting Up and Testing; Installation diagrams. The certification of this equipment relies upon EMH29 Enclosure Component (typically Alloy) Certificate No. TRAC13ATEX0058U from JCE (Europe) Ltd. If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the of the user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely thus ensuring that the type of protection provided by the equipment is not substances: e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals, or solvents that affect polymeric materials. precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections, or establishing from material data sheets that it is resistant to specific chemicals. Label details: area into which the parts are to be fitted must be made safe before attempting any work on system. It must also be checked thoroughly prior/during/after commissioning, to it cannot compromise the safety of the area in which it is fitted. Note that only the and receiver parts may be installed in the hazardous area, NOT the controller unit. the flamepath of the enclosure is damaged in any way, the unit must be returned to the and a new unit purchased. General Information clear line of from Receiver Transmitter Unit IMPORTANT NOTE: The infrared beam path MUST be kept clear of obstructions at all Failure to comply may result in the system initiating a Fire or Fault signal. All installations should comply with local regulations For installations approved to UL 268 refer to NFPA 72 for installation guidance. In such it is advised that the maximum distance of Transmitter and Receiver from the must be 10% of the distance between floor and ceiling Ensure a clear line of sight from Receiver to Transmitter Mount on solid surfaces (structural wall or girder) and ensure fixing is rigid Position beam as high as possible, but with a minimum distance of 30cm from to ceiling Mount Receiver and Transmitter directly opposite each other Do NOT position where personnel or objects can enter the beam path Do NOT install the Transmitter or Receiver in environments where condensation or icing are to occur – 100m

No text preview available.

Features Provides 24 programmable push buttons for phone circuit Includes bracket for secure mounting Maximum of 4 per FFT-1000R and FFT-1000L FSB-24 switch board provides 24 programmable push buttons for circuit assignment. Each button has two corresponding LEDs indicate activity and trouble conditions. The FSB-24 is equipped a bracket for secure mounting. A maximum of 4 FSB-24 can be within an FFT-1000R and FFT-1000L. mA Specifications Current (32 mA @ 30 (86 noncondensing humidity PAGE 1 OF 2 FSB-24 connects to the FSB-8 through a 10 pin ribbon cable. The are power limited and supervised. The FSB-24 is equipped a bracket to securely mount to the FFT-1000R and FFT-1000L dead Information SWITCH BOARD W/24 SWITCHES No. PAGE 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

Features Suitable for use in NFpa 13, 2016, a.6.8.4 applications. Allows Eliminates Provides Indicates Key Compatible Specifications This key operated switch assembly to switch between red ACTIVATED LED provides a visual will disconnect the flowswitch from the fire alarm panel local alarm while simultaneously lighting an amber LED the switch plate to indicate that the waterflow alarm has been page 1 OF 2 1 WITHOUT FSBS TO INDICATE ROUTING IN BOX TO SEPARATION USING 120 VAC CLAMP INSTALLED WIRE + – MODULE/ POWER ZONE VDC ALARM CONTROL PANEL CLAMP VAC BELL 120 VAC IS USED WITH USE CABLE PROVIDED TO HIGH VOLTAGE AWAY FROM ALL WIRING. VAC BREAKER limited wires shall be FPL, FPLP, FPLR or equivalent. If

FLOWSWITCH of coordinating schedules with alarm companies and sprinkler Want to save hundreds of dollars a year when performing system fills and tests? FSBS is a key operated switch which when turned to the Bypass will disconnect the flowswitch from the fire alarm panel and/or alarm while simultaneously lighting an amber LED on the switch to indicate that the waterflow alarm has been bypassed. This the sprinkler system to be filled after service or maintenance activating the alarm system. It also provides a visual indication the flowswitch status to indicate if it is in alarm or normal condition of the FSBS will result in a trouble condition on the fire alarm Restoral of the FSBS to normal will result in the fire alarm panel to normal. Specifications and install a UL listed Flow Switch Bypass Switch for bypassing waterflow switch in the vicinity of the flowswitch where it will be from the floor or where required by the AHJ. device shall consist of a stainless steel plate with a key switch and (3) LED Green for Normal, Amber for Bypassed and Red for Activated. the normal condition the green LED on the device shall be lit indicating the flowswitch is connected to the fire alarm panel and local bell applicable. the keyswitch to the bypassed position turns off the green LED lights the amber LED. This disconnects the flowswitch from the fire causing it to go into a trouble condition. It also disconnects the from the local bell if applicable. of the flowswitch will light the red LED on the device of the position of the key switch. switch model; FSBS manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Co. E A T U R E S filled without activating local alarm or fire panel with alarm companies sprinkler techs Allows sprinkler system to Eliminates need to coordinate Provides visual indication of FSBS monitored flowswitch Key operated to prevent Compatible with any flowswitch, indicating appliance and panel use Information Switch Mount Gang – Red # Electric Signal Company, LLC [email protected] 866-956-1211 www.pottersignal.com

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED PRODUCTS GROUP (CPG)1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63031 Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6731 Fax (309) 762-8215 [email protected] FSEX, Series B1 strobe lights with clear lens. Refer to listee’s data sheet for product description and operational considerations. 15 cd 120/240 VAC, 24 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes, ordinances and a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. as strobe lights for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. for the hearing impaired application (with clear lens only). Intended for use on wall or in non-sleeping areas. For indoor use only. Enclosure is rated NEMA or Type 4x. 06-23-2004 listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

Features Approved for mounting in any matter including dome up Synchronize with SSM module Four lens covers: Amber, blue, clear and red 10,000 hour strobe tube 3/4 NPT pendant, ceiling and wall mount options available Dome guard optional Type 4X, IP66, IPK69 enclosure Marine rated Federal Signal Model FSeX explosion-proof strobe light 80 high-intensity flashes per minute. This warning operates on 24VDC and is unique to the market because covers an entire range of possible mounting configurations including dome up. This light is designed for use in alarm systems and is compatible with fire alarm and supervised control panels and power boosters. 24VDC FSEX features a voltage in-rush limiting PCB that provides greater compatibility with factory control systems and less electrical interference in-rush sensitive devices. Model FSEX is specifically designed for explosion-proof and/or corrosive environments. Because it is to install and requires very low maintenance, it is ideal use in areas such as oil rigs, mines, refineries, and chemical Specifications VDC polarized amps (3.0 amps in-rush) Voltage Current Rate per peak* Life Source Range hours tube Aluminum to 150 mounting: 13.9 lbs mount: 4.5 lbs mount: 2.0 lbs mount: 5.9 lbs Peak candela is the maximum light intensity generated a flashing light during its light pulse. page 1 OF 3 “/8 mm A-A “/ 224 mm “/176 mm Model Aluminum Intensity Tube Dome “/ 376 mm “/ 264 mm 0.38 “/10 mm 3/4” NPT NPT A-A “/133 mm “/ mm bolt circle must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with all national and local codes and hazard. Disconnect power source before Serious injury or death could result. Read all instructions carefully and understand them starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in injury or death. “/ 224 mm Locations Group Division B D F, G & 2 & 2 & 2 ” “/ bolt circle page 2 OF 3 Information Number Ordering Number 1400506 Call for part 1430507 Explosion Proof Explosion Proof explosion proof explosion proof Guard Mount Degree Wall Mount Tube (Series A2, Module, 2 Strobes circuit Mount Light and Mounting Kit must be ordered together. Specify model, voltage and color Specify Mounting Kit: Optional Accessories: (CMXC-R-SB) (PMXC-R-SB) Mount (WMXC-4R-SB) Guard (DGXC-SB) sync module (SSM) page 3 OF 3

Features Approved for mounting in any matter including dome up Synchronize with SSM module Current limited 10,000 hour strobe tube 3/4 NPT pendant, ceiling and wall mount options available Dome guard optional Type 4X, IP66, IPK69 enclosure UL Listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, 1, Groups E, F and G; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, and Class III Marine rated Federal Signal Model FSeX-HI explosion-proof strobe produces 80 high-intensity flashes per minute. This light operates on 24VDC and is unique to the market it covers an entire range of possible mounting including dome up. This light is designed for in alarm notification systems and is compatible with fire and suppression supervised control panels and power 24VDC FSEX-HI features a voltage in-rush limiting design that provides greater compatibility with factory control systems and less electrical interference in-rush sensitive devices. Model FSEX-HI is specifically designed for explosion- atmospheres and/or corrosive environments. Because it easy to install and requires very low maintenance, it is ideal use in areas such as oil rigs, mines, refineries, and chemical Specifications VDC polarized amps (3.0 amps in-rush) Voltage Current Rate per peak* Life Source Range hours tube Aluminum to 150 mounting: 13.9 lbs mount: 4.5 lbs mount: 2.0 lbs mount: 5.9 lbs Peak candela is the maximum light intensity generated a flashing light during its light pulse. page 1 OF 2 Model Aluminum Intensity Tube Dome “/8 mm A-A ” “/ bolt circle “/ 224 mm “/176 mm “/ 376 mm “/ 264 mm 0.38 “/10 mm 3/4” NPT NPT A-A “/133 mm “/ mm bolt circle “/ 224 mm Information Number Ordering Number 1400506 Call for part 1430507 Strobe, VDC, 1.9A, Red Clear Lens Guard Mount Degree Wall Mount Tube (Series A2, Module, 2 Strobes circuit Mount must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with all national and local codes and hazard. Disconnect power source before Serious injury or death could result. Read all instructions carefully and understand them starting installation. Save instructions for future Failure to read and understand instructions could in improper operation of device resulting in injury or death. Group Division Locations & 2 & 2 & 2 B D F, G page 2 OF 2

A Brand FLAT TRUMPET SIREN Wall or ceiling mount 6 dip-switch selectable sounds 125dB sound output Impact resistant housing Low profile design Patented design Bi-directional mounting bracket Waterproof housing Designer white housing FSS-26T: 3.34 x 3.34 x 2.16 (D) FSS-26T siren is extremely loud and surprisingly small. It is almost half the size of standard 15 watt trumpet sirens and puts out 125dB. little screamer is almost as powerful as a big 30 watt horn. However, the FSS-26T is not a high pitched piezo. It does utilize a unique reverse trumpet technology to generate the loudest sound blast. In addition, there is a six dip-switch selectable siren sound option. sounds can be set individually or programmed sequentially. The FSS-26T is an indoor/outdoor design with a reversible mounting bracket. Tones: Yelp Ray Gun Warble European Slow Whoop Pulsing Buzzer Ray Gun Yowl Flat Trumpet Design Mounting Bracket the tone by setting the dip-switch to On. Housing Power Current Ouput – 122 – 50 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8850062 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand SHOCK SENSOR Detects physical shock on glass Direct replacement for foil Covers 10 ft. radius Mounts with supplied double-sided tape Available in white Self-generating power on alarm GSC-20N Glass Shock Sensor is designed to detect physical shock on glass. This device is designed to detect any unauthorized entry any glass door or window. The GSC-20N is a direct replacement for foil alarms. (26) (930) (58) view view Loop Time Alarm (N.C.) ohm max. (Open) 1 ohm min. ma second AWG conductor ft. length to 122 to 50 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880102 – REV B 1 OF 1

Guardian QR700 Canada Public Safety BDA QR700 Public BDA Provides improved coverage for Public Safety MHz bands for coverage up to 80,000 sq ft 80 dB Wideband and 3W EIRP for Public Safety Design increases number of users to 100+ per band Features built-in SureCall Sentry remote system with Ethernet port 7-pin alarm and UPS port for battery backup Meets Chapter 24 Emergency Communications of NFPA 72 NEMA 4 rated amplifier housing. No additional enclosure(s) needed Energy-saving operation allows bands to dormant when not in use Automatic gain control (AGC) adjustable frequency for uplink and downlink Reduce gain in -1 dBm increments Guardian QR700 Canada Public Safety Band booster enhances in-building coverage for crucial delivering consistent signal for First and other public safety officials who rely on two- radio communication inside large buildings. QR700 is a Bi-Directional Amplifier that services the Public Safety 700 MHz bands for Canada. The Guardian meets Chapter 24 of NFPA 72 standards, improving First Responder signals for critical and non-critical areas the building. the majority of cases, newly constructed buildings with size, or existing buildings that increase capacity expanding the building footprint are required to have signal of -95 dBm or better in designated critical areas stairwells, etc. in order to receive a certificate of Guardian QR700 meets the code for NFPA 72 and a NEMA-4 rated amplifier housing. the QR700 comes equipped with dry contact 7-pin compatibility, UPS and Ethernet port enabled remote TowerIQ provides an industry leading 3-year Island City, NY, 11101 | https://toweriq.nyc/ | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. QR700 Canada Public Safety BDA x 17 x 6 inches Specifications cooling Supply Connections 110 V, 60 Hz Female lbs to +131 MHz MHz dBm dBm Specifications Range, Uplink Range, Downlink Bandwidth of Channels Output Power, Output Power, System Gain Adjustment Range dB step) Band Ripple, p-p Figure RF Output Power Standards Maximum RF Power dB dB dB dB 2.0 dBm / 24 dBm Safety 700 Building Component Layout Antenna: Directional – Receives outside signal cable: TQ-400 coax cable alarm cable to annunciating panel Cable from booster to (for Sentry remote monitoring) Arrestor splitter splitter power supply to standard outlet cable: TQ-400 coax cable omni-directional antennas Island City, NY, 11101 | https://toweriq.nyc/ | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. QR700 Canada Public Safety BDA Components: CA bi-directional amplifier with NEMA-4 rated housing mounting kit cable and connector connector power cable power cable and connector Required Components: Some component options are listed in table below. Not accessories are listed. Multiple Inside antennas b (omnidirectional domes and/or External antenna a (directional Yagi) panels) splitter for inside antennas c TQ-400 ultra-low loss interior/exterior cable, 50 ohm d protector surge suppressor for DC power supply Outdoor Antenna Options Inside Antenna Options Wide Band Dome 50 Antenna (698 -2700 MHz) Wide Band Panel 50 Antenna (698-2700 MHz) Splitters and Couplers Band Couplers (698-2700 MHz) Band Splitters (698-2700 MHz) U

GUARDIAN3 QR – Response Use Safety (PSB) Users Band Safety Communications Amplifier latest innovation, the Guardian3 QR, is a tri-band bi-directional that services the full Public Safety 700 MHz (FirstNet Ready) and 800 bands as well as 900 MHz SMR (Specialized Mobile Radio Service). The QR meets Chapter 24 of NFPA 72, 1221 and IFC 510 standards, weak First Responder signals for critical and non-critical areas within building. Features improved coverage for Public Safety 700 MHz (FirstNet Ready) and MHz bands as well as 900 MHz SMR dB wide-band amplifier Meets Chapter 24 Emergency Communications System of NFPA 72, 1221 and 510 7-pin alarm built-in SureCall Sentry remote monitoring system with Ethernet port NEMA 4 rated amplifier housing. No additional NEMA enclosure(s) needed UPS port for external battery backup gain control (AGC) 110V or D/C 16-24V power option adjustable frequency attenuation for uplink and downlink operation allows bands to remain dormant when not in use gain in -1 dBm increments Applications Commercial Hospitality House of Worship MDU your warranty at surecall.com/activate QR | 11-15-2018 v2.6 2017 SureCall | 48346 Milmont Drive, Fremont CA 94538 | 1-888-365-6283 | [email protected] Guardian3 QR Bi-Directional Amplifier with Nema4 Rated Enclosure Product Specifications Frequency Range: / 806-824 / 896-901 (Including D Block) Frequency Range: / 851-869 / 935-940 (Including D Block) Standards: Safety 700 and 800 and SMR 900 Gain: Gain Noise dB dB 8 dB 2.0 dBm RF Output Power: dBm Connectors: Female (both ends) Consumption: QR Name / Part Frequency Range (MHz): Frequency Range(MHz): Gain: Adjustment: Figure: Standards: QR / SC-TriPSBS-80-QR / 806-824 / 896-901 (Including D Block) / 851-869 / 935-940 (Including D Block) dB dB 8 dB 2.0 Safety 700 and 800, and SMR 900 Input: 16-24V or A/C 110V, 60 Hz RF Output Power: Connectors: Consumption: Temperature: (USA): are subject to change. Specifications contained within apply only to products meeting the latest FCC Certification Guidelines of 2/20/2013. dBm dBm (not provided) Female (both ends) to +131 x 17 x 6 inches lbs. This is NOT a CONSUMER device. It is designed for installation by FCC LICENSES and QUALIFIED INSTALLERS. You MUST have an LICENSE or express consent of an FCC Licensee to operate this device. Unauthorized use may result in significant forfeiture penalties, penalties in excess of $100,000 for each continuing violation.

Guardian4 Public Safety BDA Safety BDA Provides improved coverage for Public Safety MHz (FirstNet) and 800 MHz 80 dB gain for Public Safety Bands Features built-in TowerIQ Sentry remote with ethernet port 7-pin alarm and UPS port for battery backup NEMA-4 rated amplifier housing. No NEMA enclosure(s) needed Meets the code for NFPA 1221 and IFC 510 Dry contact 7-pin alarm, UPS and Ethernet for remote monitoring Energy-saving operation allows bands to dormant when not in use Automatic gain control (AGC) A/C 110V or D/C 12- 20V power option adjustable frequency for uplink and downlink (Reduce in -1 dBm increments) leading 3-year warranty available Guardian4 Public Safety Band signal booster amplifies signals for crucial communications, delivering consistent for First Responders and other public safety officials relying two-way radio communication inside large buildings. Guardian4 is a bi-directional amplifier with a maximum gain 80 dB on the Public Safety frequency bands, supporting 700 (FirstNet Ready) and 800 MHz. the majority of cases, newly constructed buildings with size, or existing buildings that increase capacity expanding the building footprint are required to have signal of -95 dBm or better in designated critical areas stairwells, etc. in order to receive a certificate of Guardian4 meets the code for NFPA 1221 and IFC 510 features a NEMA-4 rated amplifier housing, which eliminates need for an additional NEMA enclosure. the Guardian4 comes equipped with dry contact alarming capability, UPS and Ethernet port enabled remote The BDA features sturdy metal construction and is by an industry leading 3-year warranty. Island City, NY, 11101 | http://toweriq.nyc | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. Public Safety BDA Specifications Frequency Adjustment Gain RF Output Figure Connections Frequency x 19 x 9 in MHz dB dB dBm (DL) dBm (UL) 5 dB dBm Female MHz 2.0 lbs Specifications Frequency Range (MHz) Frequency Range (MHz) Gain: Standards: Adjustment: Figure: Input: RF Output Power: delay Temperature: Consumption ID: / 806-816 / 851-861 dB Safety 700 and 800 dB 5 dBm 2.0 12- 20V; AC 110V; 60 dBm (DL), +26 dBm dBm Microseconds to +131 Part 90 / UL: 60950-1 Building Component Layout Antenna: Directional – Receives outside signal cable: TQ-400 coax cable alarm cable to annunciating panel Cable from booster to (for Sentry remote monitoring) Arrestor splitter splitter power supply to standard outlet cable: TQ-400 coax cable omni-directional antennas Island City, NY, 11101 | http://toweriq.nyc | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. Public Safety BDA A7 USB on top of BDA BDA Interface lug Female for OUTSIDE cable and antenna Fire Department Control Box Standard Ethernet Cable Device lug I/O 110VAC Connect to 110VAC or 110V of UPS output LEDs 12-20V Female for INSIDE cable and antenna to initialize the network connection an alarm condition DC, voltage should be between Outdoor Antenna Options Wide Band 50 Yagi Antenna (698 – 2700 MHz) connectors to 11 dBi Inside Antenna Options Wide Band Dome 50 Antenna (698 -2700 MHz) Wide Band Panel 50 Antenna (698-2700

GuardianA Class A Public Safety BDA A Public BDA coverage for Public Safety Band 14 Network Frequencies: (UL: 788-805, & DL: 758-775 851-861) Class A, 32 channel independently controlled per band with Auto Gain Control for each channel 90 dB gain, 2-Watt system Meets the code for NFPA 72/1221 and IFC 510 NEMA-4 rated amplifier housing Ethernet port with built-in TowerIQ Sentry monitoring hardware dry contact 9-pin alarming UPS port for external battery backup Automatic gain control (AGC) and Oscillation Energy-saving operation allows bands to dormant when not in use A/C 110V or D/C 24- 30 V power option adjustable frequency for uplink and downlink gain in -1 dBm increments) leading 3-year warranty available GuardianA Public Safety Band signal booster in-building coverage for crucial communications, consistent signal for First Responders and public safety officials who rely on two-way radio inside large buildings. is a Class A, 2-Watt, bi-directional amplifier with a gain of 90 dB supporting both the 700 and 800 MHz Safety frequency bands. the majority of cases, newly constructed buildings with size, or existing buildings that increase capacity expanding the building footprint are required to have signal of -95 dBm or better in designated critical areas stairwells, etc. in order to receive a certificate of GuardianA meets the code for NFPA 72/1221 and 510 and features a NEMA-4 rated amplifier housing. the GuardianA comes equipped with dry contact alarming compatibility, UPS and Ethernet port enabled monitoring. TowerIQ provides an industry leading warranty. Island City, NY, 11101 | https://toweriq.nyc/ | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. Specifications Range, Uplink Range, Downlink Bandwidth of Channels Output Power, Uplink Output Power, System Gain Adjustment Range dB step) Band Ripple, p-p Noise Figure Group Delay kHz to 1 GHz GHz to 12.75 MHz 805 MHz 775 MHz / 25 / 75 + 10 (LTE, US) dBm dBm dB dB dB dB usec dBm Compliance MHz 816 MHz 861 MHz / 25 / 75 dBm dBm dB dB dB dB usec dBm Compliance Compliance Compliance Maximum RF Power dBm dBm Building Component Layout Antenna: Directional – Receives outside signal cable: TQ-400 coax cable alarm cable to annunciating panel Cable from booster to (for Sentry remote monitoring) Class A Public Safety BDA Specifications cooling Supply Connections ID 2AXVJPSBG-2A Part 90 x 17.2 x 8.0 in band: 60W band: 80W 100-240/50-60 Hz 24-30 V Female lbs (53 lbs shipped) to +140 (-33 to +60 Arrestor splitter splitter power supply to standard outlet cable: TQ-400 coax cable omni-directional antennas Island City, NY, 11101 | https://toweriq.nyc/ | (844) 626-7638 2021 TowerIQ, Inc. Class A Public Safety BDA Components: bi-directional amplifier with NEMA-4 rated housing mounting kit cable and connector connector power cable power cable and connector Required Components: Some component options are listed in table below. Not accessories are listed. Multiple Inside antennas b (omnidirectional domes and/or

No text preview available.

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE — AUDIBLE DEVICES 1 of 1 Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 United States Brad Serangeli (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 [email protected] H-1224 and H-1224W -horns Model H-1224W is suitable for outdoor use. to listee’s data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational or 24 VDC accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. Model H-1224W is suitable for use when installed with Model BBX-5 backbox. as audible signal devices for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control can produce a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. Refer to manufacturer Manual for details. No. bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2021 Expires 30, 2022 By: CASTILLO,, M.E., F.P.E. Engineering Division

H-1224 SERIES UL and cUL listed 33 sound output settings Horn or chime sound output Indoor/outdoor* listed Pre-wire back plate Universal back plate mounting (single gang, double gang, octagon, or 4 square) Single screw mounting Low current draw Outdoor installation requires the BBK-1 #1500001, BBX-5R #4270048, or BBX-5W #4270049 Outdoor installations must use either the BBK-1 4 square bell backbox) or the BBX-5 (weatherproof backbox). back plate allows the installer to mount the plate and terminate wire connections. The horn attaches in a hinge fashion from the and is secured by a single mounting screw. The horn completely the mounting back plate, therefore it can be mounted before trades work is completed and not affect the final look. jumper plug is provided to test for correct in the supervisory mode only. Do not alarm current through the jumper. H-1224 Electronic Horn allows a number of applications on a device. The horn settings include Temporal, Non-Temporal, Time and a Chime sound. The horn also has Low, Mid and volume settings for each pattern and tone. The tones include Hz, Electro-Mechanical, Broadband and Chime. voltage input can be either regulated DC or full wave rectified 12 volt or 24 volt operation. H-1224 utilizes a universal mounting plate that will mount a single gang, double gang, octagon and 4 square electrical Installation must comply in accordance with applicable standards. 8910006-1A BBK-1 Information Number Number horn horn Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA MKT. #8910006 – REV E 1 OF 3 SERIES Horn Current RMS Current RMS Current) Reverberant Ratings per (dBA @ 10 ft.) Anechoic Ratings per S525 (dBA @ 10 ft.) 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Horn Current RMS Current RMS Current) Reverberant Ratings per (dBA @ 10 ft.) Anechoic Ratings per S525 (dBA @ 10 ft.) 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC Hz Hz Hz Time Horn Current RMS Current RMS Current) Reverberant Ratings per (dBA @ 10 ft.) Anechoic Ratings per S525 (dBA @ 10 ft.) 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC IN USA MKT. #8910006 – REV E 2 OF 3 SERIES 1 2 3 4 5 6 8910006-2A Settings ON – Non-temporal OFF – Temporal Both 2 = OFF and 2 ON = March Time and 4 ON = 2400Hz ON and 4 OFF = Electromechanical and 4 OFF = Chime OFF and 4 ON = Broadband and 6 ON = High ON and 6 OFF = Mid and 6 OFF = Low

SELECT A HORN H24W SERIES octagonal back box Hz interrupted or electro mechanical or Non temporal or low dBA output with the use of mini jumpers located on back of the unit. These appliances are polarized for connecting to supervised Voltage 4560001 4560002 White DC/ FWR Range 33 VFWR Selectable Terminals Wall or Ceiling 33 VDC 3A 32 120 49 Only Draw Table Pattern Tone Volume RMS Operating (mA) PC2 PC1 Regulated V DC 24 V FWR Sound (dBA @ per UL 464) DC Mechanical Mechanical Hz Hz Current 24V DC of H24W audible alarm indicating appliance shall be Amseco model H24W or equivalent device. The horn shall be listed under The horn shall have a universal back box mounting plate, capable of wall mounting t

HP-25T TYPE MINI HORN Low current consumption Wide operating voltage range Input terminals: 12-18 AWG 2 tone selection: continuous or temporal (code 3) Terminal sound synchronization requires a sync module (SMD-103A) FIRE decal included Available in red or white Mounts to a single gang box (handy box) HP-25T is designed for alarm signaling in hotels, offices, schools, or any individual room where effective audible warning is by federal, state, or local authority having jurisdiction. When voltage from a fire alarm control panel (FACP) is applied to HP-25T, it produces either a continuous tone or a temporal patter tone, which can be selected by a switch. HP-25T can be synchronized when used with the SMD10-3A module. Specifications audible alarm indicating appliance shall be Potter Model HP-25T equivalent device. The horn shall be listed under UL 464 Standard audible signaling appliance and shall be approved for fire protective The sound ouput shall be 81.8dB at ten feet. The horn shall two different field selectable temporal or steady tones, and a and low field selectable sond output setting. The signaling mini shall operate on 24V DC from a non-coded regulated DC supply full-wave rectified, unfiltered supply. The horn shall be capable wall or ceiling mounting to a single gang box. Audible signaling shall be installed in accordance with current NFPA guidelines. Voltage Information RMS Operating Sound Output (mA) @ 10 ft.) DC FWR Regulated 24V DC The sound output is at minimum voltage rating of 16VDC. Higher voltages will have higher output. White DC/ DC Terminal or – 120 – 49 inches (mm) (6.5) Horn Wiring/Mounting DIAGRAM FOR AUDIBLE CLASS B CIRCUIT WITHOUT SILENCE FEATURE. MODULE SMD10-3A – – H- + BOTH TERMINALS (OR FOR CONNECTION. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION. NEXT OR – 3/4 (69.2) 3/8 (35) 3/4 (45) Gang Box IN USA Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com #8850049 REV C 1 OF 1

HPS 24 SERIES HORN WITH SILENCER HPS 24 is designed for alarm signaling in apartments, suites, or any individual room where effective audible warning is required by federal, or local authority having jurisdiction. The mini horns produce a high sound output with a minimum current draw of just 15mA at 24V DC. HPS 24 versions are silenceable mini horns equipped with a Silence push button and a red LED to indicate Active Signal Circuit when lit. The button allows the user to silence the mini horn for a maximum of 10 minutes, upon which the mini horn will sound again until the signal ciruit Information Range Type Range DC/FWR 28.8V wire Wall or Ceiling 140 10 60 24R 24W Voltage Level Spherical (Typical) audible alarm indicating appliance shall be Amseco model HPS 24 silenceable mini horn or equivalent device. The horn shall be listed inches (mm) Horn Wiring/Mounting Gang Box next device end of line IN USA MKT. #8850075 REV C 1 OF 1

Features 24VDC Super-Slide Checkmate Synchronize Prewire Documented Switch Switch Tamperproof Switch Silence Faceplate Specifications 12 AWG PAGE 1 OF 4 Selection selection switch. Depress and slide switch to brightness level. off pin and insert into at the bottom of the to lock candela Signal must be from bracket and pushed forward from out of hole to candela. Locations – Instant Voltage Verification access holes are provided in the back of the terminal to allow the voltage to be measured directly without the device. Typically this would be done at the of the line to confirm design criteria. Most measure- will be taken using the S+ and S- locations although is provided to other locations. NOTE: Care should taken to not short the test probes. Slide Mounting Bracket the installer to pre-wire the system, test for system remove the signal head until occupancy, switch signals without changing mounting brackets and has edge connector for snap-in-place installation. remove bezel, both sides of and pull in downward and motion. PAGE 2 OF 4 24 VDC Selectable Candela, Low Evacuation Strobe

Features Fixed 75cd strobe Includes the WPBB surface-mount (standard) or WPLPBB Low Profile enclosure WPBB/LP made of clear Lexan – provides maximum visibility and allowing full 75cd output Super-Slide Bracket Ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM module Switch selection for high/low dBA Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical, and 2400Hz tone Input terminals accept 18 to 12 AWG Switch for continuous or temporal 3 tone (not available on whoop) Tamperproof re-entrant grill 5 year warranty Version S3247 S/HS-WP Series Outdoor Signals are wall mount, low profile and horn/strobes that offer dependable audible and visual for warning and emergency notification in outdoor locations. Listings ANSI/UL 464 and 1638 with American with Disabilities Act (ADA) with IBC / IFC / IRC S/HS-WP Series Outdoor Signals are 24VDC strobes and horn/ equipped with a fixed 75 candela strobe. series of outdoor signals are available in two different versions. standard version includes a surface-mount back box (WPBB) to directly on a wall. The Low Profile (LP) versions includes a profile back box (WPLPBB) designed to be installed on a flush- electrical box. The weatherproof enclosure is made of Lexan which provides maximum visibility and reliability for visible signaling, allowing full 75cd output. S/HS-WP series strobe has a minimal operating current and a flash rate of 1Hz regardless of input voltage. The strobe is using Gentex sync. protocol or the AVSM Sync. Module. S/HS-WP Series is equipped with a universal 4 mounting bracket incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature that allows the to easily pre-wire the system and test for supervision. The also features a locking mechanism that secures the signal to bracket without showing any screws and the Checkmate – Instant Verification Feature which allows the installer to check the drop, current draw, and match against the blue print. Specifications Voltage 24VDC (16-33VDC) – 150 (-35 – 66 Version – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 3.25 D – 5.75 H x 4.75 W x 4.18 Connections accept 18 – 12 AWG Weight Version Single gang, double gang, or square back box Version – Surface mount back box lbs. PAGE 1 OF 4 75 Candela, Outdoor Strobe Standard or LP Enclosure Number 4890057 Color Enclosure Profile Profile Profile Profile Designations = Wall Mount = Red Face Plate – White Face Plate Plain (Note: Plain units are non-returnable) Low Profile (WPLPBB Enclosure) Current Ratings cd mA mA VDC Max For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual. Series, 75 Candela, Outdoor Horn /Strobe Standard or LP Enclosure Color dBA at 10 per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room dBA at 10 WP Enclosure Number 4890067 Decibel and Current Ratings at 10 UL 464 at 10 UL 464 24VDC Operating at High (mA) Setting 3 2400Hz

Features Nominal Voltage 24 VDC Fixed177 candela strobe Super-Slide Bracket – ease of supervision testing Checkmate – Instant voltage verification Unit Dimensions: 5 (12.7 cm) high x 4.5 (11.43 cm) wide x 2.5 cm) deep. Synchronize strobe and/or horn with AVSM Control Module Pre wire entire system, install mounting bracket, then install signals Documented lower installation and operating costs Input terminals 12 to 18 AWG Switch selection for high or low dBA Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical and 2400Hz tone Switch for continuous or temporal 3 (not available on whoop tone) Tamper proof re-entrant grill Surface mount with the AV-BB Silence horn while strobes remain flashing Faceplate available in red or off-white S/HS24-177 Series is a low profile strobe, or horn/strobe that offers dependable audible and visual alarms with the lowest current available. S/HS24-177 Series has a minimum flash rate of 1Hz regardless of voltage. S/HS24-177 Series is shipped with the standard 4 mounting plate incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature that allows the to easily test for supervision. The product also a locking mechanism which secures the product to the without any screws showing. S/HS24-177 Series also features the patented Checkmate -Instant Verification feature which allows the installer to measure the drop and match it to the blueprint. S/HS-177 Series appliances are ANSI/UL 464, ANSI/UL 1971 ANSI/UL 1638 listed for use with fire protective systems and warranted for five years from date of purchase. (HS24-177) (S24-177) Listings ANSI/UL 464, ANSI/UL 1971 and/or ANSI/UL 1638 Listed Compliance NFPA 72 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Quality Management System is certified to: ISO 9001:2008 & State Ordinances/Laws/Regulations PAGE 1 OF 4 Switch Locations Temporal 3 – Continuous – Temporal 3 – Continuous – Temporal 3 – Continuous POSITION Positions 1 and 2 in the OFF position to isolated horn and strobe power inputs Position 6 ON = HIGH dBA Position 6 OFF = LOW dBA Slide Mounting the installer to pre-wire system, test for system remove the signal until occupancy, switch signals without mounting brackets has locking edge connector snap-in-place installation. Instant Verification is often necessary to confirm the voltage along a line of devices. The access are provided in the back of the block to allow the voltage to be directly without removing the Typically, this would be done at the of line to confirm design criteria. Most will be taken using the S+ S- locations although access is provided other locations. Care should be taken to not short test probes. remove bezel, grip both sides of bezel pull in a download and outward motion. PAGE 2 OF 4 VDC Low Profile Evacuation Strobe Number Number VDC VDC Designations: = Plain (no lettering) = Red faceplate W = White Faceplate. units are non-returnable. Bezel Available: – 4890264 – 4890265 Bezel Available: – 4890262 – 4890263 24 VDC Fixed Candela, Low Profile Evacuation Horn/Strobe Number Number VDC VDC dBA @ per ANSI/UL 464 Anechoic Room @ 10ft. Series Current Ratings (mA) (16-33 Volts) VDC Max1 Horn Decibel and Current Ratings dBA dBA 10ft. per 464 10ft. per 464 12VDC Opera

HSC-1 SECURITY CONTACT VDC max. switching voltage mA max. switching current Watts max. power rating to UL 634 Level 1 Standards, ULC 4 5/16 W x 1 H x 29/32 D Contact Rating: Contact Rating: VDC max. switching voltage mA max. switching current Watts max. power rating Temperature Range: to 151 (-35 to 66 Accessory: (L) Bracket-HSC Mounting Model HSC is a High Security Contact Switch to monitor open or closed position of safe and vault doors. The switch design features, which makes it highly defeat resistant in environments. Triple-biased, with a magnet array in the magnet unit, makes the defeat of Magnetic Hidden For Lead Narrow Grey following operating features and conditions exist with the and magnet units in its secured condition (positioned, and wired correctly): Triple unit will cause an alarm condition. Pry position when the switch is in its secured condition mounting surface will cause a tamper alarm condition. Magnetic attempt to defeat the switch will operate a normally closed causing a magnetic tamper alarm condition. www.pottersignal.com

HUB-M BUTTON and ULC Listed 2″ W x 2 5/16″ L x 1″ H 5,1cm W x 5,9cm L x 2,5cm H 1.5 oz. 42,5 g. Rating: 3 Amps at 28V DC/AC .05 Amp at 125V DC Resistive ABS Plastic Range: 32 to 140 (85% maximum humidity) Limitations: Not recommended for outdoor use or use in coolers or freezers. Stock no. 2020130 (Shown Without Cover) Model HUB-M provides momentary or latching DPDT contacts actuating surveillance cameras or other security applications. The HUB-M To Optional Latching Operation the installed button cap and discard. Replace with alternate cap (supplied). Align the cap such that the latching is directly under the latching ramp in the cover. illustration. in accordance with UL 681. Devices should be installed so cannot be observed by the public and so they can be operated At least one shall be installed in each vault open business hours. In banks they shall also be installed in of ces a view of the public space. unlatch the HUB-M, insert a small pointed object, such as a pocket or paper clip into the reset hole. The unit unlatches when cap is released. Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870005 – REV K 1 OF 1

HUB-T BUTTON & CUL Listed 2 1/16″W x 3 7/16″L x 1 1/4″H 52,4 cm W x 87,3 cm L x 2,7 cm H 2.4 oz. 68,0 g. Rating: 3 Amps at 28V DC/AC .05 Amp at 125V DC Resistive ABS Plastic Range: 32 to 140 (85% maximum humidity) Limitations: Not recommended for outdoor use or use in coolers or freezers. The HUB-T To Optional Latching Operation the installed button caps and discard. Replace with alternate caps (supplied). Align the cap such that the latching is directly over the latching ramp in the base. illustration at right. 996-6 CAP RAMP (Shown with cover) unlatch the HUB-T, insert the reset key, provided with the HUB-T, the switch cap and the base. The unit unlatches when the cap released. No. 2020132 HUB-T Series Hold-Up Buttons provide two sets of momentary latching DPDT contacts for actuating surveillance cameras or other applications, in addition to the hold-up signal. The two sets contacts may be used independently of each other, or they may be in series with a jumper wire for additional protection against alarms. See illustration on page 2. in accordance with UL 681. Devices should be installed so cannot be observed by the public and so they can be operated At least one shall be installed in each vault open business hours. In banks they shall also be installed in of ces a view of the public space. (Shown without cover) OUT FOR SURFACE WIRING JUMPER WIRE EXIT EXIT 996-1 OUT FOR MOUNT WIRING Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8900085 – REV L 1 OF 2 BUTTON Open Hold-up Circuit With EOL Supervision Normally Closed Hold-up Circuit With EOL Supervision (Shown without cover) CAMERA OUT FOR SURFACE WIRING CAMERA EXIT 997-1 HOLD-UP ZONE HOLD-UP ZONE interlock requires both buttons to be activated simultaneously before alarm will occur. Any single button will activate camera. Jumpers required IN USA #8900085 – REV L 2 OF 2

HUR-S RAIL No. 2020019 Listed 11 1/2″W x 5 1/4″H x 3 1/4″D cm W x 13,3 cm H x 8,26 cm D 3.25 lbs. (1,46 kg.) Aluminum with gray spatter enamel finish Rating: DPDT Switch Amps at 24VAC, 1.50 Amps at 0.23 Amp at 115VAC, 0.10 Amp 130VDC model HUR-S is a foot operated holdup switch. The is self locking and has a visual indication to show if is operated. A key switch is required to reset the after it has been operated. contacts are provided, so that the device may be on open or closed circuit alarm systems, and also to annunciators, remote lamps, cameras, etc., at same time DEVICES (SHOWN IN NORMAL UNACTUATED CONDITION) Electric Signal Company 2081 Craig Road, St. Louis, MO, 63146-4161 Phone: 800-325-3936/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8870006 – REV E #5400588 – 12/01 1 OF 1

A Brand HOLD-UP SWITCH Form C contact U-shaped key reset Status window indicator HUS-7A is a single button, latching hold-up switch designed to provide a rapid signal to alarm systems. It is activated by pressing down the button switch. status window indicates the condition of the switch: RED (alarmed), BLUE (armed). U-shaped key is supplied to reset the HUS-7A. hold-up switch sends a signal to a dedicated 24 hour hold-up circuit of a burglar control panel. Window Reset Key Hole Screw Plate (4mm) 15/16 (43mm) View (75mm) View View C Rating DC DC AC Stroke Force Method Amp Amp Amp to 7mm ( – 350g Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880128 – REV B 1 OF 1

A Brand BUTTON HOLD-UP SWITCH Dual button activation to eliminate accidental triggering SPDT transfer contact for supervised loop Terminal strip with three wire terminals Tamper protected switch mechanism using UL listed microswitch Concealed mounting screw Status window indicator White plastic case housing HUSD-15BL latching button,tool reset (included) HUSD-15BM momentary button, auto-reset HUSD-15B Series is a Form C (SPDT), dual button hold-up switch that is designed to generate an alarm condition only when both buttons pressed simultaneously, thus preventing accidental triggering. housing of this series is specially designed with a status window, red (alarm) and blue (armed), to verify the switch condition. The housing screw is concealed to provide additional tampering protection. The built-in UL approved microswitch design generates an alarm when the cover is removed or damaged. The terminal strip consists of three wire ports that provide a firm and secure wiring installation. HUSD-15BL is designed for latching operation when triggered. The HUSD-15BM is designed for momentary operation. Installation (54) (25) Terminals Reset Window Screw Plate (54) (27) (40) (3) COM. Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support:866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8880126 – REV B 1 OF 2 BUTTON HOLD-UP SWITCH Brand Method N.O-Latch Type Micro Switch Type Micro Switch Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Red Double Button Red Double Button Rating DC 30V DC 125V AC 4370037 – 14 – 120 – 49 IN USA #8880126 – REV B 2 OF 2

A Brand HOLD-UP SWITCH Form C contact Metal housing Key reset Silent operation Status window indicator (armed, alarmed) Mechanical operation Terminals for easy wiring HUSK-20 is a mechanical hold-up switch designed for silent operation. It is activated by using one finger to press down on the switch. activated, the switch mechanism locks, insuring an immediate alarm signal. A status window designed on top of the hold-up switch its condition: RED (alarmed) and BLUE (armed). To reset the HUSK-20, use the key provided. The housing is made of metal and is gray. hold-up switch sends a signal to a dedicated 24 hour hold-up circuit of a burglar control panel. That signal in turn will send the immediate to police or central station. Wiring N.O. COM. : Common : Normally Close : Normally Open : End Of Line Resistor Rating DC DC AC Terminals Range #18 – 176 – 80 Electric Signal Co., LLC St. Louis, MO Cust Service: 866-240-1870 Tech Support: 866-956-1211 Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com IN USA #8850046 – REV C 1 OF 1

No text preview available.

Features Mounts with included stacker bracket May mount in panel, accessory cabinet, ae-2, ae-8 or ae-14 Cabinets or the pSN-1000/e power Supply provides 6 IDC Input Circuits Maximum 31 IDC-6 per panel Maximum p-Link wire length of 20 feet. Initiating Device Circuit expander (IDC-6) provides an 6 inputs per module. The panel supports up to thirty-one IDC-6 modules. The circuits are power-limited and supervised. inputs are suitable to monitor 2-wire smoke detectors. Smoke shall be installed in compliance with NFpa 72. Inputs can be used for automatic, manual, waterflow or supervisory service. IDC-6 communicates via the p-Link communication bus. IDC-6 can be mounted in either the control panel cabinet, the power supply, ae-2, ae-8 or the ae-14 expander cabinet. card is mounted to the exclusive Stacker Bracket for secure and mounting. IDC-6 is connected to the fire control panels using a 4-wire RS- connection. The connection is power limited and supervised. The must be mounted in either a compatible fire alarm panel, the or within 20 feet of the panel or power supply using the ae-8, or the ae-14 expander cabinet. each card is mounted to exclusive Stacker Bracket for secure and accessible mounting. Specifications Standby Current alarm Current PWR Standby Current PWR Alarm Current Zone Wiring Zone Capacitance Zone Short Circuit Temperature Humidity Range no. of IDC-6 panels ma ma ma (maximum Standby) ma (maximum alarm) ohms max mF max ma to 120 (0 to 49 C) (non-condensing) 4″ x 6″ x 1 1/8″ Series, AFC/ARC Series, page 1 OF 2 A P-Link and IDC Power Wiring B P-Link and IDC Power Wiring Module Class A (Left) or Class B (Right) Wiring Example Open Contact Part K EOL Open Contact or Smoke Detector 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – Information Expander No. page 2 OF 2

IFS/IFSS SERIES FLOW SWITCH UL Guide (NKPZ) for industrial control equipment per UL UL CSA Service Pressure: 250 PSI Contacts: Motor Ratings : Horsepower : 1/8 F.L.A. : 3.8 L.R.A. : 22.8 Pilot Duty Rating : 120/240 Contacts: Motor Ratings : Horsepower : 1/2 F.L.A. : 9.8 L.R.A. : 58.8 Pilot Duty Rating : 120/240 Temperature Range: Temperature Range: / IFS-HC Pipe Connection: / IFSS-HC Pipe Connection: Entrance: Two For Model any fluid not harmful to brass, stainless steel, or EPDM and not controls) that protect against, or systems (alarm, supervisory IN USA 1 OF 3 #5401022 – rev P-1 SERIES FLOW SWITCH And Installation

IFS-WP 1&2/IFSS-WP 1&2 FLOW SWITCH UL UL CSA CE Service Pressure: Die-cast Motor Ratings : 240VAC Duty Rating : 125VA 120/240VAC Specifications: : 1/8 F.L.A. : 3.8 L.R.A. : 22.8 Suitable NEMA Temperature Range: Temperature Range: / IFS-WP2 Pipe Connection: / IFSS-WP2 Pipe Connection: Entrance: For when a flow or no flow condition occurs in a variety of controls) that protect against, or systems (alarm, supervisory IN USA #5401041 – rev L-1 1 OF 4 And Installation

IFS-WPS/IFSS-WPS FLOW SWITCH UL CSA CE Service Pressure: Die-cast Motor Ratings : 230VAC Duty Rating : 332VA 120/240VAC Specifications: : 1/3 F.L.A. : 7.2 L.R.A. : 43.2 Suitable NEMA Temperature Range: Temperature Range: Pipe Connection: Pipe Connection: Entrance: One For switch can serve as a way to start and stop electrically device is designed for use only as an operating control. IN USA #5401087 – rev G-1 1 OF 3 FLOW SWITCH Turn sensitivity screw to increase flow rate required sensitivity screw to the flow rate And Installation

Installation Manual Bases: PAD100-RB & PAD100-SB Smoke Detector Smoke / Heat Detector Combination (ANSI/UL 268 and ANSI/UL 521 Listed) Detector Monoxide Detector 521 Listed) 2075 Listed) 268 Listed) Description document provides instructions for mounting and wiring the Detector Bases PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB. The following detectors are compatible Detector Bases PAD100-IB, PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB. PAD100-PD: PAD100-PHD: PAD100-HD: PAD100-CD: Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) are shown in 1. The SLC supports NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. Smoke Detector Smoke / Heat Detector Detector Monoxide Detector SLC2 + Base SLC2 + SLC2 + Base FACP (SLC) BASE BASE / MODULE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 1: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-IB 1 is typical of NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-IB base. Class A (FIGURE 2) arrangement two separate conducts would return from the detector base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In X, it is required to use PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases (FIGURE 3). BASE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IB NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 2: Wiring (Class A) Using PAD100-IB BASE AREA TO BE ISOLATED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT IB NEXT TO A FACP SHALL BE INSTALLED 20 FEET FROM THE TERMINAL OF THE FACP 3: Wiring (Class X) Using PAD100-IB Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-RB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) are shown in 4. The SLC supports NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. FACP (SLC) NO Base SLC – + C NO Base SLC – + + – + – 4: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-RB 4 is typical of NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-RB base. Class A arrangement two separate conductors return from the last base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In Class it is required to use PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases). The typical field is in Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB section of this manual. Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-SB field wiring diagrams for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) are shown in 5. The SLC supports NFPA wiring Class B, A and X. PWR + Base SLC – + PWR + Base SLC – + FACP (SLC) + – + – 5: Wiring (Class B) Using PAD100-SB 5 is typical of NFPA Class B SLC (S+, S-) Wiring using the PAD100-SB base. Class A arrangement two separate conductors would return from the last base to a listed compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). In Class it is required to use PAD100-IB (Addressable Isolator Bases). The typical field is in Field Wiring Diagram(s) for PAD100-IB section of this manual. Wiring Instruction To ensure proper installation of the detector head to the base, wires shall be dressed properly at the time of installation When using PAD100 Bases, observe the correct polarity of SLC wiring. WIRING TO BE USED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF ARTICLE 300.3(B) OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70, AS WELL AS ARTICLE 210. THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARD 72. Break wire runs to provide supervision for connections made to each pair. Base Mounting PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB should be mounted directly on the box. The PAD100-IB, PAD100-RB and PAD100-SB mounting holes are for a single gang, 4 octagon or 4 square box. Use a box for each and run the power circuit to all base locations. 12 to 22 AWG conductor

Features potter Intelligen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically e-mails trouble alerts and maintenance Integrated 0,19 kW (1/4 HP) oil-less air compressor included meet NFPA 13 required 30 minutes fill for 454 L (120 Gals.) at 2,76 BAR (40 PSI) (276 kPa). Handles up to 2555 L (675 Gals.) of total sprinkler system Easy plug and play installation. 37,9 L (10 Gals.) nitrogen tank. Form C dry contacts for Building Management System (BMS) Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-100 (EU) utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for gas Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve is not CE Marked, Pending. Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve monitors the fire system to ensure high purity nitrogen is consistent the sprinkler system. INS-100 (EU) is a fully assembled package ready to be connected a new or existing fire sprinkler system. This turn-key system an integrated air compressor, nitrogen membrane, tank, all air equipment, and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. Specifications (36 1/4 H X 660mm (26 W X 306mm (12 D (35 1/2 H X 457mm (18 W X 254mm (10 kg (130 lbs.) (1.8A) single phase 50HZ Cabinet Size Tank Size Supply Available in: Sprinkler System Cabinet Mounting Tank Mounting pressure Range Female NPT 9,53mm (3/8-16 12,7mm (1/2 BAR (80 PSI) (552 kPA) (50 to 43 (110 Potter INS-100 (EU) should be installed in a dry, clean, and ventilated room with ambient temperatures above 10 (50 all times. Allow access to the front for service and place the unit a location that is conveniently located near fire sprinkler system a drain, and a dedicated electrical connection. The Intelligen Nitrogen Generator should always be installed in adequately ventilated room. Rapid release of nitrogen gas into an space displaces the oxygen and can cause an asphyxiation For detailed installation and operation instructions please refer the Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator Manual #5403644. page 1 OF 3 Dimensions 1 306mm (1/2″) KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION 919mm 1/4in 622mm 1/2″ 127mm 660mm 305mm 178mm 362mm 1/4in 64mm 1/2in 457mm MOUNTING HOLES (4 PLCS) MOUNT BRACKET TO STUDS USING BOLT (4 PLCS) ( DISPLAY BSPT NITROGEN OUT A COMPRESSOR ON/OFF SWITCH (3/4″) ELECTRICAL CONDUIT CONNECTION PLCS (1/2″) ELECTRICAL CONDUIT CONNECTION PLCS TO FLO

Features potter Intelligen Controller (patent pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically e-mails trouble alerts and maintenance Integrated 1/4 HP oil-less air compressor included to meet NFPA required 30 minutes fill for 160 gallon system at 40 PSI. Handles up to 675 gallons of total sprinkler system capacity. Easy plug and play installation. 10 gallon nitrogen tank. Form C dry contacts for Building Management System (BMS) Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-100 utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for gas Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Purge Valve monitors the fire protection system to ensure purity nitrogen is consistent throughout the sprinkler system. INS-100 is a fully assembled package ready to be connected to a or existing fire sprinkler system. This turn-key system includes an air compressor, nitrogen membrane, tank, all air filtration and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. Specifications H X 26 W X 12 D H X 18 W X 10 lbs. (2.8A) single phase, 200-240V (1.4A) single Cabinet Size Tank Size Supply Available in: Sprinkler System Cabinet Mounting Holes Tank Mounting pressure Range Female NPT 5/16 1/2 PSI (10 to 110 (43 Potter INS-100 should be installed in a dry, clean, and well room with ambient temperatures above 50 at all times. access to the front for service and place the unit in a location that conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, a dedicated electrical connection. The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. release of nitrogen gas into an enclosed space displaces the and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation operation instructions please refer to the Potter IntelliGen Generator Manual #5403644. page 1 OF 3 Dimensions 1 KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION KNOCKOUT FOR BMS AND NETWORK CONNECTION 1/4″ 1/4″ 1/4″ 1/4″ 1/4″ 1/4″ 24 1/2″ 24 1/2″ 24 1/2″ 24 1/2″ 24 1/2″ 24 1/2″

INTELLIGEN E A T U R E S Fully Advanced leak rate detection Integrated bypass alarm Web connected system can be monitored remotely Potter IntelliGen Controller (Patent Pending) Emails trouble alerts and maintenance reminders Includes Mount Units (1 Pallet) Specifications Riser (gal) total system (gal) Requirements Tank / Nitrogen (gal) Oil-less Oil-less @ 100-120V 1PH @ 200-240V 1PH @ 115-120V 1PH @ 230-240V 1PH 1/2 HP Oil-less @ 115-120V 1PH 60HZ @ 230-240V 1PH 60HZ / 10 / 10 / 20 & Dimensions Number Cabinet x 26 x 12 x 26 x 12 x 31 x 15 Tank x 18 x 10 x 18 x 10 x 36 x 14 Cabinet (Lbs) Tank (Lbs) (Lbs) 40 PSI Assuming new system leak rate of 1.5 PSI per 24 hours to quote? Here what we need: Largest riser size (gal) Number of risers or Total capacity (gal) Supervisory pressure Electric Signal Company, LLC co[email protected] 866-956-1211 www.pottersignal.com total system (gal) Requirements HP Oil-less HP Oil-less @ 115V 1PH @ 230V 1PH @ 230V 1PH @ 230V 3PH @ 460V 3PH / Nitrogen (gal) Units (1 Pallet) Specifications Riser (gal) & Dimensions Units (3 Pallets) Specifications Riser Number x 42″ x 32″ x 42″ x 32″ (Lbs) (Lbs) (gal) total system (gal) Requirements / Nitrogen (gal) HP Lubricated HP Lubricated HP Lubricated @ 200-208V 3PH @ 230-240V 3PH @ 460-480V 3PH @ 200-208V 3PH @ 230-240V 3PH @ 460-480V 3PH @ 200-208V 3PH @ 230-240V 3PH @ 460-480V 3PH / 60 / 60 / 120 two (2) 120V connections for nitrogen cabinet and air tank blow-down solenoid. & Dimensions x 31″ x 13″ x 31″ x 13″ x 31″ x 13″ Tank Comressor x 20 x 20 x 24 x 37″ x 24″ x 37″ x 24″ x 37″ x 24″ (Lbs) 40 PSI Assuming new system leak rate of 1.5 PSI per 24 hours Generator Accessories Nitrogen Valve Kit Air Type Bleeder Valve Filters Device Kit Valve

No text preview available.

Features potter Intelligen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance Integrated 2 HP oil-less air compressor included to meet NFPA required 30 minutes fill for 3,407 L (900 Gal.) at 2,76 BAR kPa) (40 PSI). Handles up to 12,870 L (3,400 Gal.) of total sprinkler system Skid mounted unit easy plug and play installation. 20 gallons air tank and 20 gallon nitrogen tank. Form C dry contacts for Building Management System (BMS) FM Approved per Approval Standard 1035, Nitrogen Generators. Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-1000 (EU) utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for separation. Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve monitors the fire system to ensure high purity nitrogen is consistent the sprinkler system. INS-1000 (EU) is a fully assembled package ready to be to a new or existing fire sprinkler system. This turn-key includes an integrated air compressor, nitrogen membrane, all filtration equipment, tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. Specifications (54 x 1067mm (42 x 813mm (32 kg (450 lbs) (7A) single phase 50HZ and 380-440VAC (5A) phase 50HZ Supply in: Sprinkler Connection Holes Working Range Female BSPT 14,29mm ( 9/16 BAR (724 kPa) (105 PSI) (50 to 43 (110 Potter INS-1000 (EU) should be installed in a dry, clean, and well room with ambient temperatures above 10 at all times. access to the front for service and place the unit in a location that conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, a dedicated electrical connection. The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. release of nitrogen gas into an enclosed space displaces the and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation operation instructions please refer to the Potter IntelliGen Generator Manual #5403652. page 1 OF 2 1 mm 3 mm mm mm Information Number (EU), 220-240VAC 1PH 50 HZ (EU), 380-440VAC 3PH 50HZ LITER (20 GALLON) NITROGEN TANK (12 LONG FLEXIBLE STEEL HOSE BSPT NITROGEN CONNECTION LITER (20 GALLON) AIR TANK CONNECTION TO FLOOR DRAIN USING (3/8 X 3050mm (10 TO CONNECT TUBE 2 DISPLAY 4 ON/OFF SWITCH (1/2 OR M21

Features potter Intelligen Controller (patent pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance Integrated 2 HP oil-less air compressor included to meet NFPA required 30 minutes fill for 1,000 gallon system at 40 PSI. Handles up to 3,400 gallons of total sprinkler system capacity on NFPA 13 allowable leak rate of 1.5 PSI per 24 hours a new sprinkler system). Skid mounted unit easy plug and play installation. 20 gallons air tank and 20 gallon nitrogen tank. Form C dry contacts for Building Management System (BMS) FM Approved per Approval Standard 1035, Nitrogen Generators. Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-1000 utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for gas Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Purge Valve monitors the fire protection system to ensure purity nitrogen is consistent throughout the sprinkler system. INS-1000 is a fully assembled package ready to be connected to new or existing fire sprinkler system. This turn-key system includes integrated air compressor, nitrogen membrane, all air filtration tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. Specifications H x 42 W x 32 D lbs (12A) single phase and 230V (6A), 460V (3.8A) three Supply in: Sprinkler Connection Holes Working Range Female NPT 9/16 PSI (10 to 110 (43 Potter INS-1000 should be installed in a dry, clean, and well room with ambient temperatures above 50 at all times. access to the front for service and place the unit in a location that conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, a dedicated electrical connection. The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. release of nitrogen gas into an enclosed space displaces the and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation operation instructions please refer to the Potter IntelliGen Generator Manual #5403645. page 1 OF 2 1 2 4 3 CONNECTION Information Number 230VAC 1PH 60 HZ 230VAC 3PH 60 HZ 460VAC 3PH 60 HZ Nitrogen System-1000, 230VAC Single Phase Nitrogen System-1000, 230VAC Three Phase Nitrogen System-1000, 460VAC Three Phase Nitrogen Purge Valve Purge Valve Air Maintenance Device Nitrogen Analyzer page 2 OF 2

No text preview available.

INS-100/250 (EU) Generator Operation, and Manual Louis, MO #5403651 – D INFORMATION PROVISIONS & LIMITATIONS Electric Signal Company, LLC (the warrants to each original purchaser ( of its new products from the or its Authorized Distributor that such products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, made with good materials and No warranty is made with respect to: Any product, which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in the Companies judgment, as to affect the product adversely. Any product, which has, in the Companies judgment been subjected to negligence, accident, improper storage, improper installation application. Any product, which has not been operated or maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the Company. Components or accessories manufactured, warranted and serviced by others. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. for items described in 4 above should be submitted directly to the manufacturer. PERIOD Company obligation under this Warranty is limited to repair or, at its option, replacing during normal business hours at the designated of the Company, any part that in its judgment proved not to be as warranted within the applicable Warranty Period as follows. non-consumable components are warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Consumable are not covered under warranty. The must have been installed by either a factory authorized distributor or agent in accordance with the factory recommendations taking into all other local site conditions not originally noted to the factory. The unit must be operated and maintained in accordance with the recommendations and original design conditions. Failure to provide such proof of the above may void warranty. TRANSPORTATION & INSPECTION Company will repair or replace any product or part thereof which in the Companies judgment is proved to be not as warranted. Labor are not covered under warranty. costs of transportation of product, labor or parts claimed not to be as warranted and, of repaired or replaced parts to or from factory be borne by purchaser. The Company may require the return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of its facilities as by the Company, transportation prepaid by Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty. parts provided under the terms of the warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warranty Period of the product upon installed to the same extent as if such parts were original components. FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IT IS EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO TITLE, THE MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED OR MERCHANTABILITY. REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY REMEDY AVAILABLE THE PURCHASER AND IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED. statement, representation, agreement, or understanding, oral or written, made by any agent, distributor, representative or employee of Company which is not contained in this Warranty will be binding upon the company unless made in writing and executed by an officer the Company. warranty shall not be effective as to any claim which is not presented within 30 days after the date upon which the product is claimed to have been as warranted. Any action for breach of this warranty must be commenced within one year after the date upon which the of action occurred. adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall not be construed as an admission by the Company that any product was not as DISPOSITION Company will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any product, which proves to defective within the warranty period. Before returning any product, write or call the distributor, agent or authorized company from the product was purchased, describing defect and giving date and number of original invoice, as well as proof of Factory supplied and proof of scheduled maintenance. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer upon delivery to the common carrier. SUITABILITY States, Localities and Countries have codes and regulations governing sales, construction, installation, and/or use of products for purposes, w

INS-100/250 Generator Operation, and Manual Louis, MO #5403644 – G INFORMATION PROVISIONS & LIMITATIONS Electric Signal Company, LLC (the warrants to each original purchaser ( of its new products from the or its Authorized Distributor that such products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, made with good materials and No warranty is made with respect to: Any product, which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in the Companies judgment, as to affect the product adversely. Any product, which has, in the Companies judgment been subjected to negligence, accident, improper storage, improper installation application. Any product, which has not been operated or maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the Company. Components or accessories manufactured, warranted and serviced by others. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. for items described in 4 above should be submitted directly to the manufacturer. PERIOD Company obligation under this Warranty is limited to repair or, at its option, replacing during normal business hours at the designated of the Company, any part that in its judgment proved not to be as warranted within the applicable Warranty Period as follows. non-consumable components are warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Consumable are not covered under warranty. The must have been installed by either a factory authorized distributor or agent in accordance with the factory recommendations taking into all other local site conditions not originally noted to the factory. The unit must be operated and maintained in accordance with the recommendations and original design conditions. Failure to provide such proof of the above may void warranty. TRANSPORTATION & INSPECTION Company will repair or replace any product or part thereof which in the Companies judgment is proved to be not as warranted. Labor are not covered under warranty. costs of transportation of product, labor or parts claimed not to be as warranted and, of repaired or replaced parts to or from factory be borne by purchaser. The Company may require the return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of its facilities as by the Company, transportation prepaid by Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty. parts provided under the terms of the warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warranty Period of the product upon installed to the same extent as if such parts were original components. FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IT IS EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO TITLE, THE MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED OR MERCHANTABILITY. REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY REMEDY AVAILABLE THE PURCHASER AND IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED. statement, representation, agreement, or understanding, oral or written, made by any agent, distributor, representative or employee of Company which is not contained in this Warranty will be binding upon the company unless made in writing and executed by an officer the Company. warranty shall not be effective as to any claim which is not presented within 30 days after the date upon which the product is claimed to have been as warranted. Any action for breach of this warranty must be commenced within one year after the date upon which the of action occurred. adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall not be construed as an admission by the Company that any product was not as DISPOSITION Company will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any product, which proves to defective within the warranty period. Before returning any product, write or call the distributor, agent or authorized company from the product was purchased, describing defect and giving date and number of original invoice, as well as proof of Factory supplied and proof of scheduled maintenance. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer upon delivery to the common carrier. SUITABILITY States, Localities and Countries have codes and regulations governing sales, construction, installation, and/or use of products for purposes, which

No text preview available.

Features Potter IntelliGen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance 7.5 HP lubricated tank mounted air compressor included to meet 13 required 30 minutes fill for 6819 L (1,800 Gals.) system 2,76 BAR (40 PSI) (276 kPa). Handles up to 23470 L (6,200 Gals.) of total sprinkler system (based on NFPA 13 allowable leak rate of 0,103 BAR PSI) (10,3 kPa) per 24 hours for a new sprinkler system). Three individual skids 303 L (80 Gals.) tank mounted air nitrogen cabinet and 227 L (60 Gals.) nitrogen tank. IntelliGen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-1500 (EU) utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for separation. Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve is not CE Marked, Pending. Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve monitors the fire system to ensure high purity nitrogen is consistent the sprinkler system. INS-1500 (EU) is to be connected to a new or existing fire sprinkler This system includes an air compressor, nitrogen membrane, air filtration equipment, tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. (74 H x 940mm (37 W x 610mm (24 D (70 H x 766mm (31 W x 314mm (13 D (53 H x 508mm (20 kg (650 lbs) Specifications Size Cabinet Tank Size Weight Cabinet Tank Compressor Supply* in: Working Range BAR (145 PSI) (1,000 kPa) (50 to 43 (110 kg (70 lbs) kg (95 lbs) VAC (11.1A) three phase 50 Hz Requires two (2) 220 V 50 Hz connections for nitrogen cabinet air tank blow-down solenoid. PAGE 1 OF 4 Potter INS-1500 (EU) should be installed in a dry, clean, and well ventilated room with ambient temperatures above 10 at all times. Allow to the front for service and place the unit in a location that is conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, and a dedicated connection. The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. Rapid release of nitrogen into an enclosed space displaces the oxygen and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation and operation instructions please refer the Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator Manual #5403653. Dimensions 1 CONNECTION PAGE 2 OF 4 LITER (60 GALLON) Dimensions 2 (9/16 X 19.8mm (7/8 LOCATED 90 APART ON ( BOLT (4 PLCS) PAGE 3 OF 4 Dimensions 3 (20

Features potter Intelligen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance 7.5 HP lubricated tank mounted air compressor included to meet 13 required 30 minutes fill for 2,000 gallon system at 40 Handles up to 6,200 gallons of total sprinkler system capacity on NFPA 13 allowable leak rate of 1.5 PSI per 24 hours a new sprinkler system). Three individual skids 80 gallon tank mounted air compressor, cabinet and 60 gallon nitrogen tank. FM Approved per Approval Standard 1035, Nitrogen Generators. Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-1500 utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for gas Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules in air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas is then through the air maintenance device and into the fire protection As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining oxygen in the fire protection system are exhausted by using the IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Purge Valve monitors the fire protection system to ensure purity nitrogen is consistent throughout the sprinkler system. INS-1500 is to be connected to a new or existing fire sprinkler This system includes an air compressor, nitrogen membrane, air filtration equipment, tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. lbs x 20 H x 31 W x 13 D H x 37 W x 24 D Specifications Size Cabinet Tank Size Weight Cabinet Tank Compressor Supply* in: Working Range (10 to 110 (43 PSI lbs lbs (26.8A), 230-240V (22.3A), 460-480V (11.1A) three Requires two (2) 120 V connections for nitrogen cabinet and air blow-down solenoid. page 1 OF 4 Potter INS-1500 should be installed in a dry, clean, and well ventilated room with ambient temperatures above 50 at all times. Allow access to front for service and place the unit in a location that is conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, and a dedicated electrical The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. Rapid release of nitrogen gas into enclosed space displaces the oxygen and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation and operation instructions please refer to the Intelligen Nitrogen Generator Manual #5403646. Dimensions 1 CONNECTION PAGE 2 OF 4 LITER (60 GALLON) Dimensions 2 X 7/8 SLOT 90 APART A 17″ BOLT (4 PLCS) page 3 OF 4 Dimensions 3 CONNECTION APART ON A Information Number

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

INS-1500/2000 (EU) Generators Operation, and Manual Louis, MO #5403653 – B INFORMATION PROVISIONS & LIMITATIONS Electric Signal Company, LLC (the warrants to each original purchaser ( of its new products from the or its Authorized Distributor that such products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, made with good materials and No warranty is made with respect to: Any product, which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in the Companies judgment, as to affect the product adversely. Any product, which has, in the Companies judgment been subjected to negligence, accident, improper storage, improper installation application. Any product, which has not been operated or maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the Company. Components or accessories manufactured, warranted and serviced by others. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. for items described in 4 above should be submitted directly to the manufacturer. PERIOD Company obligation under this Warranty is limited to repair or, at its option, replacing during normal business hours at the designated of the Company, any part that in its judgment proved not to be as warranted within the applicable Warranty Period as follows. non-consumable components are warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Consumable are not covered under warranty. The must have been installed by either a factory authorized distributor or agent in accordance with the factory recommendations taking into all other local site conditions not originally noted to the factory. The unit must be operated and maintained in accordance with the recommendations and original design conditions. Failure to provide such proof of the above may void warranty. TRANSPORTATION & INSPECTION Company will repair or replace any product or part thereof which in the Companies judgment is proved to be not as warranted. Labor are not covered under warranty. costs of transportation of product, labor or parts claimed not to be as warranted and, of repaired or replaced parts to or from factory be borne by purchaser. The Company may require the return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of its facilities as by the Company, transportation prepaid by Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty. parts provided under the terms of the warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warranty Period of the product upon installed to the same extent as if such parts were original components. FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IT IS EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO TITLE, THE MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED OR MERCHANTABILITY. REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY REMEDY AVAILABLE THE PURCHASER AND IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED. statement, representation, agreement, or understanding, oral or written, made by any agent, distributor, representative or employee of Company which is not contained in this Warranty will be binding upon the company unless made in writing and executed by an officer the Company. warranty shall not be effective as to any claim which is not presented within 30 days after the date upon which the product is claimed to have been as warranted. Any action for breach of this warranty must be commenced within one year after the date upon which the of action occurred. adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall not be construed as an admission by the Company that any product was not as DISPOSITION Company will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any product, which proves to defective within the warranty period. Before returning any product, write or call the distributor, agent or authorized company from the product was purchased, describing defect and giving date and number of original invoice, as well as proof of Factory supplied and proof of scheduled maintenance. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer upon delivery to the common carrier. SUITABILITY States, Localities and Countries have codes and regulations governing sales, construction, installation, and/or use of products for purposes

INS-1500/2000 Generators Operation, and Manual Louis, MO #5403646 – F INFORMATION PROVISIONS & LIMITATIONS Electric Signal Company, LLC (the warrants to each original purchaser ( of its new products from the or its Authorized Distributor that such products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, made with good materials and No warranty is made with respect to: Any product, which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in the Companies judgment, as to affect the product adversely. Any product, which has, in the Companies judgment been subjected to negligence, accident, improper storage, improper installation application. Any product, which has not been operated or maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the Company. Components or accessories manufactured, warranted and serviced by others. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. for items described in 4 above should be submitted directly to the manufacturer. PERIOD Company obligation under this Warranty is limited to repair or, at its option, replacing during normal business hours at the designated of the Company, any part that in its judgment proved not to be as warranted within the applicable Warranty Period as follows. non-consumable components are warranted for 12 months from the date of purchase. Consumable are not covered under warranty. The must have been installed by either a factory authorized distributor or agent in accordance with the factory recommendations taking into all other local site conditions not originally noted to the factory. The unit must be operated and maintained in accordance with the recommendations and original design conditions. Failure to provide such proof of the above may void warranty. TRANSPORTATION & INSPECTION Company will repair or replace any product or part thereof which in the Companies judgment is proved to be not as warranted. Labor are not covered under warranty. costs of transportation of product, labor or parts claimed not to be as warranted and, of repaired or replaced parts to or from factory be borne by purchaser. The Company may require the return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of its facilities as by the Company, transportation prepaid by Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty. parts provided under the terms of the warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warranty Period of the product upon installed to the same extent as if such parts were original components. FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IT IS EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO TITLE, THE MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED OR MERCHANTABILITY. REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY REMEDY AVAILABLE THE PURCHASER AND IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED. statement, representation, agreement, or understanding, oral or written, made by any agent, distributor, representative or employee of Company which is not contained in this Warranty will be binding upon the company unless made in writing and executed by an officer the Company. warranty shall not be effective as to any claim which is not presented within 30 days after the date upon which the product is claimed to have been as warranted. Any action for breach of this warranty must be commenced within one year after the date upon which the of action occurred. adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall not be construed as an admission by the Company that any product was not as DISPOSITION Company will make a good faith effort for prompt correction or other adjustment with respect to any product, which proves to defective within the warranty period. Before returning any product, write or call the distributor, agent or authorized company from the product was purchased, describing defect and giving date and number of original invoice, as well as proof of Factory supplied and proof of scheduled maintenance. Title and risk of loss pass to buyer upon delivery to the common carrier. SUITABILITY States, Localities and Countries have codes and regulations governing sales, construction, installation, and/or use of products for purposes, whi

Features Replaces Kit 1 .01 Activated O-rings Filter Elements Power off the air compressor using the customer supplied and the Control Power Only Switch located on the Power off the nitrogen generator using the customer installed Open Open Locate 1 2 3 Using page 1 OF 2 Disconnect the drain tubes from the filter bowl by pushing up drain bowl from the filter body. The float Maintenance Alerts and for Leaks Turn To Press Enter Select The To To The Turn If air compressor of the INS-1500/2000 should take no The If Allow If there is a drop in pressure, soap all filters and blow-down Information 0090207 No. After 4 Remove old O-rings and replace with the O-rings in the filter Clear Replace 5

No text preview available.

Features Potter IntelliGen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance 7.5 HP lubricated tank mounted air compressor included to meet 13 required 30 minutes fill for 7570 L (2,000 Gals.) system 2,76 BAR (40 PSI) (276 kPa). Handles up to 45425 L (12,000 Gals.) of total sprinkler system (based on NFPA 13 allowable leak rate of 0,103 BAR PSI) (10,3 kPa) per 24 hours for a new sprinkler system). Three individual skids 303 L (80 Gals.) tank mounted air nitrogen cabinet and 227 L (60 Gals.) nitrogen tank. IntelliGen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-2000 (EU) utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for separation. Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve is not CE Marked, Pending. Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve monitors the fire system to ensure high purity nitrogen is consistent the sprinkler system. INS-2000 (EU) is to be connected to a new or existing fire sprinkler This system includes an air compressor, nitrogen membrane, air filtration equipment, tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. (74 H x 940mm (37 W x 610mm (24 D (70 H x 766mm (31 W x 314mm (13 D (53 H x 508mm (20 kg (660 lbs) Specifications Size Cabinet Tank Size Weight Cabinet Tank Compressor Supply* in: Operating Range BAR (145 PSI) (1,000 kPa) (50 to 43 (110 kg (70 lbs) kg (95 lbs) VAC (11.1A) three phase 50 Hz Requires two (2) 220 V 50 Hz connections for nitrogen cabinet air tank blow-down solenoid. PAGE 1 OF 4 Potter INS-2000 (EU) should be installed in a dry, clean, and well ventilated room with ambient temperatures above 10 at all times. Allow to the front for service and place the unit in a location that is conveniently located near fire sprinkler system connections, a drain, and a dedicated connection. The Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator should always be installed in an adequately ventilated room. Rapid release of nitrogen into an enclosed space displaces the oxygen and can cause an asphyxiation hazard. For detailed installation and operation instructions please refer the Potter IntelliGen Nitrogen Generator Manual #5403653. Dimensions 1 CONNECTION PAGE 2 OF 4 LITER (60 GALLON) Dimensions 2 (9/16 X 19.8mm (7/8 LOCATED 90 APART ON ( BOLT (4 PLCS) PAGE 3 OF 4 Dimensions 3 (20

Features potter Intelligen Controller (Patent Pending) Fully automates the air fill and nitrogen fill procedure Advance leak rate detection Integrated Bypass alarm Web Enabled system can be monitored anywhere there is connectivity Automatically emails trouble alerts and maintenance 7.5 HP lubricated tank mounted air compressor included to meet 13 required 30 minutes fill for 2,400 gallon system at 40 Handles up to 12,000 gallons of total sprinkler system capacity on NFPA 13 allowable leak rate of 1.5 PSI per 24 hours a new sprinkler system). Three individual skids 80 gallon tank mounted air compressor, cabinet and 60 gallon nitrogen tank. FM Approved per Approval Standard 1035, Nitrogen Generators. Intelligen Series of Nitrogen Generators are specifically to generate on-site, 98%+ purity nitrogen for use in fire sprinkler systems. When used as a supervisory gas in fire systems, nitrogen slows corrosion, improves the life of your and lowers maintenance costs. INS-2000 utilizes nitrogen membrane technology for gas Nitrogen membranes are highly effective and a cost way of producing on-site nitrogen. Acting as a gas filter, the membrane separates the oxygen and water vapor molecules the air from the nitrogen molecules. The high purity nitrogen gas then piped through the air maintenance device and into the fire system. As the system fills with nitrogen, the remaining molecules in the fire protection system are exhausted by using Potter IntelliPurge Nitrogen Purge Valve. The Potter IntelliPurge Purge Valve monitors the fire protection system to ensure purity nitrogen is consistent throughout the sprinkler system. INS-2000 is to be connected to a new or existing fire sprinkler This system includes an air compressor, nitrogen membrane, air filtration equipment, tanks and the Potter IntelliGen Controller. Potter IntelliGen Controller ensures the contractor the easiest and operation of any nitrogen generator system in the industry. unit is designed to be turned on and walk away. The built-in capabilities will make corrections and alert you to any changes. lbs x 20 H x 31 W x 13 D H x 37 W x 24 D Specifications Size Cabinet Tank Size Weight Cabinet Tank Compressor Supply* in: Operating Range (10 to 110 (43 PSI lbs lbs (26.8A), 230-240V (22.3A), 460-480V (11.1A) three Requires two (2) 120 V connections for